Microsoft Office for the Older and Wiser

05_711965-pp01.indd 1605_711965-pp01.indd 16 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Get up and running with Ofﬁ ce 2010 and Ofﬁ ce 2007

Sean McManus

A John Wiley and Sons, Ltd, Publication

Registered ofﬁ ce John Wiley & Sons Ltd, The Atrium, Southern Gate, Chichester, West Sussex, PO19 8SQ, United Kingdom

Editorial ofﬁ ce John Wiley & Sons Ltd, The Atrium, Southern Gate, Chichester, West Sussex, PO19 8SQ, United Kingdom

For details of our global editorial ofﬁ ces, for customer services and for information about how to apply for permission to reuse the copyright material in this book please see our website at www.wiley.com/wiley-blackwell.

The right of the author to be identiﬁ ed as the author of this work has been asserted in accordance with the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, except as permitted by the UK Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988, without the prior permission of the publisher.

Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats. Some content that appears in print may not be available in electronic books.

Designations used by companies to distinguish their products are often claimed as trademarks. All brand names and product names used in this book are trade names, service marks, trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The publisher is not associated with any product or vendor mentioned in this book. This publication is designed to provide accu- rate and authoritative information in regard to the subject matter covered. It is sold on the understanding that the publisher is not engaged in rendering professional services. If professional advice or other expert assistance is required, the services of a competent professional should be sought.

Microsoft product screenshots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

All website information was correct at the time of going to press. Websites do constantly update their privacy settings and policies. Please check the relevant website homepage to ﬁ nd their current policies.

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library.

978-0-470-71196-5

Set in 11/13 Optima LT Std by Wiley Indianapolis Composition Services Printed in Great Britain by Bell & Bain, Glasgow

01_711965-ffirs.indd ii01_711965-ffirs.indd ii 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Contents

Introduction 1

What is Microsoft Ofﬁ ce? 2 How this book is structured 4 What you will need 5 Familiarising yourself with the keyboard and the mouse 7 Choosing the right application for the job 11

Part I – Using Microsoft Word 15

Chapter 1 – Writing a letter with Microsoft Word 17

Starting Word 18 Saving your work 19 Writing your letter 24 Making changes to what you’ve written 25 Deleting text 28 Moving text around 28

02_711965-ftoc.indd iii02_711965-ftoc.indd iii 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Contents

Changing the appearance of your letter 35 Clearing formatting and undoing mistakes 40 Adding your address to your letter 40 Checking your spelling 42 Printing your letter 47 Finishing your Word session 49 What else can you do? 50

Chapter 2 – Creating a poster with Microsoft Word 53

Starting a new document with a template 54 Changing the view 58 Changing the text in your template 59 Inserting pictures in your poster 61 Inserting clip art in your poster 63 Printing your poster 66 What else can you do? 66

Chapter 3 – Publishing a newsletter with Word 69

Planning your newsletter 70 Creating dummy text 72 Choosing your paper size 73 Creating a title for your newsletter 75 Adding your ﬁ rst story 75 Getting a sense of style 77

02_711965-ftoc.indd iv02_711965-ftoc.indd iv 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Contents

Laying out your text in columns 88 Arranging your images 89 Advanced layout options 94 Adding the rest of your stories 100 Adding a table of contents 101 More to explore 102 Download my example newsletter 102 What else can you do? 103

Part II – Using Microsoft Excel 107

Chapter 4 – Managing your address book 109 with Excel

What is a spreadsheet? 110 Navigating the spreadsheet 112 Saving your spreadsheet 113 Organising your information into rows and columns 114 How much information to put into each cell? 115 Putting the headers into your address book 117 Entering your friends into your address book 120 Finding people in your address book 130 Printing your address book 135 What else can you do? 139

02_711965-ftoc.indd v02_711965-ftoc.indd v 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Contents

Chapter 5 – Creating a basic holiday budget 143 in Excel

Starting your holiday spreadsheet 144 Calculating the quantities 148 Calculating the total cost for each item 155 Converting the currency 158 Writing your own formulae 163 Using your spreadsheet to plan your holiday 164 Adding a holiday countdown 165 Protecting your privacy with encryption 166 Copying your budget into your itinerary in Word 168 What else can you do? 170

Chapter 6 – Creating personalised party 173 invitations using Excel and Word

What is mail merge? 174 Creating the standard invitation 175 Preparing your invitees list 178 Selecting recipients in Word 180 Selecting which rows of your spreadsheet to use 183 Adding names to your invitation 185 Previewing your invitations 186 Adding conditional content 187 Creating your ﬁ nished invitations 189

02_711965-ftoc.indd vi02_711965-ftoc.indd vi 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Contents

Creating your mailing labels 191 What else can you do? 194

Part III – Using Ofﬁ ce to Organise and Share Your Photos and Ideas 201

Chapter 7 – Creating a slide show of your 203 holiday photos using PowerPoint

What is PowerPoint? 204 Starting a new PowerPoint document 205 Previewing or showing your slide show 207 Familiarising yourself with the PowerPoint interface 209 Deleting a slide 210 Adding a new slide 211 Adding transitions and animations 214 Creating an instant photo album 217 Enabling automatic playback of your slide show 220 What else can you do? 221

Chapter 8 – Keeping a recipe book with OneNote 225

Understanding the OneNote screen 226 Creating a new notebook for your recipes 230 How OneNote saves your work 233 Creating the tabs for your notebook 235 Adding your recipes 236

vii

02_711965-ftoc.indd vii02_711965-ftoc.indd vii 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Contents

Capturing recipes from the Internet 243 Searching your recipes by ingredient 247 Printing recipes 247 What else can you do? 249

Chapter 9 – Using email to share your ideas and 253 documents

What is email? 254 Setting up email on your PC 255 Reading your emails in Windows Live Mail 263 Replying to emails and sending new emails 267 Emailing your Microsoft Ofﬁ ce ﬁ les 270 What else can you do? 277

Part IV – Appendices 281

Appendix A – Using keyboard shortcuts 283

Appendix B – Glossary 289

viii

02_711965-ftoc.indd viii02_711965-ftoc.indd viii 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Dedication

To Karen

About the Author

Sean McManus is a technology and business author. His previous books include Social Networking for the Older and Wiser, Small Business Websites That Work, and a novel about the music industry called University of Death. His tutorials and articles have appeared in magazines including Internet Magazine, Internet Works, Business 2.0, Making Music, Melody Maker and Personal Computer World. He created Wild Mood Swings (www.wildmoodswings.co.uk), a web toy that shows you websites to match your mood, and blogs regularly on his personal website at www.sean.co.uk.

Acknowledgements

Many thanks to everyone involved in creating this book. The team on this book includes (in order of appearance) Chris Webb (acquisitions editor), Birgit Gruber (acquisitions editor), Ellie Scott (publishing assistant), Juliet Booker (project editor), Adrian Arnold (technical reviewer), Grace Fairley (copy editor), Linda Clark (U3A reviewer), Steve Long (cartoonist), and everyone in the Wiley Composition Dept. (layout).

Thank you to Wylda Holland, Jean McManus, Karen McManus and Adrian Arnold for sharing their inspiring ideas for using Ofﬁ ce. The lists of additional projects at the end of each chapter are much stronger for their contributions, and Adrian’s feedback on the ﬁ rst draft was most helpful.

Many thanks as ever to my wonderful wife Karen for all her support on this project.

03_711965-flast.indd ix03_711965-flast.indd ix 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Publisher’s Acknowledgements

Some of the people who helped bring this book to market include the following:

Editorial and Production VP Consumer and Technology Publishing Director: Michelle Leete Associate Director – Book Content Management: Martin Tribe Associate Publisher: Chris Webb Executive Commissioning Editor: Birgit Gruber Publishing Assistant: Ellie Scott Project Editor: Juliet Booker Development Editor: Grace Fairley Copy Editor: Grace Fairley

Marketing Senior Marketing Manager: Louise Breinholt Marketing Executive: Chloe Tunnicliffe

Composition Services Compositor: Wiley Indianapolis Composition Services Proofreader: Susan Hobbs Indexer: Potomac Indexing, LLC

03_711965-flast.indd x03_711965-flast.indd x 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Icons used in this book

Throughout this book, we’ve used icons to help focus your attention on certain information. This is what they mean:

Equipment Lets you know in advance the equipment you will needed need to hand as you progress through the chapter.

Skills Placed at the beginning of each chapter to help identify the skills you’ll need for the chapter ahead.

Tip Tips and suggestions to help make life easier.

Note Take note of these little extras to avoid confusion.

Warning Read carefully; a few things could go wrong at this point.

Try It Go on, enjoy yourself; you won’t break it.

Trivia A little bit of fun to bring a smile to your face.

Summary A short recap at the end of each chapter.

Brain Test what you’ve learned from the chapter. Training

03_711965-flast.indd xi03_711965-flast.indd xi 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM The Third Age Trust

The Third Age Trust is the body which represents all U3As in the UK. The U3A movement is made up of over 700 self-governing groups of older men and women who organise for themselves activities which may be educational, recreational or social in kind. Calling on their own experience and knowledge they demand no qualiﬁ cations nor do they offer any. The movement has grown at a remarkable pace and offers opportunities to thousands of people to demonstrate their own worth to one another and to the community. Their interests are astonishingly varied but the members all value the opportunity to share experiences and learning with like-minded people. The Third Age Trust’s endorsement of the Older and Wiser series hints at some of that width of interest.

03_711965-flast.indd xii03_711965-flast.indd xii 9/13/10 2:47 PM9/13/10 2:47 PM Introduction

I know what you’re thinking: “Offi ce? That sounds a bit dull.” But don’t let the name put you off reading this book. Although Microsoft Offi ce can be used to manage your household accounts and write letters to the bank, it also enables you to enjoy fun projects like creating party invitations, making posters, planning your holidays, putting together slide shows and compiling recipe books. In fact, once you understand the basics of how to use Microsoft Offi ce, your imagination is the only limit. Soon you’ll be thinking of more and more ways to use Microsoft Offi ce and unleash the full power of your PC.

Whether you’re a beginner or are already using it, you’ll discover that there are two main benefi ts to mastering Microsoft Offi ce. Firstly, it makes life easier. If you’re still writing out your Christmas card envelopes by hand, or struggling to work out how much interest the bank is due to pay you, let the computer take the strain. Computers love complex and repetitive tasks and once you’ve learned how to set things up they’ll happily beaver away on your behalf while you put your feet up. It’s like having that robot they always promised us, although it still won’t make the tea or vacuum the living room. (Microsoft, if you’re listening, please dedicate some boffi ns to making that happen!)

Secondly, Microsoft Ofﬁ ce can empower you in your hobbies and creative pas- times. If you’ve always wanted to write a novel, word processing is your tool. If you want to keep track of the number of birds you’ve spotted or train timetables, a spreadsheet can help. If you are ever called upon to deliver a presentation, whether it’s showcasing photos to your family or sharing your expertise with the local horticulture society, a PowerPoint presentation helps you organise your thoughts and tell your story.

04_711965-intro.indd 104_711965-intro.indd 1 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Microsoft says that 500 million people worldwide use Microsoft Ofﬁ ce.

What is Microsoft Ofﬁ ce?

Twenty years ago, Microsoft cofounder Bill Gates’ vision was for there to be “a computer on every desk and in every home”, and in the developed economies we’re not far off that. In fact, computers are probably the main reason people buy desks today.

Microsoft Offi ce is a collection of programs (called a ‘suite’), which enables you to create different types of documents on your computer. So, you ask, what are the programs (or ‘applications’) and what might you use them for? • Microsoft Word: this is word-processing software, which is the great-great- grandchild of the typewriter. You type in the content of your document, and you can edit it until you’re happy with it (including moving whole paragraphs around, and adding or deleting them). You can change the way your document looks, from simple styles like bold and underlined text all the way up to complex newsletter layouts, as you’ll be fi nding out. Microsoft Word can be used for letters (see Chapter 1), diaries, posters (see Chapter 2), newsletters (see Chapter 3) and even books. I’m using it right now to write this book. • Microsoft Excel: this is spreadsheet software, which is used for structuring words and/or numbers in a grid. It helps you to organise information. At its simplest, it can be used to lay out data like timetables and address books (see Chapter 4) and to create nice, clear coloured charts. Its sophistication enables it to carry out calculations using numbers you have entered in the boxes in the grid, as you’ll see in Chapter 5. I’m also using Excel right now, to keep track of the number of words I’m writing for each chapter. • Microsoft PowerPoint: this software is most often used for presentations where somebody stands up and talks through a series of slides. If you’re invited to give a talk to your local U3A group or another community organisation, PowerPoint will make sure your presentation looks slick. You can also use it with friends and family to create a photo slide show, as you’ll see in Chapter 7. • Microsoft OneNote: this is the newest and most overlooked program in Microsoft Offi ce. It’s a bit like a scrapbook on your PC, in which you can keep

04_711965-intro.indd 204_711965-intro.indd 2 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Introduction

interesting web pages, paste pictures and write notes. It’s powerful because of the way you can group related information and search through your notebooks, and because of the ease with which you can add information. In Chapter 8, you’ll learn how to make a recipe book using it OneNote. I use it mainly for organising my ideas when I’m writing ﬁ ction.

These four programs make up the Home and Student version of Microsoft Ofﬁ ce. This version is the one that you’re most likely to have on your home PC, partly because it’s sold at a family-friendly price – and all you’ll ever need to create beautiful documents.

There is also a free Starter Edition, which comes installed on some new PCs. This version includes cut-down versions of Word and Excel, with adverts shown on screen. Personally I’d ﬁ nd the adverts too distracting while I was trying to work, but you can’t argue with the price. If you’re new to Microsoft Ofﬁ ce, this version provides you with a risk-free way to try out the applications and you should be able to carry out most of the Word and Excel projects in this book using it, then buy the full version should you wish to do so.

Microsoft Offi ce is also available in other, much more expensive editions, which are mostly sold to companies. You may already be familiar with these versions or have heard of them through family or friends. Two of the better known programs in these editions include: • Microsoft Outlook: this is one of the most popular programs for email. This book doesn’t cover Outlook but, in Chapter 9, I will show you how you can use email to share your ideas and your Microsoft Offi ce documents over the Internet. • Microsoft Publisher: this is used for laying out documents such as brochures, and it’s particularly appealing for small businesses. This book doesn’t cover Publisher but most home users fi nd that they can design the documents they need using Microsoft Word, which we’ll cover in depth in this book.

There have been many versions of Microsoft Offi ce over the years, but in this book the focus is on Offi ce 2010 and Offi ce 2007. (The software is named after the year of its release.) The earlier version, Offi ce 2007, is very similar to Offi ce 2010 – they’re a bit like identical twins. If you’re already familiar with Offi ce 2007 you might spot the odd difference in Offi ce 2010, but they look more or less the same and it can be hard to tell them apart at a glance. 3

04_711965-intro.indd 304_711965-intro.indd 3 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you’ve used an even earlier version of Microsoft Offi ce, you may notice that Microsoft has overhauled the buttons and menus for Offi ce 2007 and has kept this new layout for Offi ce 2010. The redesign annoyed quite a few long-term users, because when they looked for commands in the old places, they weren’t there any more. It was a bit like somebody coming into your house while you were asleep and moving all the furniture around: unwelcome and extremely confusing, especially when you were looking for something like a pair of scissors. After accli- matising for a short while, however, I found that the new design made the software much easier to use. The new screen design lays out all the options for you rather than hiding them in a menu, so you can see what you’re looking for. It’s also quicker because you can use fewer mouse clicks than in older versions of Micro- soft Offi ce. Generally speaking, anything you can do with 2007, you can also do with 2010. A few features introduced in 2010 aren’t available in older versions of Microsoft Offi ce, but I’ll fl ag those up as we come across them in the projects.

If you’ve recently upgraded to Microsoft Ofﬁ ce 2010 or 2007, the information given in this book helps you to navigate around the new interface, as well as showing you how to make the most of the software.

How this book is structured

The best way to learn how to do something is by doing it, so this book provides you with practical projects to help you explore the various functions that Micro- soft Ofﬁ ce has to offer, whether you’re just starting out or haven’t previously used the software to its full potential. I’ll begin with some simple projects for you to complete, such as writing a letter and managing your address book, and then you’ll work your way up to something more ambitious, such as creating personalised party invitations. As you work your way through the book, the projects build on skills you’ve learned in earlier chapters, so you can reinforce what you learned previously through practice, and concentrate your efforts on what’s new.

This book is divided into three parts:

Part I introduces you to Microsoft Word, with projects on how to write a letter, create a poster and publish a newsletter. Part II introduces you to Microsoft Excel, with projects on how to manage your address book and create a basic holiday budget. You’ll also learn how to use Word and Excel together to create personalised party invitations.

04_711965-intro.indd 404_711965-intro.indd 4 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Introduction

Part III shows you how to organise and share your photos and ideas, with projects to help you create a holiday slide show, keep a recipe book and share your thoughts over the Internet by email.

At ﬁ rst glance, you might assume that there are only nine projects in this book, but the skills you learn will enable you to do many more. In fact, each chapter con- cludes with suggestions for other ways to use the skills you’ve learned in that chapter. Along the way, I’m sure you’ll have a few ‘aha!’ moments of your own, as you work out how you can adapt the projects to your own needs.

The chapters are arranged to be read in order, but if you’re already familiar with using Microsoft Ofﬁ ce, you may prefer to skip the more basic chapters or even use the book as a reference work.

At the end of the book, you’ll fi nd an appendix of the most commonly used keyboard shortcuts (Appendix 1). If you fi nd using the mouse a bit fi ddly, or even just want to speed things up, these key combinations provide rapid access to some of the most popular features of the software.

There’s also a glossary of commonly used terms you might not be familiar with (Appendix 2), as well as an index, to make it easier for you to ﬁ nd the solution when you can’t work out how to do something.

For best results, I recommend that you try out all the projects in this book. If you don’t fancy too much typing, you can download the sample ﬁ les from my website at www.sean.co.uk. You can then experiment with editing these samples, or even use them as the basis of your own documents. Sometimes you may ﬁ nd it easier to take something that’s not quite ideal and modify it, rather than starting from scratch. The website also includes updates, all the links from the book and sup- porting resources.

What you will need

You now know a little more about Microsoft Offi ce and what you can use it for, so let’s look at what you’ll need to complete the projects in this book: • Personal computer (PC) – desktop or laptop. The technical specifi cations for the computer can be a bit baffl ing; Microsoft says you need a 500MHz

04_711965-intro.indd 504_711965-intro.indd 5 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

processor, 256MB of RAM (512MB for graphics features), 1.5GB of hard drive space, and a monitor with a resolution of 1024x768. But there is an easy way to understand whether or not your computer will be okay. If you bought your computer with Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7 already on it, it will probably be fi ne. If your computer had Windows 98 or Windows 95 on it when you bought it, it’s likely to struggle and it might be time to consider buying a new computer. I’m using a PC running Windows 7, which is the latest version of Windows. You might notice the occasional difference between my screenshots in this book and what you see on your screen, but I’ll clarify anything that might cause confusion. • Mouse or trackball. I’ll tell you when it’s quicker or less fi ddly to use the keyboard, but you’ll need to have a mouse or trackball to get the best from Microsoft Offi ce. Some people fi nd a trackball easier to use, especially if they have arthritic hands. For ease of reading I’ll just talk about mouse movements in this book, but the information applies equally to trackballs. If you struggle with the mouse, don’t forget to make use of Appendix 1, which lists keyboard shortcuts you can often use instead. • Offi ce 2010 or Offi ce 2007. The applications we use in this book are Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft PowerPoint, and Microsoft OneNote. They’re cheapest if you buy them in the Microsoft Offi ce Home & Student version, but you can also buy them individually. You might fi nd that starter versions of Word and Excel come pre-installed if you buy a new PC. • Printer. I recommend a printer that prints on A4 paper (or US ‘letter’ size in the US), because you’ll be creating letters, posters, and newsletters as you work through the projects in this book. Colour printers are affordable nowadays, but you can use a black and white printer if you’re happy to create monochrome documents. There are other ways to share your documents so a printer isn’t essential, but it is extremely helpful. • Internet connection. During the projects, you’ll discover how to download content from the Internet and incorporate it into your documents. In the fi nal chapter, you’ll fi nd out how to share your own documents over the Internet, too. You’ll also need to be connected to the Internet in order to download the sample fi les from the book’s website at www.sean.co.uk.

For the projects in this book, I assume that you have this equipment and it’s all working ﬁ ne. It’s not hard to install Microsoft Ofﬁ ce if you haven’t already got it installed on your computer. Usually, you just insert the disk and then say ‘yes’

04_711965-intro.indd 604_711965-intro.indd 6 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Introduction

when it asks you if you want to accept the default settings. Getting the printer and Internet connections set up can be a bit trickier, so if you have a computer whizz- kid in the family, ask them for help. Alternatively, phone a friend or one of the many helpful small PC troubleshooting companies – preferably recommended by a friend. Then unleash them on your PC and stand well back.

Familiarising yourself with the keyboard and the mouse

In this book, I’ll assume that you have some basic knowledge of using a computer. Even if you do, however, you might ﬁ nd that you need to use keys on the keyboard that you haven’t come across before, or you might need to use the mouse in new ways. Here are some pointers to help you.

Using the keyboard

A computer keyboard has more keys than a typewriter keyboard because it has a number of keys that perform special functions. Some of these will be familiar to you. You might have used the Start button, for example, to run programs like your Internet browser or to play solitaire. If you’ve shopped online, you might have used the backspace key or cursor keys to correct your address as you entered it.

The Shift, Alt and Control keys don’t seem to do anything when you press them. That’s because you have to hold them down and then press another key to do something.

The Shift key is used to access the symbol written on the top half of the key, where there is one. To type an exclamation mark, for example, you hold down the Shift key and press the number 1 key in the main part of the keyboard. You also hold down Shift and press a letter key to type an upper case letter.

The Control and Alt keys are used to perform certain functions in the program and usually provide a keyboard shortcut for doing something you can also do using the mouse and menus on screen. Control and S together enable you to save your document, for example. You’ll learn more about that and other keyboard shortcuts in the projects.

Figure 0.1 provides a handy reference to some of the keys you’ll need to use for the projects in this book. Your keyboard layout might look a bit different. You will

04_711965-intro.indd 704_711965-intro.indd 7 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

ﬁ nd that most of the keys are in the same place, and that the main cluster around the letter keys, the cursor keys and the numeric keypad will be exactly the same. The keys between them are bonus keys that might be arranged differently.

You don’t need to learn all these keys now: the illustration is here so you can refer back to it whenever you want. You’ll be introduced to the various keys as you need them for the projects.

Shift Home

Escape End Page up Page down

Tab F1 Backspace Home Page up

Control Alt Start button Delete End Delete

Start button Shift Numeric keypad

Enter Page Down

Cursor keys

Figure 0.1

04_711965-intro.indd 804_711965-intro.indd 8 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Introduction

Using the mouse

I’ll assume that you’re familiar with the basics of using the mouse, including moving the mouse pointer around the screen. With most activities, you can use just one of the two buttons on a PC mouse, but when using Microsoft Ofﬁ ce, you might sometimes need to use the other button too.

To avoid confusion, here are some terms I’ll use: • ‘Click the menu’ means you should put your mouse pointer over a menu on screen and then press the left mouse button. If it doesn’t say which mouse button to press, it’s always the left one. • ‘Right-click the menu’ means you should put your mouse pointer over the menu and then press the right mouse button. You’ll use this much less often, and only when explicitly told to use the right mouse button. • A ‘double-click’ is when you press the mouse button twice in quick succession. Making mouse control easier

Microsoft has built accessibility options into Windows so that you can still use the software even if you ﬁ nd it difﬁ cult to control a mouse.

From the Start menu, go to Control Panel and then double-click on Mouse. You can then change a wide range of options, including how fast the mouse moves and how quickly you have to click to register a double-click. You can also switch on trails so that you can see your cursor move more easily.

If you can’t move the mouse, you can use the numeric keypad instead, by switching mousekeys on. You’ll ﬁ nd the controls to do this in the Ease of Access Centre in Windows Vista and Windows 7, or in the Accessibility Options in the Control Panel in earlier versions of Windows.

There are many powerful tools in Windows to help ensure that physical or visual impairments don’t prevent people from being able to use software like Microsoft Ofﬁ ce. There isn’t room to go into full details here, but Microsoft provides exten- sive help on its website.

04_711965-intro.indd 904_711965-intro.indd 9 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

You can minimise your use of the mouse by learning keyboard shortcuts, too. I’ll tell you about the most useful ones, and you can refer to Appendix 1 at the back of the book for a fuller list.

Backing up your ﬁ les

To protect yourself against the risk of losing your Microsoft Offi ce fi les, you should keep a backup copy. A backup copy is just a spare copy of a fi le, in case something happens to the original. If your computer breaks, for example, you might lose all your information if you only have one copy of it. If you have a copy that’s stored outside the computer for safekeeping, you can switch to using that instead.

You should keep a backup copy of your fi les on a separate device to your computer. Suitable devices include: • An external hard drive. These can have enough capacity to store everything on your computer and can be bought for under £100, sometimes even under £50. These are fairly bulky devices, about the size of a small box of soap powder. If you want to back up everything on your computer, get an external drive that has the same storage capacity as your computer. • A USB key (also known as a fl ash drive). These tiny devices can fi t on your keyring, so you can take your backup everywhere (not a bad idea). Prices start at under £10 and are available from well-known brands (including Sony and SanDisk) for under £20. The prices vary depending on how much information the device can store (measured in gigabytes or GB), and how well known the supplier is. These devices might not store all the data from your computer, but they can store thousands of typical offi ce documents. An 8GB USB key could store over 8,000 typical Word or Excel documents, although any pictures or sound fi les would eat up the available space quickly.

These devices are great because you can store a copy of a fi le on them and update it whenever you need to. If you don’t already have a suitable device to back up your fi les on to, I suggest you buy a USB key. You can use Windows to copy your fi les on to the USB key. It isn’t possible to go into depth on how to do that here, but if you know someone who understands Windows, it will only take them a few minutes to show you how to make a backup copy.

04_711965-intro.indd 1004_711965-intro.indd 10 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Introduction

Choosing the right application for the job

As I’ve already mentioned, there are four applications in Microsoft Ofﬁ ce (Home & Student version): Word, Excel, PowerPoint and OneNote. Sometimes, you can do the same job in different applications – so how do you know which one is best?

As you complete the projects in this book and work on your own projects, you’ll develop an instinct for the best tool for the job, but Table 1 offers some guidance to help you choose.

Table 1: How to choose the right Microsoft Office application Ask yourself… If yes, then use… Is your document predominantly about the words Word you type in, such as a letter or a story? Is your document likely to be many pages long? Word Do you want to control the layout and design of Word your document? Examples might include greeting cards or leaflets. Does your document lend itself naturally to a grid Excel layout, such as a study timetable? Is your project about organising information? Excel Does your document include a lot of arithmetic or Excel numbers? Does your document include a lot of the same type Excel of information about a lot of different people or things? Examples might include addresses of friends or details of trains you have spotted. Does your project involve presenting information to PowerPoint other people? Is your project about gathering information for OneNote yourself, without plans to share it? Will your document be read mostly on paper? Word Will your document be read mostly on screen? Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote

04_711965-intro.indd 1104_711965-intro.indd 11 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

This information is only intended to be a rule of thumb and, depending on your project, you might ﬁ nd the above guidelines contradictory. In that case, treat each guideline as a ‘vote’ for an application. If there’s a tie between two or more con- tenders, make them arm-wrestle for it! Sometimes there really is no single right answer.

In Chapter 6, I’ll show you how to use different programs from the Microsoft Offi ce suite together to create personalised invitations. There are many other examples of how you can break a project down into smaller parts so that you can use the best tool for each part. You can switch between the different tools easily, and can even copy something you have prepared in one application and paste it into a different one. For example, say you are going to write an annual report for the local WI group and it needs to include a report about all the great activities you’ve done this year together with a fi nancial breakdown. Word is best for the wordy stuff and Excel excels at the maths, so in this case you could create the maths part in Excel, copy it and then paste it into your Word document, using Word to produce the fi nal layout.

Don’t worry if this doesn’t make too much sense to you now. It’s here for you to refer back to, and as your knowledge of Microsoft Ofﬁ ce increases, you’ll ﬁ nd it starts to make more sense.

04_711965-intro.indd 1204_711965-intro.indd 12 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM 04_711965-intro.indd 1304_711965-intro.indd 13 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM PERFECTPRACTICE MAKES To build upon the lessons learnt in this book, visit www.pcwisdom.co.uk

l More training tutorials l Links to resources l ecivdA hguorht frequently asked questions l Social networking tips l soediV dna stsacdop from the author l Author blogs

04_711965-intro.indd 1404_711965-intro.indd 14 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM PART I Using Microsoft Word

This is the rudest, most offensive and irate letter we’ve had so far this week. Nice layout and typeface, though...

05_711965-pp01.indd 1505_711965-pp01.indd 15 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM 05_711965-pp01.indd 1605_711965-pp01.indd 16 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with 1 Microsoft Word

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Microsoft Word 2010 or Microsoft Word 2007 (see Introduction).

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball).

People love to receive letters. Not bills or bank statements, but genuine correspondence from friends and family. In this chapter, I’ll show you how you can use Microsoft Word to write a personal letter that will delight one of your friends. It’s up to you who you send it to.

Although this is a simple project, it’s a great illustration of the power of word processing. Unlike a typewritten or handwritten letter, you can easily change your mind about what you want to say, how you want to say it and how you want your letter to look. You can insert new words, sentences or paragraphs and get rid of any that you’re not so keen on when you reread the letter.

You can also add some polish, with Word’s sophisticated presentation functions. In this chapter, we’ll explore how you can modify the text style and alignment, but the next two chapters in Part I will build on these skills to show how you can create professional looking publications.

06_711965-ch01.indd 1706_711965-ch01.indd 17 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Starting Word

There are several ways to start the Word program, depending on which version of Windows you are using and how your software has been set up.

First, you need to ﬁ nd the Start button. This isn’t the button that you use to switch on your computer or the one on your keyboard. It’s on the screen, in the bottom left corner. In older versions of Windows, the button is coloured green and says ‘Start’ on it, but in Windows Vista and Windows 7, the button is round and has a Windows icon on it.

Place your mouse pointer over the Start button and click it (by pressing the left mouse button). This will open a ‘menu’ of programs. Look to see if Word is among them, and if it is then simply position your mouse pointer over that item in the list and then click it (press the left mouse button).

If you can’t see Word on the menu, you need to position your cursor on All Pro- grams at the bottom of the menu, and then click it. A menu of all the programs on your computer will open. Find the folder for Microsoft Ofﬁ ce (you might need to use the scrollbar if you are using Windows 7 or Vista). When you click the folder, it will open so you can see the Word entry. Click on that, and Word will start load- ing. It sounds complicated, but it only takes about four seconds once you know how to do it.

If you’re nifty with a keyboard and are using Windows Vista or Windows 7, there’s a quicker way. Find the Start key on your keyboard (see Figure 0.1 in Introduction); it is usually on the bottom row and has the same picture of the Windows ‘ﬂ ag’ as the onscreen Start button. Press the Start key, type ‘Word’ and then press Enter, and you should see Word ﬁ re up.

These are just a couple of many ways you can start Word. You might have a Word icon on your desktop that you can double-click, for example, or you might have Word pinned to your taskbar in Windows 7. Feel free to experiment to ﬁ nd the quickest way to start Word on your PC. The above approach will work for everyone, but it won’t necessarily be the quickest way to do it.

06_711965-ch01.indd 1806_711965-ch01.indd 18 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

Saving your work

Word automatically opens a new blank document when you start the program. So when Word opens, you’ll be faced with a sight that will either inspire you with its endless possibilities or strike fear into your heart: a blank page.

Before you let rip with your creativity, though, I recommend that you save your work. If you have used any other programs, you might have saved fi les before. Whenever you create a new fi le or make changes to an existing fi le, you need to save it on your computer’s hard disk. It is important to save whatever fi le you’re working on regularly, because anything in the computer’s memory (including your current work) is wiped if there’s a power cut or your PC freezes (which happens rarely with modern PCs). Anything that you have already saved on the hard disk will be safe, though.

Saving your ﬁ le also means that you can come back to it again another day to reread it, work on it or even modify it for another purpose.

Saving is not the same as backing up. When you save something, you store it in a ﬁ le on your computer so it’s still available even after you switch the machine off and on again. When you back up, you make a spare copy of that ﬁ le, just in case the computer it’s stored on breaks down.

Given that you haven’t typed anything yet, it might seem an odd time for me to mention this now. After all, you’re about to save an empty fi le. It can be a bit fi ddly saving your work for the fi rst time, though, so it’s best to cover this fi rst. If you save the fi le now, you can then easily keep the fi le updated as you’re writing, without interrupting your fl ow. The easier it is to save your fi le as you write, the more likely you are to do it and the less likely you are to lose any fi nely crafted sentences – or worse still, fi nely crafted paragraphs or pages!

The menus used for saving fi les are slightly different in Offi ce 2010 and Offi ce 2007, but not so different that there’s likely to be any confusion. In Offi ce 2010, you should see a blue File tab in the top left corner of the screen, as shown in Figure 1.1.

When you click the File tab, you’re taken to what Microsoft grandly calls the ‘backstage area’. The idea is that this is where you go when you want to save, print

06_711965-ch01.indd 1906_711965-ch01.indd 19 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

or otherwise manage your document. Anything that isn’t to do with the content of your document and its appearance can be found backstage.

File tab

Save

Undo Close

Redo Help

Home tab Cursor Scrollbar

Figure 1.1

When you click the File tab to go backstage, you’ll be shown some information about your document, including how many words and pages long it is (none, so far), and how long you’ve been editing it. On the left, you’ll see Save as one of the options.

06_711965-ch01.indd 2006_711965-ch01.indd 20 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

In Ofﬁ ce 2007, there is a round Ofﬁ ce button in the top left corner of the screen, as shown in Figure 1.2.

Office button

Save

Undo

Redo Close

Home tab Help

Figure 1.2

This is where all the ﬁ le management and printing functions are kept, and Save is one of the options.

Whichever version of Word you are using, the process is the same after this. When you click the Save button, you see a ﬁ le browser, like the one in Figure 1.3.

In Figure 1.3, I’ve clicked in the bottom right of the window and dragged it to make it bigger, so you can more clearly see what’s going on in the screenshot. I recommend you save your work in your Documents folder. Click Documents in the left pane and ﬁ nd a suitable folder in which to store your work on the right. If you have lots of folders, you might need to use the scrollbar. If you can’t ﬁ nd a suitable folder, you can create a new one. Put your mouse pointer in the right pane and right-click it (press the right mouse button). The right-click menu opens, shown in Figure 1.3, from which you can select New and then select Folder. The new folder will appear in the right-hand pane, and you can type in its name and press the Enter key.

06_711965-ch01.indd 2106_711965-ch01.indd 21 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

The Enter key is sometimes called the Return key. It’s on the right hand side of the main part of the keyboard and is often oversized so you can easily hit it (see Figure 0.1 in Introduction). It usually has an arrow on it that goes down a bit and then points to the left, echoing the motion of the carriage return on a typewriter. The Enter key is used in word processing to mark the end of a paragraph. It’s also used more generally to tell the computer you’ve ﬁ nished entering information or to conﬁ rm an action, as in this case.

Documents

Left pane Right pane Scrollbar

File name box Save button

Right-click menu

Figure 1.3 22

06_711965-ch01.indd 2206_711965-ch01.indd 22 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

Once you’ve found your folder, you need to give your fi le a name. This is how Windows and all your programs will refer to this fi le in future. A good fi le name will help you to uniquely identify your letter without having to open it, so don’t just pick a name like ‘Letter’ because you’ll have lots of letters in future. Choose something more meaningful like ‘James letter about Spain’. Don’t worry about the .docx at the end of the fi le name. This is a technical marker that helps Windows work out what program created a particular fi le.

Click in the File Name box and you’ll see the default name is selected. You can now type something new over the top of it.

When you’re happy with your ﬁ le name and where you’re saving it, click the Save button.

Now you’ve saved your fi le, you can update what’s in it rapidly. To save your document at any time, simply click on the disk icon in the top left corner (see Figures 1.1 and 1.2) and your work will be sent to the hard disk for safekeeping. You can also use a keyboard shortcut: fi nd the Control key, which is marked CTRL. There are two of these, one at the bottom left and one at the bottom right of the main part of the keyboard (see Figure 0.1 in Introduction for an illustration). While holding down one of the Control keys, tap the S key, and the current version of your fi le will be saved. After a while, you might fi nd you do this almost as a refl ex action the moment you type something you want to keep.

This is the ﬁ rst of many actions you’ll learn using the Control key, but in future, they’ll be written as CTRL+S, or whatever key you need to tap while holding down the Control key.

It’s important to remember to save your work regularly; information is only stored on the disk when you tell Word to do so.

Actually, that’s not quite true. If you’re unlucky enough to suffer a power cut, you might be lucky enough that Word can still rescue your work. Word automatically saves whatever you’re working on regularly, and Offi ce 2010 will even temporarily keep copies of fi les you haven’t saved (you’ll fi nd these in your recent fi les in the backstage area). But I don’t recommend counting on luck when there’s a simple keyboard shortcut that can save you any wasted effort. Remember to CTRL+S, and life will be good.

06_711965-ch01.indd 2306_711965-ch01.indd 23 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you want to save a different copy of your document, so you can have various versions of it or so you can retrace your steps later if you might want to go back to an earlier version, choose Save As from the backstage area or Offi ce menu and give the document a new fi le name. A new fi le will be created with your chosen fi lename, leaving your last saved version with the old fi lename intact. When you do an ordinary save from then on, your changes will be saved in this new copy.

Writing your letter

Now that you’ve got the housekeeping out of the way, it’s time to start writing your letter. Click on the blank page, underneath the menu bar, and you will see a small vertical line blinking on and off in the top left corner of the page. This blinking line is your cursor (see Figure 1.1). It shows you where your words will appear when you type them. Type a few characters, and the cursor will move along with each one, so that new characters are added at the end of what you’ve written so far.

If you have ever used a typewriter, you might be waiting for a bell to ring to warn you to do a carriage return as you reach the end of the line. With a word processor, you can just keep typing. Word will automatically move you to the next line when you run out of space. It will also move any half-written words to the next line to avoid having to use hyphens. If you look up from the keyboard and see that the cursor has vanished with half your word, don’t panic. Check the start of the next line ﬁ rst.

When you reach the end of a paragraph, press the Enter key on your keyboard. Word will start you on a new line, but will also put a bit of empty space between the paragraphs, so that it’s easier for people to see where each paragraph begins and ends. If you’re a word processing veteran, you might have to break an old habit here: in some programs you press Enter twice to put a blank line between the paragraphs, but you don’t need to do that in Word.

It doesn’t matter if you make a mistake – you’ll learn how to ﬁ x it later. For now, just familiarise yourself with typing in text, so that you’ve got something to play with when you work on editing text later. You can safely ignore any green or red squiggly lines that appear under your text too. They highlight where Word thinks you’ve made a mistake, but you’ll learn how to get rid of those later. (You’ll also ﬁ nd out that Word isn’t quite as clever as it thinks it is.)

06_711965-ch01.indd 2406_711965-ch01.indd 24 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

To get used to the basics, I suggest you focus on the body of your letter for now. I’ll show you how to add your address on the right later. If you’re short on ideas for what to say, think about what you did at the weekend, what you’re reading at the moment, what the family is up to and where you’re going on holiday. You could cheat and just type a load of mumbo jumbo (I won’t know about it!) but since I’m going to show you how to print your letter it would be nice if you had something to post at the end of this project.

If you struggle to read the text on screen, you can enlarge your view of the page. This won’t affect the size of the text when it’s printed out, it will just magnify it on the screen. To do this, click on the plus sign in the bottom right corner to zoom in (shown in Figure 1.4). You can click the minus to zoom out again.

Zoom out Zoom in

Figure 1.4

If you are struggling to do something and this book can’t help, why not try searching Word’s built in help function? You’ll ﬁ nd a question mark in a circle in the top right corner: click this or tap the F1 key to get started.

Making changes to what you’ve written

Oh no! I didn’t mean to type that! What now?

There’s an old joke about computers providing countless new opportunities… to make mistakes. But the best thing about computers is that they make them so easy to ﬁ x. If you’ve got the correcting ﬂ uid poised over the monitor, back away now!

06_711965-ch01.indd 2506_711965-ch01.indd 25 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you need to go back and change something you wrote earlier, you ﬁ rst need to position your cursor in the place where you want to make changes. The simplest way to do this (particularly if you spot the error quickly) is to use the cursor keys to move through your document. The cursor keys have arrows on them pointing up, down, left and right and are usually grouped together somewhere on the right of the keyboard (see Figure 0.1 in Introduction).

When you press the left cursor key, the cursor will move back through your text, one character at a time. If you press the up cursor key, the cursor will go up a line. The right and down cursor keys will take you back in those directions. The cursor can’t go outside of the text, so you can’t position the cursor beyond the end of what you’ve typed. If you go up or down into a shorter line, the cursor will jump to where the text ﬁ nishes on that line.

If you have a long document it can take almost as long to shufﬂ e through the text as it did to type it, so there are a number of keys you can use to move around the document more quickly, as shown in Table 1.1. (Refer to Figure 0.1 for an indication of where you can ﬁ nd these keys.)

Table 1.1 Keyboard shortcuts for navigating your Word document Key(s) Effect on cursor Home Moves to the start of the current line End Moves to the end of the current line Page Up Moves up a page through the document (you’ll need to have a document that’s more than one page long to see this in action) Page Down Moves down a page through the document CTRL+left Moves one word to the left CTRL+right Moves one word to the right CTRL+up Moves to the start of the next paragraph up CTRL+down Moves to the start of the next paragraph down CTRL+end Moves to the end of the document CTRL+home Moves to the start of the document

06_711965-ch01.indd 2606_711965-ch01.indd 26 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

Function keys such as Home are often shared with the numeric keypad. If you see numbers coming up on screen when you press them, tap the Num Lock key on your keyboard. That will switch the number keypad to the right mode for you to be able to use the functions in Table 1.1. If you want to revert to using the numbers on the keypad again, press Num Lock once more. Num Lock is at the top left corner of the numeric keypad.

You don’t need to memorise all the shortcut key combinations. They are a bit complex and, to be honest, you can get by without them a lot of the time. For a short letter like this, you won’t see much benefi t from them. But as you fi nd yourself working on more complex projects and longer documents, you’ll fi nd these shortcuts invaluable. They save so much time. As you use them, they start to become second nature too. I almost forgot about being able to move through words using the Control key, until I noticed I was doing it while writing this chapter! I recommend you play with these combinations in your letter now, just to familiarise yourself with them. Once you know what’s possible, you can always look up a particular combination later when you need it.

There is another way to position the cursor, which some people ﬁ nd easier. That’s to use the mouse. Place your mouse pointer where you’d like your cursor to go (such as in the middle of a paragraph) and then click it. Your cursor will jump there instantly. If you need to move between pages in your document (or even just scroll further down the page), put your mouse pointer over the scrollbar at the right of the page (see Figure 1.1), click your left mouse button and hold it down while you roll the mouse up and down the desk. You can also use the scroll wheel on your mouse to move up and down the page.

The mouse can save time if you want to move your cursor into the middle of a sentence a few paragraphs or even many pages back. But some people ﬁ nd it too ﬁ ddly for more minor changes. If you only want to edit the line above, or the paragraph above, it’s usually quicker to use the keyboard than to switch to the mouse and move the cursor around.

Ultimately, it doesn’t matter how you move your cursor. Most people use a combination of keyboard and mouse depending on what they are doing. You can strike the balance that works best for you, even if it means always using the mouse

06_711965-ch01.indd 2706_711965-ch01.indd 27 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

or always using the keyboard. By experimenting with your letter to see how easy you ﬁ nd the different techniques, you can make an informed choice.

Once you’ve positioned your cursor where you want it, you can add new text at that point in the document. It doesn’t matter whether you want to add a sentence or a paragraph, whatever you type will be inserted wherever your cursor is in the document. When you want to pick up at the end again, position your cursor at the end of your letter so you can carry on typing there.

Deleting text

Some things are better left unsaid. As well as adding new text to your document, you will doubtless want to take things out from time to time. There are three different ways to delete text.

1. The Backspace key is found at the top right of the main part of your keyboard, and has a long, left-pointing arrow on it (see Figure 0.1). This is one of the larger keys on the keyboard, reﬂ ecting how often everybody needs to use it! When you press it, the character to the left of the cursor is exterminated and the cursor moves to the left. This is the key most people think of as the ‘delete key’ because it’s used most often. But it should not be confused with… 2. …the (real) Delete key. This is often found on the numeric keypad, and will say ‘Delete’ on it (or ‘Del’ if it’s being less formal). Sometimes there are two delete keys (see Figure 0.1). When you press this key, the character to the right of the cursor is deleted and the cursor stays where it is. It looks as if the cursor is swallowing the text to its right. Remember to try tapping Num Lock if it’s not working for you. 3. You can also select text (see later in this chapter) and continue typing over it. The text you select will then be replaced with whatever you type next.

Moving text around

So far, we’ve made some fairly minor changes to our document, deleting some words or sentences and adding a few others. But what if you want to completely change the order of your content? If you’re working on longer pieces, you might fi nd that you need to experiment with the order of the sections until you fi nd the way they fl ow best. Word processing makes it easy to move things around. 28

06_711965-ch01.indd 2806_711965-ch01.indd 28 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

Don’t forget to keep saving your work. You’ll be free to experiment if you know you’ve got a good copy stored safely. If you want to save a messed up version, use Save As to store a different version and keep your clean version safe. If you really mess it up and need to go back to an old saved version, skip to the end of the chapter for advice on closing Word; after you have closed Word without saving your messed up version, you can reopen your clean version and pick it up from there.

Selecting text with the mouse

First of all, let’s look at how you can move a whole paragraph. Imagine your letter is four paragraphs long, and you’ve decided that you’d like to move your second paragraph to the end.

The ﬁ rst step is to select the piece of text you’d like to move. This is a bit awkward, so it might take a couple of goes to get the hang of it. First, move your mouse pointer to the start of the paragraph. It doesn’t matter if your cursor is in the margin, or whether it looks like an arrow or an ‘I’. As long as you are aligned with the correct row of text, you’ll be ﬁ ne. Then you need to click your left mouse button and keep it held down. Move the mouse down the screen, and you’ll see your text becomes highlighted in blue, as shown in Figure 1.5. Once you reach the end of the paragraph and everything you need is highlighted in blue, you can let go of the mouse button. When you let go, the text will stay selected.

Be careful not to type anything now, otherwise it will replace the text you’ve selected. If you do brush the keyboard, refer to the section on reversing mistakes later in this chapter.

Selecting text with mouse clicks

If you ﬁ nd that moving the mouse around is, well, moving you to tears, there are shortcuts you can use to select text. As you know, when you move your mouse pointer over a word and press the left mouse button, your cursor moves to that place in the word. But if you click multiple times or in different ways, you can get different results, as shown in Table 1.2.

06_711965-ch01.indd 2906_711965-ch01.indd 29 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Figure 1.5

Table 1.2 Mouse shortcuts for text selection Shortcut What is selected Press the mouse button twice in quick A word succession Press the mouse button three times in A paragraph quick succession Hold down the Control key and press A sentence the mouse button once Hold down the Shift key and press the All text between the cursor and mouse button once the mouse pointer Click the mouse button in the margin The line of text is selected

06_711965-ch01.indd 3006_711965-ch01.indd 30 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

These shortcuts are great time savers, but don’t let them stop you from experimenting with text selection. Sometimes you’ll need to be more precise, and will need to select text the long way.

Selecting text using the keyboard

If you ﬁ nd it hard to use the mouse, you can use the keyboard to select text. You use the same controls you used to move the cursor around (see Table 1.1), but hold down the Shift key at the same time. If you want to select the character to the left of the cursor, hold down the Shift key and press the left cursor key. If you want to select the word to the left of the cursor, hold down Shift and Control and press left, and that word will be selected and highlighted in blue. If you want to select the line you’re at the end of, hold down Shift and tap the Home key.

Sometimes this technique seems to select odd chunks of text. If you’re in the middle of a line and you press Shift and up, it will select all the text to the left of the cursor on the current line, and all the text to the right of the cursor on the line above, and will then move the cursor to the line above. Figure 1.6 shows what happens if I position my cursor before the word ‘zebra’ and then use Shift and up to select text.

The way to understand what you can select with each combination of keys, is to experiment with using the left and right arrows to move through your document. What happens when your cursor reaches the end of a line of text? It goes to the start of the next line. What happens when you reach the left hand side of a line of text? The cursor goes to the right hand side of the line above.

Figure 1.6

Text selection using the keyboard does the same thing. Although you tap the up key and see it move instantly, imagine the cursor is going back along the line you’re on, selecting characters as it goes. When it reaches the left-hand side, it

06_711965-ch01.indd 3106_711965-ch01.indd 31 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

goes to the right edge of the line above, and keeps moving left, selecting characters as it goes, until it comes to the spot above where it started.

As with moving the cursor around, you should experiment to see whether you prefer the mouse or the keyboard. Many people ﬁ nd the keyboard quicker, but it won’t make much difference if you use the mouse instead.

Moving your selected text

Now you’ve got your text selected, move your mouse pointer into the blue highlighted area, click your left mouse button and hold it down. Now when you move your mouse, you’ll see a dotted cursor move through your text one word at a time (see Figure 1.5, at the end of the letter). In the bottom left, Word is asking ‘Move to where?’

You can put your dotted cursor anywhere you like at the start or end of a paragraph, or in the middle of one.

When you release your mouse button, your selected text and the cursor will be moved to where the dotted cursor is. The blue highlighting that showed the text was selected will also disappear.

You’re not limited to selecting paragraphs. You can select sentences, words or even letters and move them around using this technique. It’s a good idea to practise selecting and moving text, because you also need to select text when you want to change its appearance, as you’ll soon see.

Using cut, copy and paste

Now that you know how to select a piece of text, you can start to do things to it. Across the top of the window, you’ll see what Microsoft calls the ‘ribbon’. This spreads out all the controls at your command, and can seem a bit daunting. When you don’t understand what everything does, it’s a bit like looking at the control panel of a space shuttle. Don’t be overwhelmed, though. You can safely ignore a lot of the controls (for now, at least) and the ribbon does make it easier to ﬁ nd what you’re looking for without getting tied in knots.

06_711965-ch01.indd 3206_711965-ch01.indd 32 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

The ﬁ rst set of controls you should explore is the clipboard. You’ll ﬁ nd this on the left-hand side, as shown in Figure 1.7.

Cut

Paste Copy

Format painter

Open advanced clipboard sidebar

Figure 1.7

If you can’t see the clipboard on the left of the ribbon, click the Home tab next to the File tab (in Offi ce 2010) or near to the Offi ce button (in Offi ce 2007). You should fi nd that the clipboard controls are now shown on the left.

The clipboard is used for temporarily storing something. Have you ever read a phone number and then concentrated on remembering it until you can write it down? The clipboard works a bit like that. You can put text on your clipboard, and the computer will ‘remember’ it for you until you’ve found somewhere else to put it. This is done using a process called ‘cut and paste’, and it’s another way you can move text around. It’s particularly useful if you want to move text a long way, and is often used to move text between different documents or even different applications.

To cut and paste text, you do the following:

1. Select the text you want to cut, using either the mouse or keyboard. 2. Click the scissors icon on the ribbon by putting your mouse icon over it and pressing the left mouse button. The text will be cut out of your document.

06_711965-ch01.indd 3306_711965-ch01.indd 33 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

3. Move your cursor to where you would like your text to go. 4. Click the Paste icon on the ribbon. The text on the clipboard will be added back in to your document where your cursor is.

You can paste the same text as many times as you want. You can also leave the original text in place by ﬁ rst clicking the copy icon, the one that shows two pages instead of the scissors icon (see Figure 1.7). That will put a copy of the text onto the clipboard without removing it from your document.

When you paste, Word will usually insert the last thing you put on the clipboard. For simplicity’s sake, it’s a good idea to work with only one thing on the clipboard at a time, and not to leave things there for too long.

When you cut a piece of text, be very careful to paste it as soon as possible, don’t forget it’s on the clipboard and don’t cut anything else before you paste; if you do that, you’ll lose the ﬁ rst piece of text you cut. (You wouldn’t be the ﬁ rst!)

If you are doing something more complex, you can keep a lot of different text snippets on the clipboard. If you click in the bottom right of the clipboard area to expand the clipboard, you’ll open an advanced clipboard sidebar on the left that can hold multiple clippings at once (see Figure 1.8). When you copy or cut a piece of text, your cuttings are added to this clipboard. You can click one of those snippets to paste it into the document wherever the cursor is. (To close the advanced clipboard, click the X in the top right corner of the clipboard sidebar.)

There are keyboard shortcuts you can use to save time when cutting and pasting. CTRL+X will cut (the X looks like scissors), using CTRL+C will copy, and using CTRL+V will paste. Those three keys are all together on the keyboard.

06_711965-ch01.indd 3406_711965-ch01.indd 34 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

Figure 1.8

Changing the appearance of your letter

It would be a boring world if all our documents looked the same, so Word gives you a lot of control over how individual words or parts of your document are formatted. Now that you’ve learned to select text, you should ﬁ nd it easy to format its appearance.

Look at the Font area on the ribbon, shown in Figure 1.9. I’ve created a document here to show some of the different text effects that are possible.

To apply the different styles, you just select your text (as you did before you moved it earlier) and then click the relevant button on the ribbon. If you want to make an important word bold, for example, select that word and then click the ‘B’ icon on the ribbon. If italic is more your style, select your text and then click the ‘I’ icon.

06_711965-ch01.indd 3506_711965-ch01.indd 35 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Text effects Increase font size

Strikethrough Decrease font size

Underline Change case

Italic Remove formatting

Bold Colour text

Figure 1.9

Some of the formatting options are used rarely. Unless you’re writing a dissertation about Einstein (E=mc2?), you probably won’t need the superscript formatting, for example. The strikethrough format is more or less redundant because you can just delete any mistakes rather than crossing them out, so it’s usually used to jokingly pretend you wrote something else ﬁ rst then changed your mind. So if you can’t see a use for a particular formatting option or don’t really understand what it’s for, it doesn’t matter.

06_711965-ch01.indd 3606_711965-ch01.indd 36 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

You can also use the formatting tools like switches to turn on bold, italic or other styles before you type your text. Just click the same button to switch them off again.

You’ll notice that some of the formatting options have a little triangle pointing downwards beside them. When you click one of these, you’ll see more options open up. When you click the one next to the ‘Aa’ icon, for example, you can choose to change to upper case, lower case, sentence case or all words initial- capitalised. The underlining options enable you to choose different types of underlining, such as double, dotted or wiggly lines. You can also change the colour of the text or its background by opening the options beside the appropriate icons. Use the highlighter tool to change the text background.

In Ofﬁ ce 2010, Microsoft has introduced a new option for you to create fancy text effects. This enables you to add reﬂ ections, glow effects and shadows to your words, and includes a number of shiny and hollow looking text styles. Like deco- rated cakes, effects like these are best consumed in small chunks on special occa- sions. They’re too rich for everyday use.

Leave your mouse pointer over a button on the ribbon for a couple of seconds and a box will temporarily pop up to tell you what it does.

Although the Fonts section of the ribbon includes lots of formatting options, strictly speaking a font is just the design of lettering you are using. In Figure 1.9, I have used a couple of different fonts. If you compare the Times New Roman Text with the Arial text, you will probably notice lots of subtle differences. For example, the Times font has tiny strokes (called serifs) at the ends of letters like the h and the s; the Arial font doesn’t. (Text without serifs is described as sans serif.) A font com- prises a complete set of symbols in the same style, including upper and lower case letters, numbers and punctuation.

You can change the font by clicking the triangle to the right of the font name and then choosing one from the list. You see a sneak preview of it before you apply it

06_711965-ch01.indd 3706_711965-ch01.indd 37 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

too, so you can avoid picking anything that won’t look right. You can change the font size by typing a new value into the font size box, or by selecting the size from the options. You’ll ﬁ nd your PC has lots of different fonts installed, but not all of them are easy to read.

When you select text, you will see the ghost of a tiny control panel materi- alise above the selected text. If you put your mouse over it, the controls will appear properly and provide quick access to the most frequently used formatting controls. The control panel disappears if you ignore it.

Copying text formatting

I decided to personalise my letter in Figure 1.5 by using a font that looks like handwriting for the greeting and my name at the end. The Script MT Bold font has far neater handwriting than I do, so I used it to write ‘Dear Fred’ at the start.

When I got to the end of my letter, I could have gone through the same formatting steps as I did for the greeting, picking a new font, size and colour. But it’s boring to do the same things over again. Luckily, it’s possible to copy the formatting from one piece of text and apply it to another piece.

In the clipboard section of the ribbon (refer to Figure 1.7), there is a tool called the format painter, which looks like a paintbrush. To use it, you:

1. Select the text you want to copy formatting from. 2. Click the format painter button. 3. Select the text you want to apply the formatting to. 4. Watch your text transform to the new format.

There is also a keyboard shortcut: you can use CTRL+Shift+C to copy formatting from selected text, and CTRL+Shift+V to apply it to selected text.

06_711965-ch01.indd 3806_711965-ch01.indd 38 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

Keeping your text readable

Before too long, it will be obvious that you can create some truly eye-achingly ugly documents with Word. It’s easy to end up with something that looks like a teenager’s scrapbook, with 50 different colours, wiggly lines everywhere, odd capitalisation, rainbow colourings around letters and fonts so ornate that it would take the nation’s best cryptographers a good week to work out who fancies who.

The secret of good-looking documents is not so much what you put in, as what you leave out. It’s good practice to limit the number of different text styles you use. The number you can get away with will depend on the length and structure of your document, but you should think carefully before having more than three different styles on the same page. Use italics or bold for occasional emphasis, but if you use them for more than a few words at a stretch, the text becomes tiring to read. Large tracts in capital letters are hard to read, too (which is why lawyers love them for small print).

There is an art to picking a good font. Don’t be afraid to use boring fonts like Calibri (the default font), Times New Roman (the default font before Ofﬁ ce 2007) or Arial (a clean font for reading on-screen). These are much easier to read than fonts that mimic handwriting or have special effects. Try to match the font to its size, too: Arial Black is good for headlines but can be hard to read in the body of your text. Times New Roman can look a bit weedy as a headline but works great in your body text.

Fonts are measured in point sizes. A good size for normal copy is 11-12 pt, and headlines can be 20-36 pt. If your correspondent has poor eyesight, there’s no reason why you shouldn’t use a larger font, though. The font size options go up to 72 point, which is pretty massive. You can type in values greater than that if you want, but by that point you’re making giant labels rather than writing letters.

If you want to format your whole document at once, use CTRL+A. That will select all the text in the document. Then you can apply the same formatting to everything.

06_711965-ch01.indd 3906_711965-ch01.indd 39 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Most designers are agreed that there’s nothing funny about the Comic Sans font. It was originally designed to be used in comic strip speech bubbles, but it can now be seen on all kinds of products and publications. There’s even a website that campaigns to stop its inappropriate use (at www.bancomicsans. com). If you want your documents to have an air of professionalism, avoid Comic Sans.

Clearing formatting and undoing mistakes

If you make a mess of the formatting, you can always use the Eraser icon in the top right of the Font section, which will remove the formatting but leave your text intact.

There is also an Undo function, which you will learn to love. After you have done something you’re not happy with – or Word has automatically done something for you – you can use the Undo function to reverse that action. The Undo button looks like an anticlockwise arrow and is at the top left of the screen, as shown on Figure 1.1 (Ofﬁ ce 2010) and Figure 1.2 (Ofﬁ ce 2007). There is also a keyboard shortcut, which is CTRL+Z. Word will remember a sequence of actions, so you can repeatedly undo to go back a number of steps. If you go a step too far, there is a Redo function, a clockwise arrow beside the Undo button, which will redo something you’ve undone – or undo the undo, if you like! This doesn’t just work for formatting; if you manage to delete all your text off screen (surprisingly easy to do), Undo simply conjures it up again. Phew! That’s a relief. You can start breath- ing again now.

Now you know that you can ﬁ x anything that goes wrong, feel free to experiment. Explore all the different ways you can jazz up your document, if only to get it out of your system.

Adding your address to your letter

Now you’ve mastered the formatting controls, it should be a doddle to add your address in the top-right corner of your letter. Move your cursor to the top of your

06_711965-ch01.indd 4006_711965-ch01.indd 40 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

letter and start to type your address above your greeting. If you press Enter when you get to the end of each line, Word will think you’ve fi nished a paragraph and will add a gap between each line of your address. That makes the address look too spaced out. (Why not give it a go and see?) The solution is to use what is called a ‘soft return’. This is a special way of telling Word you’ve fi nished a line, so it doesn’t think you’ve fi nished the whole paragraph. To create a soft return, hold down the Shift key when you press Enter.

Don’t start using the space bar to shunt the address to the right of the page. There’s a much more elegant solution. On the ribbon, you’ll ﬁ nd a collection of controls you can use to change the way a paragraph appears on the page. Figure 1.10 shows these, together with an explanation of what each of them does.

Numbered list Decrease indent

Bulleted list Increase indent

Left alignment Line spacing

Centre Justified

Right alignment

Figure 1.10

To move your address to the right of the page, you just select it (remember you can just click it three times) and then click the right alignment button on the ribbon. You can select more than one paragraph at a time and apply paragraph formatting options to all of them, so you could right–align your address and the date in one go.

You might want to spend some time playing with the other formatting options, just to see what they do. The options are: • Bulleted list: this moves the paragraph in from the left and puts a bullet in the space created at the start of the paragraph to draw attention to it. It’s best applied to a group of paragraphs together, like this bulleted list of paragraph formatting options.

06_711965-ch01.indd 4106_711965-ch01.indd 41 9/13/10 2:48 PM9/13/10 2:48 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

• Numbered list: this moves the paragraph in from the left and puts a number in the space created at the start of the paragraph. Paragraphs are numbered in order, and this is best used for paragraphs where the order or the number of paragraphs is part of what you want to say. • Left alignment: this formats text so it has a straight margin on the left, and ragged text on the right. This is what people use most of the time and I’ve used it in my document in Figure 1.9. • Right alignment: this formats text so that it has a straight margin on the right and is ragged on the left. This would normally be used for an address in the top right of a letter. • Justiﬁ ed text: this formats text so that it has a straight margin on both the left and the right and the text is spaced out in between. It’s used for most of the text in this book. • Centre: this formats text so it runs down the middle of the page, with ragged margins on both the left and the right. This can be used to centre a title on the page. It’s hard to read if applied to large blocks of text. • Line spacing: this changes the spacing between lines in a paragraph and can be used to add or remove the space before a paragraph. • Increase or decrease indent: to draw attention to a paragraph you can indent it, which moves the paragraph in from the left.

We’ll come back to some of these controls in later projects.

Checking your spelling

Before you send your letter, you can run it through Word’s spellchecker. It can’t always tell if you’ve put words in the wrong order, or used the wrong word (such as ‘that’ instead of ‘than’) but it can pick up any words that aren’t in the dictionary. It has a go at ﬁ xing grammar too, although that tends to be more hit and miss. Word is a bit like the pupil who shouts out all the answers in class despite only getting about half of them right.

You probably have some red and green squiggly lines underneath words in your letter. A red line means the word isn’t in Word’s dictionary; a green line means Word thinks the grammar might be broken.

06_711965-ch01.indd 4206_711965-ch01.indd 42 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

You might have noticed that Word sometimes automatically corrects your spelling as you type. Type ‘wrod’ and see what happens! If it does this and you don’t want it to, press CTRL+Z to undo immediately afterwards.

To check your spelling, you need to use a different ribbon. The ribbon is organised a bit like a fi ling cabinet. Imagine that all the controls for reviewing your text are on one tabbed divider, all the controls for page layout are on another, and both are fi led in the cabinet. Whenever you click a particular tab, you lift out that set of controls and move it to the front. So far, you’ve used the File tab (in Offi ce 2010) and everything else you’ve needed has been on the Home ribbon. Now click the Review tab on the ribbon, and you’ll see the controls you need for spell- checking come to the front.

Try clicking the different tabs to see what’s behind them, but don’t worry if you don’t understand the new controls you see. We’ll come to the important ones later. If you get lost, click the Home tab.

George Bernard Shaw is credited with saying that the US and UK are two nations divided by a common language, and this is never truer than when you’re trying to spellcheck something. If you spellcheck a UK document with the US dictionary, you’ll get all kinds of false alarms and might miss some genuine errors too. The fi rst thing you need to do, then, is to set the dictionary language. In Offi ce 2010 (shown in Figure 1.11), fi nd the Language part of the Review ribbon, click the Language button and select Set Proofi ng Language. In Offi ce 2007, fi nd the Proof- ing part of the Review ribbon and click Set Language. Your current language is highlighted at the top of the list, together with other languages you’ve already used so you can fi nd them quickly. You can scroll to fi nd the language you need and double–click it to set it.

To check the spelling of the whole document, click the Spelling & Grammar button on the Review ribbon (shown in Figure 1.11).

06_711965-ch01.indd 4306_711965-ch01.indd 43 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Spelling & Grammar button

Check grammar

Figure 1.11

A new window will open. In the top box, it will show you an excerpt from your text, with a questionable section shown in red (for spelling alerts) or green (for grammar queries). In the second box, it will show you Word’s suggestions for how to fi x the error. Your options for spelling are: • Ignore Once: click this button if you’re satisfi ed you’re right and Word is wrong but you want it to tell you if it spots something similar later on. Use this if you could easily slip and make an error that looks like this, even though it’s correct this time. If you were writing a story about Shep the dog rounding up sheep, you’d probably Ignore Once when it fl agged up the dog’s name, so you could check you haven’t mis-spelled ‘sheep’ anywhere.

06_711965-ch01.indd 4406_711965-ch01.indd 44 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

• Ignore All: click this button if you’re right and that’s fi nal. Use this for names of people or companies, so you don’t get alerted to every mention. • Add to Dictionary: if you click this, Word will add your questionable word to its dictionary, so it will always know it’s correct on all documents you create. This is a good idea for names of people in your family. Try to avoid adding something that you might accidentally type when you meant to write something else. • Change: when you click this, the coloured text in the top box will be replaced with the highlighted suggestion in the bottom box. If there are multiple suggestions, click the correct one fi rst. • Change All: this will change all instances of the text in this document. • Autocorrect: if you make this particular mistake often, click this button and Word will automatically fi x it for you as you type. Make sure that it is an unambiguous typing error. Don’t use Autocorrect to always change ‘nappy’ to ‘happy’, because you might want to type ‘nappy’ in future.

For grammar errors, your options are: • Ignore Once: this works the same way as the spelling check, as above. • Ignore Rule: this will stop Word alerting you to similar problems in future. Word’s sense of grammar is a bit Victorian and not consistent with an informal letter style, so I often tell it to ignore a rule when it ﬂ ags up sentence fragments that make sense in today’s English. • Next Sentence: this jumps the grammar check ahead to the next sentence. • Change: this works the same as the spelling check, as above. • Explain: in this fun feature, Word will tell you why it thinks the grammar is wrong. The rules are pretty sound, but sometimes Word can’t identify when a rule is being broken. The most important thing is that it looks and sounds okay to you. • Check grammar tickbox (also shown on Figure 1.11): If you uncheck this box, Word will concentrate on the spelling and ignore the grammar. Play with the grammar checker to see if you ﬁ nd it useful, but don’t be afraid to turn it off if your writing style generates too many false alarms.

06_711965-ch01.indd 4506_711965-ch01.indd 45 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If Word has found a mistake but doesn’t know how to ﬁ x it, you can also click the text in the document and edit it there. Afterwards, click the Resume button in the spell check window to pick up where you left off.

As you are writing your letter, you can also right-click on any words or phrases with squiggles underneath them. A new menu will open, from which you can choose a suggestion (at the top), or choose to ignore once or throughout.

Now Word has set me straight on the spelling of onomatopoeia, I won’t have to ask Fred after all.

If you fi nd all that red and green underlining distracting (it’s a bit like being back at school), then you can switch it off. In Offi ce 2010, click the File tab and then click Options on the left. In Offi ce 2007, click the Offi ce button and then click Word Options in the bottom right. Once you’ve found the Options, click Proofi ng on the left to see the Proofi ng options shown in Figure 1.12. To get rid of the squiggles, untick the boxes beside Check spelling as you type and Mark grammar errors as you type.

To stop Word autocorrecting what you type, go into the Prooﬁ ng options, and then click the button for AutoCorrect Options. Untick the box beside ‘Replace text as you type’.

You can also add your own replacements to the AutoCorrect dictionary in the Prooﬁ ng options. This is a handy way to create short ways to type long words. For example, I could set it so that whenever I type ‘msox’ it replaces it with ‘Microsoft Ofﬁ ce’. Take care that the short form you use isn’t a real word.

If you’re ever lost for words, there is also a thesaurus on the Review tab (why is there only one word for thesaurus?). Click its button on the ribbon and a Research panel opens on the right where you can enter your word and search, as shown in Figure 1.11. This Research sidebar also enables you to search the Encarta

06_711965-ch01.indd 4606_711965-ch01.indd 46 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

dictionary and to translate your letter into a number of languages. (The translation is provided in your web browser, so you’ll need to select it, copy it and paste it back into Word.) Computer translations are a bit ropey but this can still be a useful tool if your correspondent doesn’t have a full command of English. I’d send them the English version too, though. To use the dictionary or translation service, select it in the pulldown menu at the top of the Research sidebar.

Turn on/off squiggles

Figure 1.12

Printing your letter

Once you’re happy with your letter, it’s time to print it out. The way this works is slightly different in Ofﬁ ce 2010 and Ofﬁ ce 2007.

In Ofﬁ ce 2010, you click the File tab and then click Print. On the right is a preview of your document, to allow you to see what it will look like on the printed page. On the left, all your options are laid out, as shown in Figure 1.13.

06_711965-ch01.indd 4706_711965-ch01.indd 47 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Usually, the default printer options will be ﬁ ne, but you can choose different printers (if you’re living in multi-printer luxury), and can choose which pages of your letter you want to print if you don’t want the whole thing. If that’s the case, you specify a page range using a dash to separate pages (eg 5-7) or you can list the pages you want and separate them with commas (eg 1,3,5,7). If you want multiple copies of your letter, you can specify that too. When you’re ready, click the Print button in the top-left corner, shown on Figure 1.13.

Print button

Figure 1.13

In Offi ce 2007, things look a bit different. Click the round Offi ce button in the top-left corner of the screen (see Figure 1.2) and then click Print on the menu. Your print options are similar to Offi ce 2010 but look like Figure 1.14. If you want to preview your document fi rst, click the Offi ce button, then place the mouse over Print, and click Print Preview on the right when it appears.

06_711965-ch01.indd 4806_711965-ch01.indd 48 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

Figure 1.14

When you’re happy, click OK, and your letter will print. Now, only one question remains: is there time to catch the post?

Finishing your Word session

When you’ve fi nished with Word for the day, click the Close icon in the top right of its window (shown on Figures 1.1 and 1.2). If you haven’t saved your work before quitting, Word will try to save you from yourself by reminding you. Think carefully before deciding whether to save the fi le. You may not want to save it because you haven’t made any signifi cant changes to it, or because by saving it you would be overwriting a good version of the fi le with one you’d rather discard.

To close your fi le without closing Word, click the File tab (Offi ce 2010) or Offi ce button (Offi ce 2007) and then click Close.

If you want to edit your fi le again later, you can double-click on the fi lename or icon in Windows and the computer will start Word and open that fi le for editing. You can also open Word as you did at the start of this project, and then click the File tab or Offi ce button, choose Open, and then fi nd the right fi le.

When the ﬁ le ﬁ rst opens, you might see it in a special preview mode that enables you to quickly read through it. To get out of that, click the Close button at the top right of the screen. 49

06_711965-ch01.indd 4906_711965-ch01.indd 49 9/13/10 3:15 PM9/13/10 3:15 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Word makes it easy to fi nd recent documents. In Offi ce 2010, there is a Recent option when you go backstage. In Offi ce 2007, recent documents are listed when you click the Offi ce button. In either case, click the name of a recent fi le and it will load so you can work on it.

What else can you do?

Congratulations on fi nishing your fi rst project with Word! Here are some of the other ways you can use your new skills: • Write formal correspondence. In this chapter we’ve covered informal letters, but you can also use Word to manage your letters to the bank or doctor, for example. You can print two copies of the same letter, one for the bank/doctor and one for your records. You can edit the letter to create modifi ed versions. You can use the same letter, with a new date and some alterations to the details, for regular prescription requests. The possibilities are endless. • Create and print your CV, and make sure there are no typos in it! • Write a diary. You can use Word to record your daily life for future generations or just for your own interest. If you’re worried about people prying, see Chapter 5 for advice on encrypting your fi le. • Write concrete poetry, where the layout and fonts help to convey the meaning. Or keep it simple and write straight poetry or song lyrics. • Write a book. Although we’ve only created a short letter here, Word can handle long and complex documents. You can even get your book published by uploading a Word document to sites like www.lulu.com. • Print out some words in light grey text, so that younger family members can practise writing by tracing the words. • Print your French homework double-spaced, so that you can write the translation in the gaps. (Use the paragraph formatting options to change the spacing between lines in a paragraph.) • Type out your recipes to stick on the kitchen wall. You could even laminate them at your local printshop, to make them splash-proof. • Create a checklist of everything you usually take on holiday. Every time you have to pack, you can print it out and cross things off as they go into the case.

06_711965-ch01.indd 5006_711965-ch01.indd 50 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Writing a letter with Microsoft Word

Summary There are lots of different ways to start Word, but you can always • fi nd it by going through the Start menu. • You should save your work before you start, and keep saving regularly. • Your cursor shows you where any new characters or edits will appear. You can reposition your cursor using the keyboard or mouse, so that you • can go back and change what you’ve written, or delete something. You can select text using the keyboard or mouse. Once selected, • you can delete it, move it or format it. The ribbon lays out the controls in Word. You click the tabs on the • top to bring different sets of controls to the front. Cut and paste enables you to copy or move text around your docu- • ment, between documents or even between different programs. To change the formatting or alignment of your text, select it and • then click the appropriate formatting option on the Home ribbon. • To reverse the last thing you did, use the Undo button. Word’s built in spelling and grammar checker can help weed out • errors, but it’s not perfect. You can override it any time you want. • You can print your entire letter or choose specifi c pages. • Close Word using the X in the top-right corner. You can open your fi les to work on them again by double-clicking • them in Windows, or using the File tab or Offi ce button to fi nd recent fi les and Open others.

06_711965-ch01.indd 5106_711965-ch01.indd 51 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Brain Training

Your fi rst project has taken you from typing your fi rst word to producing a complete letter. How much did you remember? Try this quiz to fi nd out. There might be more than one right answer.

1. To prevent your work being lost 3. If you press the Del key, Word will: because of a power cut, you should: (a) Delete the character to the left of the (a) Save your ﬁ le when you start cursor (b) Use CTRL+S or the disk icon to keep (b) Delete the character to the right of the it updated cursor (c) Close your eyes and wish really hard (c) Delete whatever text is selected (d) Pay your electricity bill (d) Start a new letter to your friend Derek

2. To correct a spelling error a few 4. If you click three times: words back, you can: (a) Word will select the word (a) Use the mouse to reposition your (b) Word will select the sentence cursor and then fi x it (c) Word will select the paragraph (b) See whether Word has fi xed it (d) You’ll be transported back to your bed automatically in a Kansas farmhouse (c) Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and then fi x it To make your letter easy to read, it’s (d) Pick it up at the end using the 5. spelling checker a good idea to: (a) Write it all in capitals (b) Use fonts that look like handwriting (c) Use a point size of 6-8 (d) Pick a couple of easy-to-read fonts and use them consistently

Answers

Q1 – a, b and d Q2 – a, b, c and d Q3 – b and c Q4 – c Q5 – d

06_711965-ch01.indd 5206_711965-ch01.indd 52 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Creating a poster 2 with Microsoft Word

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Microsoft Word 2010 or Microsoft Word 2007 (see Introduction), plus a connection to the Internet to download templates.

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball). Basic familiarity with navigating Word documents, selecting text and using simple formatting controls (see Chapter 1).

Whether you’ve lost a kitten, are delivering a talk to your local community group or are promoting a jumble sale, it pays to advertise. There are lots of places you can display a poster, including your local library and newsagent’s window. But how do you make sure that yours stands out from the others?

Using the skills you developed in Chapter 1, you can design an eye-catching poster of your own. It’s not difﬁ cult to type in the text, use a big, bold font, apply some fancy formatting to draw attention to the most important parts, add a splash of colour, centre it all and print it out.

To make it even easier for you, Word has a number of professional designs built into it, which you can customise to ensure your poster is both eye-catching and professional-looking. Posters are a lot quicker to create this way as well, because all the work on the design has already been done for you.

07_711965-ch02.indd 5307_711965-ch02.indd 53 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Starting a new document with a template

To start creating your poster, you ﬁ rst need to pick a template for it. A template is a document that’s been designed for you, with dummy text that you can modify.

There are a limited number of templates built into Word, but you can download many others from the Internet. Known as Ofﬁ ce.com templates, they are regularly updated by Microsoft, which means it’s always worth checking to see what’s new. You do need to be connected to the Internet to access them, but you don’t need to use a web browser or email because Word does all the downloading for you in the background.

The way to select templates is slightly different depending on whether you’re using Ofﬁ ce 2010 or Ofﬁ ce 2007.

It’s worth exploring the templates to see what’s there, particularly as templates designed for one purpose often work really well for another. There are good can- didates for posters in the categories of Announcements (for graduation and new baby parties), Flyers (for events) and Invitations (also for events). At the time of writing, the Posters category was a red herring, offering little more than a few dull posters for real estate and technology companies. Don’t they realise Word is mostly about fun stuff?

In this project, I’ll assume you’re creating an A4 poster. Word will let you design documents bigger than that, but few people have printers that can print them. You can get larger pages printed at specialist copy shops, however, or you could print on A4 and then enlarge it to A3 using a photocopier (which will result in a drop in quality).

Some templates, such as the invitations, are designed to be printed onto cards smaller than A4. Unfortunately, there isn’t a deﬁ nitive way of telling how big a template is before you download it. The template name often gives a hint about whether it’s designed for paper of non-standard size. The easiest way to test it is to download it and then print it to see whether it looks okay, before you start editing. You don’t have to pay for the templates, so why not give it a go?

07_711965-ch02.indd 5407_711965-ch02.indd 54 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Creating a poster with Microsoft Word

Choosing a template in Ofﬁ ce 2010

To pick a template in Ofﬁ ce 2010, you need to start by going backstage (click the File tab, as you did to save your work in the project in Chapter 1). From the menu, select New, and you’ll see a number of templates at your disposal, as shown in Figure 2.1.

You would usually start a new ﬁ le by choosing Blank Document. Word opens a new blank document automatically when you start the program, as you know, but you can work on multiple new documents in the same session. Word will let you have lots of documents open at once – certainly many more than your brain can cope with working on at once!

This time, we’re not going to start a blank document. We’re going to pick something with more sizzle. Click the More categories folder, and you’ll see a number of folders. If you click to go into any of these, you can preview the templates in there.

Figure 2.1

07_711965-ch02.indd 5507_711965-ch02.indd 55 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you come back to create calendars or gift certiﬁ cates later, note that the folders you see in Figure 2.1 aren’t repeated inside the More categories folder, so check the ﬁ rst screen carefully before hunting in the More categories folder.

When you ﬁ nd a template you like the look of, click on it and you’ll see a preview of it on the right, as shown in Figure 2.2. When you ﬁ nd a design you’re happy with, click the Download button underneath the template preview.

Back Search

Download

Figure 2.2

07_711965-ch02.indd 5607_711965-ch02.indd 56 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Creating a poster with Microsoft Word

Choosing a template in Ofﬁ ce 2007

To choose a template in Offi ce 2007, click the round Offi ce button at the top left of the screen and then click on New. The fi rst thing you see is the blank document template and any templates you have used recently, so that you can quickly fi nd them again. On the left you’ll see the categories of templates available, as shown in Figure 2.3. When you click one of those, you see either all the templates within that folder or some categories to choose from fi rst. Click the Flyers category, for example, and you are asked to pick from Event, Marketing, Real Estate and Other fl yers.

Back Search

Download

Figure 2.3

07_711965-ch02.indd 5707_711965-ch02.indd 57 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you can’t ﬁ nd the category you want at ﬁ rst, try More categories at the bottom of the category list. You can also search for a particular template by typing what you’re looking for into the search box at the top, and clicking the right arrow beside it.

So you don’t have to squint, a large preview is shown on the right when you click on one of the templates.

When you’ve found a template you’re happy with, click the Download button at the bottom right.

In both Offi ce 2010 and Offi ce 2007, you can also search for templates by keyword across all the folders. Type what you’re looking for into the ‘Search Offi ce.com for templates’ box in Offi ce 2010 or the ‘Search Microsoft Offi ce Online’ box in Offi ce 2007, and then click the right-arrow next to it. If you get lost in a folder or set of search results, just click the back button to go back a step.

Changing the view

There are a few different ways you can view your document in Word. Most of the time it doesn’t make much difference which of them you use, but when you’re doing projects that involve positioning things on the page, you need to use the Print Layout document view. Otherwise, you might not see some of your design elements. If your screen looks like a piece of paper on a grey background, you’re already there.

If not, click the View tab and then click Print Layout on the left of the ribbon. You’re unlikely to need the other document views, although Draft is useful for writing long documents. Full Screen Reading makes it easier to read the document on screen but won’t let you edit, so if you do use that, you need to click Close at the top right to get back to editing.

07_711965-ch02.indd 5807_711965-ch02.indd 58 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Creating a poster with Microsoft Word

Changing the text in your template

I’m sure you’re way ahead of me on this already, but the ﬁ rst thing you should do after downloading your template is to save your document so you can quickly save your edits without interrupting your concentration as you work on it. I know. I’m nagging. But you’ll thank me for it one day.

So, now you’ve found a great template for a holiday party but you don’t want to promote a generic party in some US town you’ve never heard of. You want to get people to come to your Christmas celebration! How do you edit the template?

If you’ve mastered the art of selecting and editing text (see Chapter 1), this will be easy. All you need to do is edit the dummy text and replace it with your own text. You can move your cursor around the dummy text, delete it and replace it with your own words.

The trick is to do this without losing the formatting. The best way to do that is to select text using the mouse or keyboard and then type what you’d like to replace it with. What you type will overwrite the old text, but Word will keep the old formatting.

In my template, shown in Figure 2.4, the text uses a number of different text styles so I need to edit it in small chunks to make sure that the formatting of each one is preserved. In my template, I edited the text at the top, the red event title, the date and time, and the location and RSVP details, each of them separately.

When you click on your text, you might see a dotted box pop up around it, as shown in Figure 2.4. This is a text box used for laying out the page, and you can ignore it for now – you’ll learn more about text boxes in Chapter 3.

The template is only a starting point for your own poster – you don’t have to have the same amount of text. You can add more lines if you need to, or delete sections. Don’t forget that you can start a new line without having a paragraph break (which might include a large gap) by using Shift+Enter.

You can also change the formatting as much as you like. Experiment with fonts, colours and text styles until it is exactly what you need.

07_711965-ch02.indd 5907_711965-ch02.indd 59 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Show symbols

Figure 2.4

If you want to see where the paragraph breaks, soft returns and full stops are in a document, you can click the show symbols button, shown in Figure 2.4. This will ﬂ oat a dot in the spaces between words and add a paragraph symbol where the paragraph breaks are. Soft returns are shown with the same down-and-left arrow you see on the Enter key. It can make it much easier to edit a template if you can see where these are, and it won’t affect how your document prints – it’s just an onscreen guide. Click the same show symbols button on the ribbon to hide them again.

07_711965-ch02.indd 6007_711965-ch02.indd 60 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Creating a poster with Microsoft Word

If your template has a US phone number in it, it probably has a prefi x of 555 after the area code. That’s because a range of numbers with the prefi x 555 is reserved purely for fi ctional use in places like TV shows, fi lms, books and, er, Word templates.

Inserting pictures in your poster

To give your poster more personality, why not add your own photo to it? Getting your photo in the right place can take a little trial and error, but it’s not too hard once you’ve learned the basic controls.

If you click the Insert tab, next to Home, you’ll see the Insert ribbon come to the front, as shown in Figure 2.5.

Figure 2.5 61

07_711965-ch02.indd 6107_711965-ch02.indd 61 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

To add your picture, ﬁ rst make sure the picture you want to use is on your computer. Then:

1. Move your cursor to where you would like your picture to appear in your poster. 2. Click the Insert tab on the ribbon to move the Insert ribbon to the front. 3. Click Picture on the Insert ribbon. 4. Use the ﬁ le browser to select your picture, click it and then click the Insert button. It doesn’t matter whether your picture is a photo, a scanned cartoon or something you made using the free Paint application in Windows.

Ta-da! Your picture should now appear in your poster. It will probably be in the wrong place and might be a bit too big, so there are a number of controls you can use to tailor it. Click on your picture, and you should notice some squares and circles appear around it. You can see these on my picture of mince pies in Figure 2.5. These are controls for manipulating the image: • To stretch or squash your picture, click on the square box on one side and pull it in the direction you’d like it to go. The mouse pointer turns into a pointer with two arrows on it. If you want to make your picture wider, for example, click on the box halfway up its right-hand side, hold the mouse button down and move the mouse to the right. You will see your picture stretch in that direction. When you let go of the mouse button, your picture will stay that size. • If you want to make your picture bigger or smaller without squashing or stretching it, click the round circle in one of the corners, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse. If you move it towards the middle of the picture, the picture will become smaller. If you move it away from the middle of the picture, it will become larger. The width and height will move at the same time, so the picture is always in proportion. • If you want to rotate your picture, click the green circle above it, hold down the mouse button, and then move your mouse around the picture. Your picture will rotate about its centre as you move your mouse. You can put your picture at a jaunty angle, prop it on its side, or even ﬂ ip it upside down. • To move your picture, click in the middle of it so that your mouse pointer turns into four compass points, hold down the mouse button, and move the

07_711965-ch02.indd 6207_711965-ch02.indd 62 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Creating a poster with Microsoft Word

mouse around your poster. A dotted cursor shows where the picture will be inserted as you move, but the picture won’t go anywhere until you release the mouse button.

Feel free to experiment with this. If you make a mistake, you can always use the Undo button in the top left to reverse it.

Sometimes it’s tricky getting pictures to work with templates because other parts of the template get in the way. You can delete pictures that are already in the template by clicking on them and pressing the Delete or Backspace key. When you right-click on a picture, the menu that opens may give you the option to replace that picture with one of your own choice, too.

If your picture is only partly visible, it might be inside a text box that isn’t big enough for it. If so, you can stretch that box the same way you adjust the size of your picture. Figure 2.4 shows the dotted guidelines of a textbox; as you can see, it has the same controls as those used for resizing pictures in Figure 2.5. Some- times your picture might be hidden by another one that is in front of it. If you insert a picture and all you see is a dotted box where it should be, immediately click the Picture Tools Format tab to bring that ribbon to the front, click Wrap Text (Word 2010) or Text Wrapping (Word 2007) and then choose ‘In front of text’.

If you want to shunt your picture to the right, move it to the left or ﬂ oat it in the middle, you can use the same controls you used for formatting paragraphs in Chapter 1. Click the Home tab, click your picture and then click the icon for left, right or centre alignment (shown in Figure 1.10 in Chapter 1).

Inserting clip art in your poster

If all your photos are of people with their heads cut off and your drawings look like the cat drew them, clip art can rescue your design. Microsoft provides a library of illustrations and photographs that you can embed into your documents directly from Word. Known as clip art, this has been created by professional illus- trators and photographers.

07_711965-ch02.indd 6307_711965-ch02.indd 63 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

It can be bit of a mixed blessing; although clip art is designed to give your document a professional sheen, it can end up making it look amateurish.

For best results, use clip art sparingly. If you’re using multiple pieces, try to pick images that look as if they were made by the same illustrator and belong to the same set, so that your design feels consistent. You can enlarge the pictures, so consider using a single striking image instead of lots of tiny ones.

Ofﬁ ce has some clip art included in the software but Microsoft provides access to a much larger collection on the Internet, so make sure you’re connected before you start.

Searching for clip art isn’t the same thing as searching the Internet for images using Google. All the images in the online clip art gallery are approved for you to use in your document for free. Images on the Internet are usually copyright-controlled by whoever created or published them, and you can’t legally use them without permission.

To begin, click the Insert tab on the ribbon (if necessary) and then click Clip Art. A sidebar opens, as shown in Figure 2.6.

The Clip Art sidebar works slightly differently in Ofﬁ ce 2010 (shown in Figure 2.6) and Ofﬁ ce 2007. The differences are so slight I don’t know why they bothered to make them. Just to keep us on our toes, I guess.

Whichever version you are using, type your keyword into the Search box. If you’re too specifi c you won’t get many results, so try to think of themes (such as Christ- mas) rather than specifi c items (such as Christmas tree). If you are using Offi ce 2010, tick the box to include Offi ce.com content. If you’re using Offi ce 2007, make sure the pulldown menu is set to search in all collections. Then click the Go button, and you’ll be shown small versions (thumbnails) of the available pictures. Word downloads these from the Internet so it will take a moment or two, or longer if you have a slow Internet connection.

07_711965-ch02.indd 6407_711965-ch02.indd 64 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Creating a poster with Microsoft Word

Figure 2.6

You can browse through the clip art by using the scrollbar on the right of it to see more results. When you ﬁ nd something you like, click it. It will take a moment because the computer then downloads the full size picture from the Internet, which can be a large ﬁ le. Once it’s downloaded, it will be inserted into your poster.

You can manipulate clip art images in just the same way as other images; many clip art images are designed to look good in a variety of different sizes.

You might occasionally see video and audio results come up in the Clip Art sidebar. You can safely ignore these, or experiment with using them. If you don’t want to see them, click on the pulldown menu that says ‘All media ﬁ le types’ (see Figure 2.6) and change the options so you only see photos and illustrations. This is also the menu to go to if you want to reﬁ ne your search to photos only or illustrations only.

To close the Clip Art sidebar, click the X in its top right corner.

07_711965-ch02.indd 6507_711965-ch02.indd 65 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Printing your poster

Congratulations! You’ve ﬁ nished your poster. To print it out, use the same technique you used to print your letter in Chapter 1. If you want to send your poster to other people so they can print it out and display it in their communities too, see Chapter 9 for tips on sharing your creations by email.

Why not print on coloured paper? As long as there’s enough contrast between your text colour and the background, using coloured paper can give you an eye-catching background without draining your printer’s colour cartridge.

What else can you do?

There are many more templates in Word that you can customise for your own needs. In fact, just browsing the template fi les is inspiring because it gives you so many new ideas for how to use Word. Here are some of my favourites: • If you have children visiting, Word includes templates for paper dolls (in the paper folding projects folder) and colouring books (under coloring and activity pages). You can customise these with your own text and then print them out for the youngsters to colour, cut and glue together. • If you’re learning a language, Word also includes templates for fl ash cards that you can customise and print to help you learn your vocabulary. • If you’re throwing a party, you can use Word’s banner templates to print signs that say ‘Celebrate!’ or ‘Best wishes!’ across several sheets of A4. There are templates for place cards and menus if you’re having a formal dinner, too. • You can use a Word template to make a calendar for the whole year, or even just to create a time planner for one month to go on your wall (remember you can print just one page from a document if you want to). • You can also use a template to create gift certifi cates. You could give friends presents like an evening’s babysitting by making a voucher to slip inside their card. You can even make your own cards.

07_711965-ch02.indd 6607_711965-ch02.indd 66 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Creating a poster with Microsoft Word • Create and print your own bookmark including inspiring quotations or your favourite book covers. • Save on expensive printing bills by creating your own business cards. With all these templates and plenty more besides, perhaps the only paper you’ll need to buy in future will be blank!

Summary • Templates are pre-prepared document designs. You can adapt templates designed for other purposes (such as ﬂ y- • ers) to use for your poster. To replace the text in a template, you select it and then type what • you would like to replace it with. To preserve the formatting in a template, make sure all the text you • have selected has the same formatting before you type over it. You can have more or less text than the template, and can replace • or delete the template’s images. • You can change the formatting and fonts too. • The Insert ribbon enables you to insert images. The clip art provides a library of pre-prepared illustrations and pho- • tos you can use in your poster. You can use the controls around the picture to adjust its width and • height, and its angle on the page. Although there are templates and clip art • built into Microsoft Ofﬁ ce, there is much more available if you’re connected to the Internet.

07_711965-ch02.indd 6707_711965-ch02.indd 67 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Brain Training

Now you’ve ﬁ nished your second project you’re probably already plastering posters all over the town, but take a few minutes to revise your new skills with this quiz. There might be more than one right answer.

1. To fi nd a template for a poster, it’s 4. Clip art is: best to check: (a) An installation at the Tate Modern art (a) the posters templates gallery created with paper clips (b) the fl yers templates (b) Art stolen from other people’s websites (c) the invitation templates (c) A gallery of photos and illustrations (d) all the templates you can use in your documents (d) Expensive 2. You can customise a poster by changing: 5. The best way to use clip art is to: (a) the text alignment (a) Use as many different styles as (b) the words in the poster possible. Equal opportunities for (c) the pictures in the poster artists! (d) the text colours (b) Splash it all over the place – you can never have enough clip art 3. To add a picture fi le, you need to (c) Use a few good images that work go to: well together (a) the Home ribbon (d) Only use the clip art installed on your hard drive (b) the backstage area or Offi ce button (c) the Insert ribbon (d) the Picture ribbon

Answers

Q1 – d Q2 – All of them, and more! Q3 – c Q4 – c Q5 – c

07_711965-ch02.indd 6807_711965-ch02.indd 68 9/13/10 2:49 PM9/13/10 2:49 PM Publishing a news- 3 letter with Word

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Microsoft Word 2010 or Microsoft Word 2007 (see Introduction).

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball). Familiarity with navigating Word documents, selecting text and simple formatting controls (see Chapter 1), and ability to insert images (see Chapter 2).

So far, you’ve used Word to create some snazzy one-page documents. In this chapter, you’ll learn how to make a newsletter with a more sophisticated layout.

If you are a volunteer for an organisation like Probus, U3A or your local parent- teacher association, you could create a newsletter to keep members and support- ers updated. Alternatively, you could use the skills you learn here to put some zing into your annual round robin to friends and family. Or perhaps you could create a spoof newspaper as a birthday gift for a friend.

Word is sophisticated, but it’s not ideal for magazine-quality layout. It works particularly well for producing newsletters that consist mainly of text, with occasional pictures as illustration. You can create a full-colour newsletter and email it out (see Chapter 9), or stick to black on white if you want something that will reproduce well on a photocopier.

To get a taste of the kind of layout you’ll learn to create, see Figure 3.14.

08_711965-ch03.indd 6908_711965-ch03.indd 69 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Planning your newsletter

Before you get too deep into writing your newsletter, step back and do some planning ﬁ rst. It can save a lot of hassle later on.

Your biggest challenge will be getting all your words to ﬁ t on the page without looking too crammed in. You’ll probably start off thinking you have nothing to say, only to discover later that you can’t ﬁ t it all in!

I recommend that you try to keep your stories to under 250 words. That doesn’t give you much to play with, but it means you can get more than one story to a page. This makes the design look nicer, and also means the reader can choose from a number of places to start reading – people like to hop around a bit when they read newsletters, and rarely read from start to ﬁ nish. It’s a lot easier to read four stories of 250 words than it is to read a single story of 1,000 words, too, so if you want people to read it all, keep it punchy.

If you’re not sure how long a piece of text is, select it as you did when you selected text for formatting in Chapter 1. In the bottom left corner of the screen, it will say something like ‘Words: 20/1,531’. The fi rst number tells you how many words you have selected on screen. The second tells you the total number of words you have in your document. When you don’t have any text selected, it will display the word count for the whole document. When you’ve fi nished with your selection, you can click somewhere else, or press one of the cursor keys to carry on working. Pay attention to where your text cursor has fi nished up, though.

If you have a story that’s too long, ask yourself whether it could be split into several different but related sections. Perhaps you have a story about an outing you’re organising, and can create one section for information about the venue and another for the timetable. Or maybe you can create a mini-series of tips, and serialise it across different issues of the newsletter.

Don’t make readers think too hard to work out what the most important aspect of a story is. It should be in the headline, and should also be in the ﬁ rst paragraph of the story itself. You need to think from the reader’s point of view: readers are

08_711965-ch03.indd 7008_711965-ch03.indd 70 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

interested in what’s new, what’s happening and how much money it will save them. If you can get a sense of one of those elements at the very start of your story, you’re sure to reel the reader in.

If you want readers to act on the information you’ve given them, for example, by booking their place on a trip to the seaside or coming to the next committee meeting, end the story by giving them instructions for what you want them to do. Mar- keting types know this as a ‘call to action’. You might say something like: ‘Put the 25th in your diary now, and we’ll look forward to seeing you at the meeting’! or ‘Hurry to the hut to buy your onion sets this Sunday’!

Pictures are usually the ﬁ rst thing that people look at when they pick up a printed page, so make sure yours are strong. In Chapter 2 you learned how to use clip art, and that will have its place here too. But your newsletter will have more impact and feel more personal if you can include your own photos or illustrations. Set some time aside to research or gather relevant pictures before you start to lay your newsletter out.

It’s a good idea to keep a stock of tiny stories you can use to plug any gaps that come up. You might have 30 words about the next committee meeting time and date, or even a pool of relevant quotes or jokes you can insert where there’s space.

Think about how you are going to distribute your newsletter before using lots of colour or including too many photos. Black and white clip art might be best if you’re going to photocopy it for distribution. If you’re printing in bulk at home, using too many photos will use up your ink cartridges in no time.

Once you’ve gathered all your content, you need to think about which order the stories should appear in. This will involve a certain amount of juggling with the design. It works best if you can avoid leaving gaps on the page or having stories spilling from one page to the next. You’ll need to experiment (and probably edit the stories a bit) during the design process to ﬁ nd a comfortable place for everything.

08_711965-ch03.indd 7108_711965-ch03.indd 71 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

There are a few guidelines, though, that should initially help you to decide what goes where: • Newsletters are more approachable if you include an introduction on the front page. If you are part of a committee, perhaps this could be written by the chairman. The fi rst page is a great place to tell people about all the goodies inside too, so that they’re encouraged to read through the whole newsletter. • Your most important story also needs to go on the front page. If it won’t fi t, you can start it on page one and continue on page two. • Don’t let the pictures get bunched up in one place. Try to plan your newsletter so there’s a picture on every page, if you can. You don’t need a picture for every story, but it helps to lift the design if you can fi nd one for each page. It doesn’t matter if you don’t have enough pictures, I’ll be showing you how to break up the page without them by laying out text in interesting ways. • The back page is also important, as it’s the only other page that people can see without opening the newsletter. So consider putting one of your stronger stories there, too, or using it for summary information like a list of upcoming events or new products.

There is a lot of work to do but don’t feel you have to do it all yourself. If you’re creating a newsletter for a local organisation, ﬁ nd out who else would like to con- tribute. You’re bound to ﬁ nd some budding journalists among the membership, with some stories to tell. People like to see their name in print, so don’t forget their credit (or ‘byline’, as the professionals say).

Creating dummy text

You might want to have a dry run before you create a real newsletter against a deadline. It’s a good idea to design a ‘dummy’ newsletter using some representa- tive articles. If you don’t have any and don’t have time to quickly write any, there’s a shortcut you can use to create some dummy text. Type =rand() into a Word document and then hit the Enter key. Three paragraphs of text will be inserted into your document automatically. You can tell Word how much text to give you by adding some ﬁ gures in brackets. For example, to get four random paragraphs of two sentences each, type =rand(4,2). The text that appears will be drawn from Word’s help ﬁ les, but don’t get distracted by reading it – that newsletter’s not going to design itself!

08_711965-ch03.indd 7208_711965-ch03.indd 72 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Designers often use dummy text that looks like Latin but is actually meaningless. It’s called ‘lorem ipsum’ and is used because it’s less distracting than copy you might be tempted to read, and it’s also clear that it’s intended as dummy text and not the real thing. If you ﬁ nd Word’s random text draws you in, use =lorem() in place of =rand().

Choosing your paper size

The ﬁ rst thing you should do when you begin your layout is to start a new document and pick the right paper size. By default, this will be A4 (or US letter format in the US). Unless you’ve been doing something unusual or printing photographs, this is almost certainly the paper that’s in your printer right now.

If you’re happy with this (and most people are, most of the time), you can skip ahead to the next section.

If not, click the Page Layout tab on the ribbon, shown in Figure 3.1. In the Page Setup section there is a button labelled Size. When you click this, the most common paper and envelope sizes are shown. If you’re not using A4, you probably want to use A5, which is the same size as a piece of A4 folded in half. Choose your paper size, and your document will be resized accordingly.

Make sure you get the paper size right at the start. If you change the paper size on a document you’ve already created, it will most likely wreck any fancy page layout you’ve done.

In this part of the ribbon, you can also change the page’s orientation, so if you want your document to be wider than it is tall, this is where you make the change. Your two choices are Portrait (think of portraits, which are usually taller than they are wide) and Landscape (think of a wide landscape stretching out around you).

08_711965-ch03.indd 7308_711965-ch03.indd 73 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Page orientation

Themes Watermark

Page size Page Color

Figure 3.1

There are also a couple of special effects in the Page Layout tab of the ribbon, which you might like to use: • Page Color: if you plan to email your ﬁ nished newsletter (see Chapter 9), you can use this feature to change the colour of the page to something other than white. Subtle tints can work quite well and give your newsletter a lot of personality. Make sure there’s a good level of contrast between your background and foreground colours, however, so people can still read it easily. You could also use this feature to preview what your newsletter might look like if it’s printed on coloured paper. • Watermark: click this and then select Custom watermark. This enables you to add a ghost of an image in the background of your newsletter. This can look great if you add your organisation’s logo, for example, but I wouldn’t recommend it if you’re planning to print your newsletter (or if your readers might print their emailed copy). It can make it harder to read, and can consume a lot of ink without adding much editorial value. Avoid the text watermarks – they look tacky, although you’ve got to love the fact that one of the default watermarks is ‘TOP SECRET’. Perhaps my next book should be Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Secret Service… 74

08_711965-ch03.indd 7408_711965-ch03.indd 74 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Creating a title for your newsletter

Type the title of your newsletter, and style it in the way you’d like it to appear. I’ve used the font Arial Black at a size of 36 pt (see Figure 3.1), and have applied some of the text effects for shadows that are available in Word 2010. Figure 3.1 shows my title.

If you feel ready to experiment, you can create some impressive 3D effects in both Word 2010 and Word 2007 using WordArt. Go to the Insert ribbon and click WordArt in the Text group on the ribbon. You can then choose the style you want. In Word 2007, you’ll be prompted to enter your text. In Word 2010, some dummy text will be added, which you can edit. In both cases, you can change the style of the text by clicking it and then clicking the WordArt Tools ribbon. If you’re creating a newsletter on behalf of an organisation, you will probably want to put its logo at the top of the front page. If not, it’s still a nice idea to include a representa- tive image on the cover. If you don’t have a picture ready, you might ﬁ nd something you can use in the clip art.

Try searching the clip art for ‘smiley’. You’ll ﬁ nd lots of yellow smiley faces doing things like reading books, eating popcorn, playing poker, listening to music, taking photos, communing with birds, and hugging trees (really). There’s a good chance you’ll catch one doing something that matches your newsletter topic.

Insert your image and resize it (using the skills you learned in Chapter 2) so that it looks right beside your title text. It can afford to be a bit bigger than your title, but you should try to line it up so that the middle of the image is roughly in line with the middle of your title text.

Adding your ﬁ rst story

Ready, newshound? Now it’s time to add your front page splash to the newsletter!

When doing complex layouts, I ﬁ nd it simplest to keep my text in a different Word document, and copy it into the newsletter document as and when I’m ready to lay

08_711965-ch03.indd 7508_711965-ch03.indd 75 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

it out. Otherwise, text I don’t yet need ends up getting in the way. In this chapter, I’ll assume that you’re doing the same. So, throughout this chapter, you’ll be copying text from one ﬁ le and pasting it in another. For a refresher on using cut and paste, see Chapter 1. To switch between the different open ﬁ les, use the Windows taskbar at the bottom of the screen. If your screen is wide enough, you could resize your windows so that you can see both Word documents side by side, which makes things a lot easier.

At this stage, you should have your newsletter text (or your dummy text represent- ing a few stories of the right length) in one fi le. You should have created a new blank fi le for your newsletter layout (and saved it fi rst thing!), and set the paper size correctly. And you should have inserted and formatted the title of your newsletter, perhaps together with a logo or image.

If you hold down the Alt key and press the Tab key (see Figure 0.1 in the Introduction), a box opens on screen showing you all the fi les you have open. Keep Alt held down, and press the Tab key until the fi lename you want is shown. When you release the Alt key, you’ll be switched to that fi le. If you’ve only got two or three fi les open, this can be much quicker than using the mouse. If you’ve got lots of fi les open, consider closing any you don’t need right now so that this shortcut is easier to use.

In the document that has your stories in it, select your ﬁ rst story, and copy it (CTRL+C). It will go onto the clipboard. Your text remains selected, though, so I suggest you use the highlighter tool in the Fonts section of the Home ribbon (see Figure 3.2) to paint your text background grey. This makes it easy to see at a glance which stories you’ve already copied across to your newsletter. It prevents you from inserting the same story twice or missing any stories, and it also makes it easy to skim the document to see what’s left when you’ve got a gap in your newsletter to ﬁ ll.

Now your story is on the clipboard, go back to your newsletter, and use CTRL+V to paste the story in.

08_711965-ch03.indd 7608_711965-ch03.indd 76 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Repeat this process so that you’ve got two stories in your newsletter. You’ll use this same technique to add other stories later but for now you should just stick to two stories, otherwise the others will start to get in the way.

If you’ve written all the stories yourself, this simple technique will work ﬁ ne. But what about if you’ve accepted contributions from lots of other people? And they’ve all got different favourite fonts? You could end up with a horrible mishmash of text styles. Luckily, there is an alternative way of pasting text that solves this problem. Underneath the Paste button on the Home tab of the ribbon, there is an arrow to open a menu (see Figure 3.2). Open that menu and you’ll see that one of the options is Paste Special. When you click this, you can choose to paste Unformatted Text. By choosing that, you can paste the text content but without any of its formatting.

As well as the author’s choice of font, however, you’ll lose any bold, italics or other formatting added for emphasis. That might mean you have to do a little reworking later, to put the emphasis back in. But it’s a lot easier to ensure that only clean and consistently formatted text goes into your document, than it is to try to clean it up afterwards.

You should now be looking at a ﬁ le that shows your ﬁ rst two stories underneath your newsletter title. Don’t worry about their formatting or the spacing between them. We’ll come to that next.

Getting a sense of style

It’s possible to teach Word which bits of your newsletter are the headlines, so that it can make sure they all look the same. You can then change the font or colour of headlines once and Word will apply your changes to all the headlines in the whole newsletter. As you work on longer documents, this can save a lot of time. It gives you more ﬂ exibility to experiment with your design while still enforcing consistency.

The way you do this is to tell Word that a piece of text is a particular ‘style’. You might put the ‘Heading 1’ style on all your headlines, for example. You can then quickly make changes to them all at once, such as turning all the headlines blue, or making them all to 24pt, by changing what the Heading 1 style looks like.

08_711965-ch03.indd 7708_711965-ch03.indd 77 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you use styles correctly, Word also understands the structure of your document, so that it can automatically create a table of contents and help you to ﬁ nd a particular story in your newsletter.

Using the styles isn’t the same as formatting the text’s appearance. When you use a style, you tell Word what the function of a piece of text is, and Word can then change its appearance accordingly, now and in the future. When you format text, you only change what that piece of text looks like now.

This is all easier than it sounds, so the best way to get the hang of it is to try it out.

Styling your headlines

Giving your headlines a style is a similar process to changing the font or appearance of a piece of text, so if you’ve completed the earlier projects in this book, you should ﬁ nd this easy.

First, select your headline using the mouse or keyboard (see Chapter 1 for a refresher on how to do that if you need it).

Now, click the Home tab on the ribbon (if necessary). On the right half of the ribbon, there is a list of Quick Styles, shown on Figure 3.2. The width of this varies depending on how big your monitor is, but in my screenshot you can see it contains four styles: Normal, No Spacing, Heading 1 and Heading 2. The name of the style is shown underneath an alphabet extract, which shows you what that particular style looks like. On the right of the Quick Styles list, there is an arrow you can click to open up all the styles.

When you move your mouse over the styles, your selected text will be changed to that style. It’s only temporary, to show you what the style will look like if you choose to apply it. Don’t panic: it won’t actually change your text until you’re ready to do that.

08_711965-ch03.indd 7808_711965-ch03.indd 78 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Quick styles Change Styles

Open paste menu Highlighter Open all styles Find

Figure 3.2

Open all the styles, and roll your mouse over the different styles to preview what they will look like on your text. If something goes wrong, you can always Undo it (CTRL+Z).

As you can see, the styles can be radically different to each other. They can use any combination of fonts, colours and sizes, and can even include italics, underlining or bold. Imagine how many clicks it would take to change your text to some of these formats without using a style!

08_711965-ch03.indd 7908_711965-ch03.indd 79 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

To apply a style to your selected text, you just highlight the text, then click on the style.

By all means have a play with the different styles and experiment with applying them to your text. But then we need to knuckle down to the serious business of picking the right style for your headlines.

As you learned a moment ago, styles are about teaching Word what job a particular piece of text does – that it’s a headline, for example, or a subheading. So even if you like the look of the Intense Emphasis style, you can’t just use it as the style for your headlines. You have to use the style that tells Word your text is a headline, and that style is called Heading 1. Do that now, giving both of your stories a headline, selecting them and clicking on Heading 1. Don’t worry if it doesn’t look the way you want for the moment – I’ll be showing you how to change that later.

You’ll notice that there are a number of different styles for headings (Heading 1, Heading 2 and so on). These don’t just look different: they’re used to help Word understand how your document is structured. It works like this: • Heading 1: used for the main headline. On a story about a seaside outing, for example, this might be: ‘Join us in sunny Clacton this July’! • Heading 2: used for subheadings in a story that already has a Heading 1 headline. So, in the beach trip story, you might have subheadings like ‘How to book’ and ‘What to bring’. • Heading 3: used very rarely, for subheadings in sections that already have a Heading 2 title. So under ‘How to book’, you might have something like ‘Where to send your form’ as a Heading 3. • Heading 4: yes, there is a Heading 4. But it’s really not worth talking about. Unless you’re writing a manual for a nuclear power station, you won’t need it.

In practice, for something like an A4 newsletter, you will probably only ever want to use Heading 1 and the occasional Heading 2. If you do use more headings, there are a couple of guidelines to beware of: • Usually, if you use one subheading in a story, you should use at least two subheadings of the same type in that story.

08_711965-ch03.indd 8008_711965-ch03.indd 80 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word • You’re not allowed to skip straight from Heading 1 to Heading 3 just because it looks nicer: remember, this is all about explaining the document’s structure and meaning, and not about what it looks like. So for any particular story, Heading 1 should always be followed by Heading 2, followed by Heading 3.

You can use the keyboard shortcut of CTRL+Alt+1 to apply Heading 1 to selected text, CTRL+Alt+2 for Heading 2 and so on.

If you plan to use Word for writing lengthy essays, this will become even more important. I’ll explain why in the next section.

Finding your way around your newsletter

By now, you should have your newsletter title and two stories, both of which should have a headline styled with Heading 1. It doesn’t matter what it looks like at this stage: it’s bound to be a bit messy, and there are probably large gaps above your headlines. We’ll look at how you can change the appearance shortly.

First, let’s take a look at how using headings correctly helps you to navigate the document. Click the View tab on the ribbon and tick the box beside Navigation Pane (in Word 2010, shown in Figure 3.3) or Document Map (in Word 2007). You’ll ﬁ nd the navigation pane in the Show part of the ribbon, second section from the left. When you tick the box, a sidebar opens, which lists all your headings. This looks a bit different in Word 2010 and Word 2007, but works in broadly the same way. Figure 3.3 shows the sidebar in Word 2010.

If you click one of the headings in the sidebar, you jump straight to that point in the document. For long documents, this can save you a lot of scrolling and hunting around when you need to make edits somewhere else in the newsletter.

If you ﬁ nd a blank space in your navigation pane, you have ‘styled’ a blank line. Click on it and remove the styling or delete the line.

08_711965-ch03.indd 8108_711965-ch03.indd 81 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Jump to top

Search box Move through search results

Tabs Show navigation pane

Figure 3.3

In Offi ce 2010, there are a few extra things you can do using the navigation sidebar: • Click the ‘jump to top’ button (indicated in Figure 3.3) to leap to the start of the document. • In the navigation sidebar, click your fi rst heading, hold the mouse button down, and move the mouse pointer down to underneath the second heading. When you release the mouse button, your fi rst heading will move to after your second heading. Word also moves the heading in the document. Not only

08_711965-ch03.indd 8208_711965-ch03.indd 82 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

that, but Word is smart enough to move the whole story that belongs with it. As you create more complex documents, this provides a rapid way to swap sections around. Provided that you’re using the heading styles properly, that is! • The second tab in the navigation pane shows you small pictures of your document’s pages, known as thumbnails. You can use these to quickly jump to pages. It’s easy to see at a glance where there’s still space for a story, or which page you put the picture of a dancing gorilla on. In Ofﬁ ce 2007, go to the View part of the ribbon and tick Thumbnails to access this feature. • You can search the document for a particular word or phrase by typing it into the search box at the top of the navigation pane. Word will highlight the text wherever it occurs in your document (as it has done for the word ‘networking’ in Figure 3.3). The third tab in the navigation pane shows extracts from your document that incorporate the searched words, and you can click an extract to jump to that part of the document. You can use the arrows indicated in Figure 3.3 to move through the search results until you ﬁ nd the right one. You can also come straight to this part of the navigation pane by clicking the Find button on the Home part of the ribbon, or pressing CTRL+F.

In Word 2007, you search for keywords in a different way. Click the Find button on the Home part of the ribbon (shown in Figure 3.2) or press CTRL+F and a Win- dow will open (shown in Figure 3.4). You can then enter your words, and press Find Next. Word will take you to the next place those words occur. Just click on your newsletter text to start editing it again. You can close the Find box by clicking the X in its top right corner, or clicking on the box and pressing the Escape key (the key marked Esc at the top-left of your keyboard, indicated in Figure 0.1 in the Introduction).

Figure 3.4

08_711965-ch03.indd 8308_711965-ch03.indd 83 9/13/10 3:14 PM9/13/10 3:14 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

You can close both the Word 2010 navigation pane and the Word 2007 document map by clicking the X in the top right corner of them. It doesn’t hurt to keep them on screen, but it can make your work area feel a bit narrow.

Try searching for text in your document. If you can remember a distinctive phrase near where you want to edit, it’s a great way to move the cursor there quickly.

There is also an option that allows you to ﬁ nd a word and replace it with another word. This might come in handy if a new chairman is elected, for example, and you need to change their name throughout the whole document. Click Replace on the right of the Home ribbon, and enter the word you want to ﬁ nd and the word you want to replace it with. Click Find Next, check the change makes sense and click Replace to make the change. There is also an option to Replace All, which allows you to replace every instance of a word without looking at them one at a time. Take care with this. One of my friends was writing a book and wanted to change the slang ‘cos’ to ‘because’. After she had ‘replaced all’, she discovered the actors in the story were wearing ‘becausetumes’!

Using themes to change the colours

Now this is where the magic starts! Click the Page Layout tab on the ribbon. On the left of the ribbon, you will then see a section titled Themes. When you click this, a menu opens with a selection of themes, including the pink Opulent, the brick-coloured Civic and the aquatic Flow (see Figure 3.5).

As you move your mouse over these themes, you’ll see a preview of them applied to your document, similar to when you were browsing styles earlier. When you ﬁ nd a theme you want to use, just click on it.

You can radically change the look of your newsletter, simply by changing its theme. That’s because a theme is a collection of styles for all your text and headings so, when you pick a theme, it immediately changes all the styles throughout the whole newsletter. At the same time, it preserves consistency so you don’t have a mess of conﬂ icting styles.

08_711965-ch03.indd 8408_711965-ch03.indd 84 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Columns

Figure 3.5

These themes will only work properly if the text of the articles in your newsletter uses the Normal style. This is the default style, so unless you’ve delib- erately changed it, your text will automatically be styled as Normal.

It’s worth playing with the themes to see if you can fi nd one you like. The standard Microsoft Offi ce theme can look a bit, well, offi ce-y and businesslike, so it’s nice to pick something with a bit more charisma for your home projects.

You’re unlikely to fi nd a theme that perfectly fi ts your newsletter, but if you can fi nd one that comes close, you can save time customising your styles.

08_711965-ch03.indd 8508_711965-ch03.indd 85 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

When you click Change Styles on the Home part of the ribbon (shown in Figure 3.2), you can pick from some preset style sets, colours, fonts and paragraph spacings. This enables you to make some of the same changes as you see in the themes, without changing everything at once.

Customising your headline style

We’ve seen how we can quickly change the formatting of all our headings at once, by using themes. However, you can also change them to look exactly how you want them to look, rather than using one of Microsoft’s default styles. After all, this is not just another newsletter. It’s our newsletter, and it needs to look special.

This is not as hard as you might think. It takes just three steps, shown in Figure 3.6:

1. Select your headline (using the mouse or keyboard), and change the font, size and colour until it looks the way you want it. Keep your headline selected. (If you slip, you can just select it again, but you don’t need to change the formatting twice.) 2. Click on the Home tab if necessary. Then move your mouse pointer to the Styles part of the ribbon. Then right-click on Heading 1. 3. A menu opens. Click on the top option, Update Heading 1 to Match Selection.

And you’re done! This will update all the other text you’ve marked as Heading 1, too. If you go to the other headline in your document (remember, the quickest way might be to use the document map), you should see it’s been updated to match the headline you changed. That’s because you’ve told Word to change any text marked with the Heading 1 style so it matches your customised headline.

Now imagine that you’ve got a 10-page newsletter, with 20 stories in it and you want to change the colour of the headlines to orange for the autumn issue. As you’ve just learned, you can change the formatting of all those headlines by using

08_711965-ch03.indd 8608_711965-ch03.indd 86 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

just a few clicks, without even leaving the ﬁ rst page of your document. This gives you so much creative freedom. It separates the content from the design, so that you can change your mind about the design later, without introducing inconsistencies and without having to plough through all your text to reformat your headlines. All you need to do is make sure you apply the right styles to your content as you add it to the newsletter.

You can use styles for much more than headlines; for example, you can create standard styles for different types of article.

If you want to create your own new style, go to the Home ribbon, click the button to open the Styles menu (indicated in Figure 3.6) and then click the New Style button in the bottom left. This has an asterisk in the corner and no label, but if you hover your mouse over it, a tip will pop up to tell you it’s the right button. You can give your style a name and say which existing style you’d like to base it on.

Open Styles menu

Figure 3.6

08_711965-ch03.indd 8708_711965-ch03.indd 87 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Laying out your text in columns

Wide expanses of text are hard to read, which is why magazines and newspapers break the text up into columns. This is one of the simplest things you can do to make your newsletter look professional and make it easier for people to read.

To lay a story out in columns, simply:

1. Select the story. You can select all of its paragraphs at the same time, but don’t select the headline. 2. Click the Page Layout tab to reveal that part of the ribbon. 3. Click Columns in the Page Setup part of the ribbon (shown on Figure 3.5). 4. A menu will open with your column options. For your newsletter, choose two or three columns.

You can also choose a layout of two uneven columns, by selecting Left or Right. Microsoft has built so many features into Word that it even caters for people who want their newsletters to look lopsided, it seems.

In this menu there is also an option for More Columns, which provides access to the detailed column settings, as shown in Figure 3.7.

Figure 3.7

I wouldn’t recommend using more than three columns across an A4 page, but these column settings also enable you to change the size of the columns. I found 88

08_711965-ch03.indd 8808_711965-ch03.indd 88 9/13/10 3:14 PM9/13/10 3:14 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

the default settings left rather wide gaps between the columns, and it looked better when I took the spacing from 1.27 cm down to 1 cm. If you want the columns to be of uneven width or spacing, untick the box beside Equal column width. You can then provide your own sizes and spacing for each column. Another handy feature here is the ability to add lines between your columns. Tick the box beside ‘Line between’ to switch these on.

Formatting your paragraphs to have justiﬁ ed text will make your newsletter look more formal, but can also make raggedy columns look tidier. Use the Justify icon (shown in Figure 1.10) or CTRL+J.

Having a word dangling off the end of the last column, or a gap in the third column where it fi nishes short, is bit like wearing trousers that only come up to your shins: it looks wrong, and everybody notices. You can fi x problems like this by playing with the width and spacing of columns, but you’ll end up chasing your tail. You won’t want two stories on the same page to have different shaped columns, and you won’t fi nd a combination that works perfectly for both, either.

Professional designers ‘cheat’ by editing the text to make it ﬁ t. If you’re a line short, see if you can insert a paragraph break somewhere, or add a few words to the end of the story. If your text overruns slightly, see if you can delete a word or two higher up in the article. In time, you’ll learn how to spot the best places to make changes, such as a densely packed line that will tip over into the next line if you add a short word in the middle, or a line with plenty of space for the ﬁ rst word on the next line if you just take out a short word above it. If you’re good at those penny falls arcade machines, you’ll have a natural advantage here.

Arranging your images

In Chapter 2, you learned how to insert pictures and clip art into a poster. On a poster you’ve got plenty of space to ﬂ oat a picture in. When you’re designing a newsletter it’s a bit more complicated, because you need the picture to sit close to the text it belongs with, and you need the text to ﬂ ow around it cleanly. If you take a look at a newspaper or magazine, you’ll see how the pictures tend to sit inside the stories they relate to.

08_711965-ch03.indd 8908_711965-ch03.indd 89 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Flowing text around images

There are two ways that pictures can behave in Word. They can either be in line with the text, or they can be fl oating. In-line pictures keep their place in your story. So, for example, if you have a picture after the fi rst paragraph and you insert a new fi rst paragraph, the picture will move down the document together with the old fi rst paragraph. This is how Word usually treats pictures, and it’s ideal for projects where you’re using pictures to explain the text you’ve just written.

Floating pictures stay where you put them on the page. This means that, if you add in a new paragraph, the text will all shufﬂ e around but the picture will stay ﬁ rmly put. With a newsletter, you want the picture to go where it looks right on the page and to stay there as you edit the text around it, so this is what we need.

Insert a picture now, and it will appear wherever your text cursor is. When you click the picture, a new tab appears on the ribbon called Picture Tools Format, shown in Figure 3.8. Microsoft’s programmers were obviously a bit worried that you might miss it, so they coloured it shocking pink in Word 2010 to make sure that everyone in the same room, even those sat on the far side, can see it clearly. In Word 2007, it’s a more muted rose colour. It disappears when you click away from the image again. If you can’t see the Picture Tools Format tab, shield your eyes and then click the picture again.

On the ribbon, there is a Wrap Text button, shown in Figure 3.8. It’s called Text Wrap- ping in Word 2007. Click this to reveal a set of options that govern how your text and picture will cosy up to each other. Don’t be put off by the number of options – you’ll never need to use most of them. The default is In Line with Text. Choose the Square option, and your picture will ﬂ oat on the page. That means you can click on the picture and drag it across the page. When you release your mouse button, the picture will stay in that place. When you edit the articles nearby, the words will ﬂ ow around that picture (‘wrap’ around it, to use the jargon) but the picture won’t budge.

In Chapter 2, you learned how to resize pictures and you’ll need those skills again here. For best results, you should resize your picture so that it matches the width of a column. You could run a picture across two or three columns, but you’ll end up with a messy text layout if your picture width doesn’t cover an exact number of columns.

08_711965-ch03.indd 9008_711965-ch03.indd 90 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Artistic Effects Quick picture styles

Reset picture More styles Wrap Text Rotate

Figure 3.8

If you have a long column, you can put a picture in the middle of it. In this case, however, readers might get confused about where the story continues when they ﬁ nish the preceding column. Therefore, the best place to put a picture is at the top or bottom of a column. Try to line up the top edge of your picture with the top of the text, or the bottom edge of the picture with the bottom of the text.

To help you resize and line up images, there is a grid you can use, shown in Figure 3.8. This is purely an onscreen guide and it won’t print on your document. You switch it on by clicking in the box beside Gridlines, behind the View tab of the ribbon. When you’ve ﬁ nished with the grid, untick the box again.

08_711965-ch03.indd 9108_711965-ch03.indd 91 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

You can use the Position menu on the Picture Tools Format ribbon to place your picture in a corner of the page, or in the centre of one of the edges.

Putting text on top of an image

If you want your newsletter to have more of a magazine feel to it, you can put text on top of an image. This is easy to do technically, but it’s quite difﬁ cult to make it look good. The most important thing is for people to be able to read your story easily, and details in the picture can sometimes get tangled up with the letters in the reader’s mind. The best pictures to write over are those that have a large area that’s more or less the same colour, such as sky or grass. You need to format the text so that it can be read clearly on top of the picture, by making sure there is a strong contrast between the colours and perhaps making the font bold.

Don’t put text on top of a photo if your newsletter is going to be photocopied or printed at home, or if people will print it out to read it. Legibility might suffer, and nobody’s going to thank you if the church newsletter costs a for- tune in ink to print.

To put text on top of a picture, insert the picture, click on it and go to the Picture Tools Format tab of the ribbon. This time, under the Wrap Text menu (see Figure 3.8), choose Behind Text. Your picture will slip behind the nearest text, and you can move the picture, resize it and stretch it to where you want it.

It’s better to run your text over just a part of the image (such as the sky) than use lots of different fonts and colours to contrast with different areas on the underlying photo. Keep it simple.

08_711965-ch03.indd 9208_711965-ch03.indd 92 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

In Word 2010, there are a number of artistic effects you can apply to your images, and you can see these in Figure 3.9. The image in the top left corner is a photo I inserted of a pumpkin. All the other versions are copies of the same photo, which I transformed using the Artistic Effects button on the Picture Tools Format ribbon (visible in Figure 3.8). Some of these effects smooth out the detail in an image so that it works better as a background for text.

If your story ﬁ nishes half way up the image, you need to move the text cursor down so that your next story begins outside the picture. You can do that by adding blank lines (pressing Enter) until the cursor is in the right place. If your story ends near the bottom of the page, you can also insert a page break (on the Insert ribbon) to force the next story to start on a new page. You can also use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+Enter to force a page break. To see where the page breaks are in your newsletter, use the show symbols button you learned about in Chapter 2 (see Fig- ure 2.4).

Figure 3.9

08_711965-ch03.indd 9308_711965-ch03.indd 93 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Adding special effects to your pictures

The Picture Tools Format section of the ribbon has another trick up its sleeve: picture styles you can use to give a more professional ﬁ nish to your image. As you can see in Figure 3.8, there are some quick picture styles that you can apply just by clicking them. As with the Quick Styles you used for text, you can also click to open up a menu with many more. The styles showcase a range of different borders (some of which look like photo frames), reﬂ ections, glow effects, shadows and 3D effects. Beside the Quick Styles, there are menus for Picture Border and Picture Effects, which you can use to create your own customised look.

If you plan to use these effects, you should do it as soon as you add an image. They change the amount of space an image takes up, so they can affect how your text ﬂ ows and how your stories ﬁ t on the page.

Have you ever seen a fi lm where they used so many explosions, computer- generated collisions, helicopters, car chases and choreographed fi ghts that the fi lm became unwatchable? Layer upon layer of special effects can be distracting. There’s a lesson in this for your newsletter: by all means try out the picture styles and have fun with them, but use them with restraint. It’s better to pick one style and use it consistently than it is to try to fi t every available effect into your newsletter.

If you want to remove effects again, use the Reset picture button. You ﬁ nd it by going to the Picture Tools Format tab of the ribbon, and looking in the Adjust section on the left (the icon is indicated in Figure 3.8).

There is also a button you can use to rotate or ﬂ ip your image, shown in Figure 3.8. It’s good design practice to have people in pictures facing towards the middle of the page rather than looking out of the publication, so this feature can help you achieve that. Look out for any writing or clocks in the background of the picture that will give the game away!

Advanced layout options

Using everything you’ve learned in this chapter so far, you can create a slick looking newsletter. But there are a few additional techniques that can add an extra polish and help readers to understand where your stories begin and end.

08_711965-ch03.indd 9408_711965-ch03.indd 94 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Editing spacing around headlines and stories

Newspapers use spacing creatively to help readers ﬁ nd their way around stories. They often indent the ﬁ rst line of a paragraph and add extra blank space between different stories, for example.

The advanced paragraph formatting options give you control over features like this. Despite the name, the options don’t have to be applied to a paragraph – they can be applied to any chunk of text, including headlines. If you select a group of paragraphs, the same formatting will be applied to each one.

Select your text. It doesn’t matter if an embedded picture gets selected too. On the Home ribbon, ﬁ nd the Paragraph section. Then click the tiny icon to the right of its name, shown on Figure 3.10, to open the advanced paragraph options.

Border and shading options Advanced paragraph options

Figure 3.10 95

08_711965-ch03.indd 9508_711965-ch03.indd 95 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Your advanced paragraph options include: • Indentation Left or Right: governs how much the text is indented from the left or right margin. • Indentation Special: If you set the options to First Line and 0.5cm for your paragraphs, as shown in Figure 3.10, your story will have a slight indentation at the start of each paragraph, as you can see from my selected text in Figure 3.10. I recommend that you edit your headlines so that they don’t have any ﬁ rst line spacing, and hug the left margin tightly. • Spacing Before: This is used to add space above a paragraph or headline. By default, your Heading 1 headlines will have spacing of 24 pt above them. You can reduce this or increase it, according to taste. • Spacing After: This adds space after a paragraph or heading. • Line spacing: By default, paragraphs will have line spacing of 1.15. You can change this to single spacing to make the text look less spaced out, enabling you to ﬁ t more text on the page.

The secret to making these options work well is to apply them consistently across the newsletter. I’m sure you’re already racing ahead of me here, but you can make changes to your text and then Update the appropriate style to apply it to all similarly styled text.

Adding borders and shading

You can add borders and shading to help to deﬁ ne where one story ends and another begins, or to draw attention to headlines.

Select your text, and then click the arrow to open the Borders and Shading options (shown in Figure 3.10). There is a range of quick options available in this menu, but I recommend you select Borders and Shading at the bottom to open the advanced options, which look like Figure 3.11.

On the left, click one of the settings to choose the kind of border you want (the simple box setting can be perfectly adequate). In the next column, choose the style, colour and width of the line. Use the scroll bar to ﬁ nd all kinds of styles, including some that use multiple lines of different thicknesses. Complicated borders work best on large areas and, as with fonts and clip art, it’s easy to get drawn 96

08_711965-ch03.indd 9608_711965-ch03.indd 96 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

into using too much eye candy that ends up making readers feel a bit woozy. Keep it simple. The default line width is 0.5 pt , but a good size might be from 1 pt to 3 pt, depending on how heavy you want the border to be.

In the preview section, you can see what your border will look like. You can also turn the borders on each edge on or off by pressing the buttons around the preview. The button to turn the right border on is indicated in Figure 3.11. So, using these options, you can underline your headline in orange, put a box around it or even put a box around a whole story.

The Shading tab enables you to change the background colour of the text you’ve selected. This works differently to the tool for highlighting text in the Fonts section of the Home ribbon. That tool will add background colour to your sentences, leaving the spaces at the start and end of paragraphs white. By contrast, the Shading tab will add background colour to the whole area the text occupies, including the spaces at the end of paragraphs and between the text and the margin. This makes it look like your text is in a coloured box. Don’t forget that this will have an impact on your ink cartridge bill and might affect readability.

Remember, you can update your styles to apply the same borders and shading to all similar text.

Turn right border on

Figure 3.11

08_711965-ch03.indd 9708_711965-ch03.indd 97 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Borders don’t work well on stories that are formatted in columns. The formatting follows the ﬂ ow of the text, so you will have no bottom border on the ﬁ rst column and no top border on the second, for example.

There is also a quick trick you can use to add a horizontal line across the page. Just type in ﬁ ve hyphens and press Enter. Different line styles can be inserted by replacing the hyphens with ﬁ ve equals signs (=), asterisks (*), hash signs (#) or tildes (~).

Filling in the gaps with text boxes

If you’ve got a small space to ﬁ ll in your newsletter, it’s time to summon a text box to the rescue! A text box works a bit like a picture: you can move it wherever you want on the page, and can change its shape and size. You can put as much or as little text as you want inside it. Text boxes are the ideal way to place a mini-story on the page, such as a notice of the date of the next meeting.

It is possible to lay out your entire newsletter by putting each article in a different text box. It’s much harder work to do it this way than by using styles and columns, though. The styles in the text box don’t register in the document map either, and if you use Heading 1 inside a text box, it won’t show up in your navigation pane or Table of Contents (see later in this chapter). It will use the same Heading 1 style as the rest of the document, however.

The process for inserting a text box is similar to that for adding a picture:

1. Move the text cursor to roughly where you’d like the text box to appear. 2. On the Insert ribbon, click Text Box. 3. A menu will open showing a selection of different text box styles. It’s usually easiest to pick the Simple Text Box (shown in Figure 3.12). 4. The text box will appear centred on the screen. Type in your text on top of the dummy text inside the box, which contains some short instructions. 5. The resizing controls work the same way as they do for pictures.

08_711965-ch03.indd 9808_711965-ch03.indd 98 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

6. Click the edge of the text box, away from the resizing controls, and your mouse pointer will become a compass point. Hold down the mouse button and you can move the text box to where you want it. 7. A ribbon for Drawing Tools Format (in Word 2010) or Text Box Format (in Word 2007) is available when you’re using the text box. Click on this, and you can change the shape, colour and other formatting options for the text box. The shape styles include some nice 3D effects. 8. On this same ribbon, change the Wrap Text (in Word 2010) or Text Wrapping (in Word 2007) option to Square. This will make your main text ﬂ ow around the text box.

Change shape

Figure 3.12

Take care that a text box doesn’t split up sentences. Your readers will lose their place if a line starts on one side of the box and continues on the other. You can achieve a good effect by putting a text box in the middle of the page and running two columns down either side of it, however; just format your main text in two columns and place your text box in the middle.

Text boxes don’t have to be square. You can choose a wide range of shapes on the Drawing Tools Format or Text Box Format ribbon. In Ofﬁ ce 2010, the Change Shape button is on the left and looks like a dot-to-dot puzzle (as indicated in Fig- ure 3.12). In Ofﬁ ce 2007, the button looks like a circle, square and cylinder, and is located in the Text Box Styles part of the Text Box Tools Format ribbon.

08_711965-ch03.indd 9908_711965-ch03.indd 99 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Text boxes can seem to behave irrationally when you move articles around. Some- times, they’ll stubbornly sit there and won’t move when you want them to. Other times, you’ll be moving something unrelated, and they’ll dash off after it. The reason is that text boxes are anchored to a particular paragraph in the document. If that paragraph moves, so, too, will your text box.

To ﬁ nd out where your text box is anchored, click the show symbols button (see Figure 2.4), and click on your text box. You will see an anchor beside the paragraph that Word thinks the text box belongs with. You can click on this anchor and move it to the best paragraph for the text box to be anchored with. If you’ve used a text box to put some details in a box inside a story, for example, you might want to anchor the text box to the start of that story so it will move whenever the story does.

In-line images are also anchored to a particular paragraph, so if your images seem to jump all over the place, check where they are anchored, using the same technique as for text boxes.

If you want to remove a text box, click on its edge and then press the Del key on your keyboard. The text box and its content will both be deleted.

It’s safe to experiment with Word, so why not see what you can discover? As long as you’ve got a clean version of your newsletter saved, you’ve got nothing to lose.

Adding the rest of your stories

As you have probably noticed, making changes to the styles and spacing can have a dramatic effect on how well your stories ﬁ t the page. That’s why it’s a good idea to get the design right ﬁ rst, using just a couple of stories, before you add any more in.

Now that you’ve learned about all the layout options and established the styles you’ll use throughout, it’s safe to paste in the rest of your stories. Try to lay out the

100

08_711965-ch03.indd 10008_711965-ch03.indd 100 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

newsletter as you go. If something won’t ﬁ t, take it out and keep it for a later page, rather than letting it get in your way. Otherwise, the whole project becomes too confusing. Remember, you can keep your stories in a separate ﬁ le and use the highlighter to make it easy to see what you’ve already used.

Adding a table of contents

If you’ve used the heading styles correctly, Word can automatically create a table of contents for your newsletter.

Put your text cursor where you would like your table of contents to go, and click the Table of Contents button on the References ribbon. You can choose from three different styles. Click on the top one and a table of contents will be inserted into your document, including your article headlines and their respective page numbers. You can edit the text to draw attention to particular articles.

When you want to update the table of contents, click on it and then click Update table. Your options are shown in Figure 3.13.

Figure 3.13

You can choose to update the page numbers only. Use this if all you’ve done is move articles around. If you’ve added new articles, choose to update the entire table. This will reverse any changes you have made to article titles inside the table of contents, though, so it’s best to edit your table of contents once you’ve ﬁ nished adding content to the newsletter.

101

08_711965-ch03.indd 10108_711965-ch03.indd 101 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Make sure you plan enough room for the table of contents. It takes one line for each article, so it could easily consume half of your front page if you let it. I prefer to stick it on the ﬁ rst inside page.

More to explore

There’s such a lot you can do in Word, and there’s much more that you can explore for yourself. The Insert ribbon, for example, has many useful applications. You can use it to add hyperlinks, which are links to websites and are useful if you’re planning to share your newsletter by email.

You can use it to insert tables, too, which have countless functions – they can help you to lay out information like recipes, with ingredients in one column and quantities in another (as you will see in Chapter 8). For sleeker looking tables, it’s easier to copy and paste spreadsheets, as you will learn in Chapter 5.

If you want to add page numbers, the Insert ribbon is used to do this too, with a wide range of styles available.

Download my example newsletter

Laying out newsletters can be time consuming, so don’t forget you can download my newsletter and customise it to meet your own needs, using the skills you learned in Chapter 2.

Figure 3.14 shows my ﬁ nished newsletter layout, including text ﬂ owing around a circular text box, an article on top of a picture and an automatically generated table of contents.

Use it to experiment with layouts, and see what fonts and effects I’ve used. You can also paste your own stories over mine, edit the headlines and use the design for your own publications. All the ﬁ les I’ve created while writing this book are available at www.sean.co.uk.

Once you’ve created the ﬁ rst issue of your newsletter, issue two will be easy because you have already prepared the design and styles. Simply open issue one and replace the text, making any necessary layout changes along the way.

102

08_711965-ch03.indd 10208_711965-ch03.indd 102 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Figure 3.14

What else can you do?

As you probably discovered in Chapter 2, there are some templates for newsletters available in Word. If they work for you, feel free to use them. But the skills you’ve acquired in this chapter will enable you to do a lot of other projects, too, such as: • Create letterheaded paper: instead of getting a printshop to print reams of headed paper, you can incorporate your logo and address details at the top of your letter in Word, so that they print at the same time as the content of your letter. You don’t have to pay for expensive stationery, and don’t have boxes of letterheaded paper to trip over. • Design a picture book: now you know how to put words on top of pictures, you could create a book of your photos or drawings that you’ve scanned in. 103

08_711965-ch03.indd 10308_711965-ch03.indd 103 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser • Put your friends on the front page! Why not mock up a newspaper to celebrate a special occasion, such as a wedding or birthday? You could hand out copies to party guests, or just frame the front cover for the happy couple or birthday boy/girl. • Create a news round-up for your alumni association, church group, U3A group, allotment or any other community. It’s a great way to share news that brings people together, even when they can’t meet face to face. • Create an illustrated travel diary, capturing your memories in words and photos. • If you’re studying, you can take the hard work out of writing essays. By using headings correctly, you can easily swap sections around and create a table of contents. • Write tutorials. We’re all expert at something, so why not capture your experience in a ‘how-to’ guide? You could distribute it face-to-face in community groups or on the Internet. (For tips on ﬁ nding like-minds on the Internet, see my other book in this series, Social Networking for the Older and Wiser.)

Summary Plan your newsletter at the start, so you don’t waste time redoing • things later. Use headlines, a strong ﬁ rst paragraph and a call to action to make • it easy for readers to understand the story. Don’t go overboard on colour if the newsletter is going to be • printed. You can experiment with the design, using automatically generated • dummy copy. • Make sure the paper size is correct before you begin the layout. • Insert just two stories initially, so you can get the design right.

104

08_711965-ch03.indd 10408_711965-ch03.indd 104 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Publishing a newsletter with Word

Styles enable you to save time changing the formatting and help to • enforce consistency in the design. If you change the way a particular style looks, Word will reformat • any text that uses that style throughout the document. The navigation pane and document map will help you to fi nd your • way around your newsletter. You can search for key words – but take care not to use fi nd and • replace too broadly. • Themes are prepackaged design combinations. • Text in columns can be easier to read. • You can fl ow text around your images or put text on top of them. Make sure your text remains legible when it’s on top of a picture. • The artistic effects can help by smoothing out detail in the image. Use the special picture effects to add glow, refl ection or shadows to • your picture sparingly. Use styles to change the spacing around headlines and stories • consistently. Use text boxes for short stories. Headlines in text boxes do not • appear in your document map or table of contents. Word can automatically generate your table of contents, if you’ve • used heading styles in your document.

105

08_711965-ch03.indd 10508_711965-ch03.indd 105 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM Brain Training

Let’s recap with a quick quiz. There might be more than one correct answer to these questions.

1. Before starting work on designing 4. You can use themes to: your newsletter, you should: (a) Apply a predefi ned set of text styles (a) Gather all your stories and pictures and colours to your newsletter (b) Set the page size correctly (b) Change where your pictures appear on the page (c) Add a giant text watermark (c) Contain small chunks of text (d) Yell: ‘Hold the front page’! (d) Play a short burst of appropriate music when you open your 2. The best time to change the spacing newsletter in a story is: (a) Any time 5. When you click the Wrap Text or Text (b) Just after you’ve added it Wrapping button: (c) At the end of laying everything out (a) Word will print your newsletter in red (d) Never and gold stripes, so you can use it for giftwrapping (b) Word provides options for how your Styles are great because: 3. text fl ows around an image or text box (a) They help generate a table of contents (c) Word compresses the spacing so (b) They help you navigate your more text fi ts on a page document (d) Word reads your newsletter out over (c) They can help you swap stories a hip-hop beat, saying ‘yo’! after each around paragraph (d) They help you change fonts quickly and consistently

Answers

Q1 – a and b Q2 – b Q3 – a, b, c, and d Q4 – a Q5 – b

106

08_711965-ch03.indd 10608_711965-ch03.indd 106 9/13/10 2:50 PM9/13/10 2:50 PM PART II Using Microsoft Excel

I’m sorry, I thought you said we were doing the bedsheets...

09_711965-pp02.indd 10709_711965-pp02.indd 107 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM 09_711965-pp02.indd 10809_711965-pp02.indd 108 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your 4 address book with Excel

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Microsoft Excel 2010 or Microsoft Excel 2007 (see Introduction).

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball), and some experience with Word (see Chapter 1).

If you have a tattered old address book full of crossings out and amendments as people have moved, or if your friends’ details are (dis)organised on scraps of paper and old letters, then this project could change your life. In this chapter, you’ll learn how to manage your address book using Excel, another program in the Microsoft Ofﬁ ce suite. You’ll be able to update the details easily when somebody moves, as well as ﬁ nd addresses and phone numbers more quickly. That will make it easier to keep in touch with friends and family.

In this project, you’ll learn how to sort your address book, how to ﬁ nd information in it easily and how to change the way it looks. If you prefer to keep your contacts on paper, you’ll learn how to print it out so you can refer to it easily or tuck it into your diary.

Along the way, you’ll learn the basics of creating and navigating spreadsheets, which will prepare you for the more advanced Excel projects in later chapters.

Many of the features of Excel are similar to Word, so I won’t bore you by repeating them here. I’ll assume that you know how to start the program and what the

10_711965-ch04.indd 10910_711965-ch04.indd 109 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

ribbon is. Both of these topics are covered for Word in Chapter 1, and Excel works on exactly the same principles. So if you haven’t run through the project in Chap- ter 1 yet, why not write a letter now? By the end of the project in this chapter you’ll have all your addresses under control so will easily be able to ﬁ nd out where to send it!

What is a spreadsheet?

When you open Excel, it should look familiar to you. Across the top, you’ll see the ribbon, with some controls you know from Word and some new ones. The most striking difference between Word and Excel is that Excel’s main document area is divided into a grid, like graph paper (see Figure 4.1).

Cursor Scrollbars Magnify

Figure 4.1

110

10_711965-ch04.indd 11010_711965-ch04.indd 110 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

Don’t worry if you don’t understand the controls or the screen layout yet. It looks a lot more complicated than it is, and the projects in this book will take you from entering your ﬁ rst data to doing some of the great stuff Excel is capable of.

The grid dominating the screen is a spreadsheet and the boxes on the spreadsheet are called cells. As you might remember from the Introduction, spreadsheets are ideal for organising information. They’re often used for maths projects, but in this chapter we’ll focus on how you can organise text and how you can format it.

The ﬁ rst spreadsheet program is usually considered to be VisiCalc. It was created in 1979 by Dan Bricklin and Bob Frankston, and helped to make the Apple II computer a success.

Much of what we’re doing in this project would also be possible in Word, so you might wonder what’s so special about a spreadsheet. The main difference is that there’s some intelligence to the way that Excel can manipulate your information. For example, Excel can look in one cell to work out what should be in another cell, so you could get it to convert your shopping bill from euros to pounds automatically. Excel can quickly ﬁ lter your information, too, so it could show you all the address entries with the same surname, for example. As you work with the program, you’ll learn lots of ways Excel can help you by processing and organising your information.

The other major difference is that Word is mostly about creating documents to be printed out. Excel is about organising information on screen, and this means that the size of the printed page does not limit what you can do. At my screen resolution, the maximum size possible for a spreadsheet extends to a width of about 376 m and a length of about 8388 m. Obviously, nobody ever creates spreadsheets that big (or if they do, they never live to tell the tale). You probably won’t even need to scroll through the screen most of the time. But it’s a good illustration of the difference between Word and Excel: Excel documents are at their most useful when still in Excel, even though you can print them out.

Another way to think of it is that you’d use Word when your main goal is to lay out information so it looks nice, and use Excel when the priority is to lay out

111

10_711965-ch04.indd 11110_711965-ch04.indd 111 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

information logically. That said, these goals are not mutually exclusive, and I hope all your documents are both logical and good-looking!

Navigating the spreadsheet

The best way to get to grips with the idea of the spreadsheet is to try it out, so let’s begin our ﬁ rst project.

Before you start to create your address book properly, I recommend that you familiarise yourself with the basic controls for moving around a spreadsheet.

When you move your mouse pointer over the spreadsheet, it will turn into a plus sign. If you click on a cell, you’ll see a heavy black box appear around it. This is your cursor (see Figure 4.1), designed so that you can easily see which cell you’re working on, and what it currently contains. Click on any cell and type ‘hello’ or something else. Whatever you type will stay in the cell when you move your cursor away. If you click on the same cell again and type something, you’ll overwrite the old text.

You can also use your keyboard to move the cursor around. The most important keys are:

Table 4.1 Keyboard shortcuts for Excel Keys How the cursor moves Cursor keys (up, down, left, One cell in the direction of the right) cursor key Page Up One screenful up Page Down One screenful down Alt+Page Up One screenful left Alt+Page Down One screenful right CTRL+Home To the top left corner CTRL+End To the end of your spreadsheet (where the last row and column used meet) You can use the scroll wheel on your mouse to scroll up and down your spreadsheet, or click and drag the scrollbars shown in Figure 4.1 to move around it. 112

10_711965-ch04.indd 11210_711965-ch04.indd 112 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

Have fun with this. It doesn’t matter what you type or where you type it. The main thing is to get used to moving around the screen.

Most of the time, you can just use the cursor keys or mouse, but when you’re working on large spreadsheets, some of those other keys can come in handy.

Excel doesn’t mind which cells you use, or which order you use them in. It’s not like a Word document, where one paragraph is expected to follow another. It’s more like laying out notes on your desk, where you can put things in places that make sense to you. Leave cells empty in the middle if you like. There are plenty of them to spare!

So far, it looks like all you can do is put words all over the screen, so let’s start our project properly. To clear a cell again, you put your cursor on it and then press the Delete key on the keyboard. Tidy up the screen, and we can begin.

If you’ve gone wild and have really made a mess, you can start a new spreadsheet. Click the File tab (Offi ce 2010) or the Offi ce button (Offi ce 2007) and select New, then Blank Workbook.

Saving your spreadsheet

In Excel, you save your fi les exactly the same way as you do in Word: frequently! Use the backstage area (in Offi ce 2010) or the Offi ce button (in Offi ce 2007) to save your fi le, and you can then use the keyboard shortcut (CTRL+S) or the disk icon at the top left of the screen to update your fi le (both versions of Microsoft Offi ce).

I won’t remind you to save again in this project, so whenever you’ve done something that you don’t want to lose, make sure you remember to save!

113

10_711965-ch04.indd 11310_711965-ch04.indd 113 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Organising your information into rows and columns

As you might have worked out, we’re going to create an address book by putting different pieces of information into the cells. It’s going to look a bit like a table, with headers to explain what each line of the table means. We’ll have a header for last name and another one for city, for example.

Figures 4.2 and 4.3 show two different ways of arranging the same data, one horizontally and one vertically. There are only two pieces of information in these ﬁ g- ures, the surname and town, but we could extend it to include lots more, such as ﬁ rst name, street address, postcode and phone number.

Figure 4.2

Figure 4.3

In Figure 4.2, to fi nd out the town where a person lives, you fi nd their name then read across the screen horizontally; in Figure 4.3, you fi nd the name then read down the screen vertically.

Does it really make any difference which way around we create our spreadsheet? Well, yes, there is a right way and a wrong way, and Figure 4.3 is the wrong way.

Spreadsheets are made up of rows that go across the screen and columns that go up and down. The rows are numbered (starting at 1 at the top) and the columns are lettered (starting at A on the left).

Excel expects the information in a column to be of a similar type. So if there’s a surname in one cell, it expects there to be a surname in the cell underneath it. If there’s a town in one cell, Excel expects everything else in that column to be a town too.

114

10_711965-ch04.indd 11410_711965-ch04.indd 114 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

Excel also expects all the information in a row to be about the same thing. So if there’s a name and a town in the same row, Excel expects them to belong to the same person.

Some of Excel’s basic functions only work properly if you organise your information the right way around. We might want it to sort the data according to the person’s name, for example, but if we had input the data as in Figure 4.3, Excel would think Bloggs and London are both surnames, because they’re both in the same column. So the two golden rules for creating spreadsheets are: • Everything in the same row should refer to the same person or thing (for example, all information about Fred Bloggs). • Everything in the same column should be the same sort of thing (for example, they should all be surnames).

There are some slight deviations from this rule: the area you use for your data doesn’t have to cover the whole spreadsheet, so you might put labels or other information in other cells outside of it (you’ll see some examples of this in our projects). But when you’re creating something that looks like a table, you must obey those two rules or you will be condemned to banging your head against the desk when Excel won’t behave.

Don’t worry if it seems a bit complex – it’ll make more sense as you work on the projects. For now, it’s enough to understand that there’s a right way around to create a spreadsheet.

How much information to put into each cell?

Now we know which way round our spreadsheet needs to go, we need to think about how much information to put into each cell.

The cells look small, but that’s deceptive. You can resize them to be as big as you like, and you can ﬁ t paragraphs upon paragraphs of text into each cell, if you want to. So when you’re deciding how much should go into each cell, how much is too much and how much is too little?

The obvious answer might be to have someone’s whole name in one column and their full address in the next column. That misses a great opportunity, though; by

115

10_711965-ch04.indd 11510_711965-ch04.indd 115 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

breaking up the information into smaller parts, you can make it more useful. If you separate the ﬁ rst name and the surname into two separate columns, for example, you can look in the surname column to see everyone in the same family. In Chap- ter 6, you’ll learn how you can use your address book to create personalised invitations, and having the ﬁ rst name in a different column means you can address your invitations with a friendly ‘Dear Fred’ type of greeting. If you separate the city from the rest of the address in your spreadsheet, you can look in the city column to see who lives in Birmingham next time you’re visiting there.

The key to a successful spreadsheet is to divide your information into the smallest chunks that are still useful. For your address book, that might mean having separate columns for: • First name • Last name • Street (including house number) • City • Postcode • Country • Phone number

Feel free to add your own columns to this project. I’ve left out middle names, titles, mobile phone numbers, house names, villages, counties and email addresses, to keep it simple.

If you’re wondering why I haven’t given the house number a column of its own, it’s because this is rarely useful by itself. If you were managing a membership list for a local organisation it might be worth separating the number from the street, so that you can easily ﬁ nd all members on the same road. But for a personal address book, that would create more work than beneﬁ t.

116

10_711965-ch04.indd 11610_711965-ch04.indd 116 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

Putting the headers into your address book

This is slightly confusing, but Excel uses two terms that sound similar. Headings are the labels for rows and columns that appear in grey outside your spreadsheet (shown in Figure 4.4). Headers are what you type into your spreadsheet to describe the contents in the same column or row.

Start by entering the column headers for your address book along the top row of your spreadsheet. In the ﬁ rst cell, type in ‘First Name’. When you type in a cell, you’ll see a text cursor, similar to the one you saw in Word, which is used to show your place in the cell. As you type, the text cursor will move along inside the cell (see Figure 4.4).

If you make a mistake, you can’t use the cursor keys to go back when you’re entering text in the same way as you can when using Word, but I’ll show you how to edit the contents of a cell later. For now, if you make a mistake, just tap the Esc key on the keyboard and your text will be discarded. Then you can type it in again.

When you’ve ﬁ nished typing the ﬁ rst header, press the Tab key or right cursor key on the keyboard (shown on Figure 0.1 in the Introduction). Your text cursor will move to the next column, so that you can enter the next header. Type ‘Last Name’ in the next cell along, then keep adding the column titles until you have entered all seven of them.

Column headings

Row headings

Figure 4.4

117

10_711965-ch04.indd 11710_711965-ch04.indd 117 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

You can save time by downloading my sample ﬁ le and deleting the data in it.

Formatting your headers

It’s a good idea to make your column titles stand out from your information. On the Home ribbon, the Font section should look familiar. It’s made up of controls you’ve already seen in Word projects, including controls to change the font and size, and to change the text style to bold or italic.

To make your ﬁ rst header bold, for example, put the cursor on that cell and then click the Bold icon on the ribbon. To make all seven headers bold is going to take 14 mouse clicks, then, and if you want to colour them too, that’s going to be 21 clicks. That obviously won’t do! There’s got to be a quicker way!

Selecting cells

As ever, the bofﬁ ns at Microsoft have made it easy for you. You just need to select all the cells at once, and you can then format them in one go.

There are a few different ways to select a range of cells: • Click on the fi rst cell and hold the mouse button down while you move the mouse. • Click the grey row or column heading to select an entire row or column (see Figure 4.4). You could click the 1 to select the whole row in this case. You can also hold down the mouse button and move over multiple column or row headings to select multiple columns or rows. • Put the cursor on the fi rst cell. Hold down the Shift key and use the cursor keys to stretch the cursor to cover the range you want. • Put the cursor on the fi rst cell. Hold down the Shift key and click the last cell, and Excel will select the range that joins them.

It’s worth trying these different methods of selecting cells to see which you ﬁ nd easiest, but you can get by just using the ﬁ rst two. Your range of cells can all be in one row or column, or it can be in a box shape that covers more than one row or column.

118

10_711965-ch04.indd 11810_711965-ch04.indd 118 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

As in Word, you can use CTRL+A to select everything. You can also click the Select All button shown in Figure 4.5.

When you select cells, your cursor will stretch to cover the range of cells. The cell you started at will stay white, but the rest will have a blue tint, as shown in Figure 4.5.

Select All button Alignment options

Figure 4.5

Select the cells containing your column headers. Click the Fill colour tool (see Figure 4.6) to turn the cells yellow and then click the Bold button to make the text bold (also shown in Figure 4.6). That should make your headers stand out nicely once you’ve entered your data. You can use the formatting and colour controls to change the appearance of any of the cells anywhere on your spreadsheet, and can use the alignment options on the Home ribbon to change how content is aligned inside a cell too (see Figure 4.5). These controls are similar to those you have used in Word and could be used to centre your header over its column, for example.

Bold text Fill colour

Figure 4.6

119

10_711965-ch04.indd 11910_711965-ch04.indd 119 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you want to select cells that aren’t next to each other, hold down the CTRL key on the keyboard and click on the different cells you’d like to select.

Entering your friends into your address book

Now that you’ve created your headers, it’s time to start ﬁ lling in your spreadsheet. This would be the perfect time to gather up all those scraps of paper, letters and business cards that might contain your friends’ addresses at the moment. It really doesn’t matter what order you enter people in, because you can let Excel do the hard work of sorting alphabetically later on.

Position your cursor underneath the First Name header and type in the ﬁ rst name of your ﬁ rst friend.

As you did with the headers, when you’ve ﬁ nished typing the ﬁ rst name, press the Tab key or right cursor key on the keyboard (shown in Figure 0.1).

Don’t press the Enter key. That will move you down a row in the same column – handy if you’re entering a list of numbers, but no use here.

Your cursor will move to the next column, so that you can enter the person’s last name. Work your way across the spreadsheet, ﬁ lling in the cells for street, city, postcode, and country. It doesn’t matter if your text won’t ﬁ t into the column. Your street will probably be too long for the width of the cell, for example. In that case, your text will look like it’s spilling over into the next cell, but it’s not really. When you go to the next cell and start typing the city into it, it will now look as if the name of the street has been chopped short. Fear not, however; it’s all still there and the city is just overlapping it. Excel will keep everything you type into a cell, it’s just that sometimes you might not be able to see it. A bit later, I’ll show you how you can make the columns wide enough to see everything.

When you come to the phone number column, you need to do things slightly differently. As you’ll learn in Chapter 5, Excel is good at maths so you don’t have to

120

10_711965-ch04.indd 12010_711965-ch04.indd 120 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

be. But it’s such a swot that it’ll start treating numbers mathematically before you’ve even asked it to. Type 02081112222 into a phone number cell and notice what happens. Excel will shunt it to the right of the cell and cut off the zero at the start. That’s because, if this was a number with a real numeric value, the zero would be meaningless. In a maths class, 0100 is the same number as 100. When you pick up the phone, though, that zero is the difference between a number that works and one that doesn’t.

At school, you might remember being told to line up numbers from the right in your maths book so that all the units, tens, hundreds and thousands were in a straight line. That’s why Excel has moved your number to the right of the cell, too. It doesn’t need to do it for the purposes of calculation, but it does it to make it easier for you to understand any sums it does for you.

Clearly, this isn’t helpful here. We need to tell Excel to leave our number alone. To do that, we type an apostrophe before the number. If you type ‘02081112222 into a cell, Excel will treat it as text and keep it exactly as you enter it. You should use this technique to enter any numbers that aren’t actual maths numbers that can be used for calculation. For example, these might include serial numbers if you are storing information for insurance purposes, or holiday booking reference numbers.

You can use spaces in your phone numbers to make them easier to read, and if you do that Excel will automatically understand that you’re not entering a real maths number. Excel won’t try to do any fancy stuff when you enter the house number and street name into the street cell, either.

Once you’ve entered all the information for the ﬁ rst person, position the cursor on the next row down, so that you can start to enter the next one. Excel will let you enter information anywhere, so it’s up to you to make sure that the right information goes into the correct cell. If you ﬁ nd that you’re entering something in the wrong place, just tap the Esc key on the keyboard and your text will be discarded.

To avoid any confusion, I recommend that you don’t leave any blank lines in this spreadsheet, although it’s okay to have blank cells if you don’t know somebody’s phone number, for example. When you come to enter the cities and countries, you might ﬁ nd you can save some time. If Excel spots that you might be typing something you’ve already typed in the same column, it will complete the word for you. To accept Excel’s suggestion, just press Enter. If Excel’s wrong (which does happen!), carry on typing what you want into the cell.

121

10_711965-ch04.indd 12110_711965-ch04.indd 121 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you ﬁ nd it hard to see what you’re doing, you can magnify the screen using the slider in the bottom right (shown in Figure 4.1), the same way as in Word.

Changing the width of a column

When you start Excel, all the cells are the same size, and they’re fairly narrow. Some of your columns, such as the street column, need much more space than others, such as the postcode. Excel gives you control over how wide the columns are on screen, so you can have a wide column for the street and a narrow one for the postcode, for example.

Changing the width of a column doesn’t affect what’s stored in a cell; it just affects how much of it you can see at once on screen.

Let’s start by changing the width of the address column. Between the column headings there are thin lines, which are the column dividers. You can move these around to change the size of the columns. Click the line between the headings for columns C and D, and hold down the mouse button. Your mouse pointer will turn into a vertical line with two horizontal arrows on it, shown in Figure 4.7. If you move the mouse to the right, the column divider will move with it as a dotted line.

When you release the mouse button, the column divider stays where you left it. The column to its left (column C in this example) stretches or shrinks to meet the column divider. The next column along (D, in our case) stays the same size but is moved left or right so that it stays snug against where column C ends.

As you can probably tell, I’ve made up a lot of ﬁ ctional people for my address book, rather than publishing my real one in this book. Any similarity in the screenshots to characters living or dead is purely coincidental!

You can change the size of rows, too, by changing the row dividers. You’ll need to do that much less often, though.

122

10_711965-ch04.indd 12210_711965-ch04.indd 122 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

Formula bar Wrap text Format button

Column heading

Mouse pointer when adjusting column widths

Figure 4.7

If you’ve already entered data into a column, Excel can work out exactly how wide that column needs to be so that you can see everything clearly. If you double-click on a column divider, it will snap to the width of the data. So, if you double-click the divider between the headings for columns C and D, column C will become just wide enough for the longest address you’ve entered.

If you struggle to hold the mouse button down, you can also adjust the column widths by typing in values for them. On the Home tab of the ribbon, click Format (shown in Figure 4.7), and a menu opens. The options include changing the width of a column or height of a row. You’ll be asked to enter a number here, so you might need to experiment a bit. The column width is usually 3.43, and about 12 is right for an address. All the cells in a column are always the same width (otherwise it stops being a column and starts getting knobbly), so Excel will change the width of all the cells in the same column as your cursor.

Try changing the width of the columns. It makes life much easier!

123

10_711965-ch04.indd 12310_711965-ch04.indd 123 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

There is another way you can see more of what’s in a cell, and that’s to wrap the text in it. That means Excel will stretch the cell vertically and let the text run over multiple lines within that cell, so that you can see everything. To switch that on, just select a cell (or group of cells) and then click the Wrap Text button, shown in Figure 4.7. (You do exactly the same to turn it off again.) You can see an example in Figure 4.8, which is an extract from my address book where I’ve made the addresses wrap. Because the rows have different onscreen heights it can make the spreadsheet look untidy, so I prefer to adjust the column widths to show everything.

Figure 4.8

You can also select some cells (such as by clicking on a column heading), click the Format button, and choose Autoﬁ t Column Width from the menu.

As I said earlier, it’s a good idea to break your content down into the smallest useful chunks, but sometimes you might want to put a lot of text into a cell. You might be cataloguing your music collection in Excel, for example, and want to include detailed notes for each album, which can’t be divided up sensibly. If you’re putting a lot of text into a cell, you can add a ‘soft return’ to move to a new line within that cell by pressing Alt+Enter. (Don’t get it confused with the Shift+Enter you use in Word to start a new line without starting a new paragraph.)

Editing information in cells

If you press the wrong key when you’re typing into a cell, you can press the Back- space key straight away to change it. But the most devious mistakes are only spotted later. If you press the cursor key to go back when you’re entering text into a

124

10_711965-ch04.indd 12410_711965-ch04.indd 124 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

cell it’ll take you to a different cell entirely. Sometimes you won’t spot a mistake until you’re working on a different cell. That means you need to know how to edit what’s already in a cell.

There’s another reason it’s important to know how to edit cells: friends do have the unfortunate habit of moving house and changing phone numbers, which means you need to know how to update your records. (Unless you didn’t like them that much and aren’t fussed about keeping in touch, I guess. In which case, see how to delete people, later in this chapter.)

If you want to edit a cell, you can do one of two things: • Double-click the cell with your mouse pointer. • Put your cursor on the cell (using the mouse or cursor keys) and then press F2 on the keyboard.

When you do that, you enter a special editing mode that makes it easy to change what’s in a cell. When you’re entering text, if you press a cursor key, you’ll move to a different cell. In the editing mode, you can use the left and right cursor keys to move within the cell’s content, so you can go back a few characters to delete a word or add one, for example. You can use CTRL+up to jump to the start of a cell’s content, and CTRL+down to jump to the end.

There are a couple of other ways you can change the content of a cell: • Click on it and then start typing something else. When you press Enter or move to another cell, your new text will overwrite the cell’s old contents. If you start typing something accidentally and want to keep what’s in the cell, press the Esc key to cancel the overwriting. • When you click on a cell, its contents are also shown in the formula bar, which is underneath the ribbon and indicated in Figure 4.7. The formula bar stretches across most of the width of the screen, so when you’re dealing with content that’s too long for the cell width, it’s much easier to see what you’re doing here than it is in the middle of the spreadsheet. Click on the formula bar, and you can edit its contents, moving through its contents and adding or removing text. This is just another way to view what’s in the cell; any changes you make here are made in the cell at the same time. If you decide to abandon a change, just tap the Esc key.

125

10_711965-ch04.indd 12510_711965-ch04.indd 125 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

If you can’t see everything in a cell, you can also click the bottom of the formula bar, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer down. The formula bar will expand to multiple lines.

Copying cell contents to save time

You might want to input details for a cluster of people who all belong to the same family, live in the same town and probably share the same surname. Having done a few projects already, I’m sure your expectations have been raised and you sus- pect you won’t have to type the same words repeatedly. You’re quite right: as with Word, you can use copy and paste. The copy and paste controls look the same as they do in Word. You’ll ﬁ nd them in the Clipboard section of the Home ribbon, shown on Figure 4.9. The same keyboard shortcuts apply too.

The easiest thing to do is copy the entire contents of a cell. Move your cursor to a cell (click on it, for example), and then click the Copy button on the ribbon (or use CTRL+C). Move your cursor to where you’d like to paste the cell contents, and then click the Paste button, or use CTRL+V. You’ll see the cell contents have been copied.

This technique is ideal if you have two people with an exact match for one item, such as the city or country. You can also use it to save time if two people have mostly the same information in a cell – perhaps they live in the same street but at different numbers. In that case, after pasting, you would edit the cell’s contents to change the house number.

Often, you’ll have people who share a lot of details and will want to copy lots of cells at the same time. Imagine you have two brothers who live at the same address but have different phone numbers. (I can remember when phone numbers belonged to a house, but now everybody has their own mobile phone, it seems.) Nearly all the information (surname, street, city, postcode, country) would be the same. Only the ﬁ rst name and phone number would be different. What’s the most efﬁ cient way to use what you’ve already typed?

In my address book, I’ve already entered the details for Justin Case in row 5, and now want to use that to make it easier to enter the information for his brother, Ed Case. If you want to do something similar, follow these steps:

126

10_711965-ch04.indd 12610_711965-ch04.indd 126 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

1. I could put Ed’s details at the end of the spreadsheet but I ﬁ nd it easier to keep them together so I want to insert a blank row for him, right underneath his brother. Click the heading for row 6. The whole row will be selected. 2. Click the Insert button. This is in the Cells part of the Home ribbon, shown on Figure 4.9. A new blank row will be added in row 6, and all the rows underneath it will be moved down. You can see this in Figure 4.9. 3. Click the row heading for row 5, where Justin Case’s details are. This row will now be selected, as shown in Figure 4.9. 4. Copy the row by clicking the Copy button on the ribbon or using CTRL+C. 5. Move the cursor to the start of row 6, using the mouse or cursor keys. 6. Paste using the Paste button on the ribbon or the keyboard shortcut CTRL+V. 7. There will now be two identical rows, one under the other. To change the ﬁ rst name to Ed, position the cursor on that cell and just start typing. Whatever is typed will replace what’s already in the cell. The same applies to the phone number. 8. The cells you are copying from will remain selected with a dotted box, so you could paste them multiple times if you wanted to. Press Escape to cancel that.

Take care where you position the cursor before pasting. If you put it in the second column, for example, or on top of another entry, Excel will paste anyway, but your pasted row will start in the wrong place.

If something goes wrong, you can easily ﬁ x it. There are Undo controls in Excel that work the same as those in Word. You can use the Undo button at the top left (shown in Figure 4.9) or the keyboard shortcut CTRL+Z.

If you want to move a row instead of copying it, you can cut it (using the scissors icon, or CTRL+X) instead of copying it and otherwise follow the steps above. This will leave a blank line behind, but I’ll show you how to delete that next.

127

10_711965-ch04.indd 12710_711965-ch04.indd 127 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Paste

Undo

Cut

Copy Insert

Figure 4.9

You can insert a column by clicking the column heading and then clicking Insert on the Home ribbon. The column will be inserted to the left of the column you selected.

128

10_711965-ch04.indd 12810_711965-ch04.indd 128 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

Deleting cell contents, rows and columns

Usually, you can experiment a bit with Microsoft Ofﬁ ce, and ﬁ nd what you need. The important buttons are well labelled, and do pretty much what you might expect. But not the delete button. At least, not if you just expect it to clear a cell for you.

If you click a cell, and then click the Delete button on the Home ribbon, it will remove that cell entirely. As a result, all the cells underneath it will move up a line.

What does that mean? Well, it means that everyone moves house. If you delete a cell in the address column, all the addresses underneath will scroll up, and your address book will be useless because it will have the wrong addresses against the names. If you don’t spot errors like this immediately, they can take a long time to ﬁ x.

To clear the contents of a cell, or a group of cells, select it and then press the Delete or Backspace key on the keyboard. The contents of the cell will be emp- tied, but all the cells will stay where they are.

To avoid confusion, I recommend you only use the Delete button on the ribbon if you want to remove an entire row or an entire column. To do that, ﬁ rst select the row or column (click on its heading) and then click the Delete button on the ribbon. That whole row or column will vanish, and the next row will move up or the next column will move left to close the gap. Because there’s a risk your data could be corrupted, as I explained earlier, make sure you check that it’s worked okay immediately, and undo it if it has gone awry.

Showing the headers all the time

As you enter more and more people, you’ll ﬁ nd that the ﬁ rst row, which contains the column headers, will scroll off the top of the screen. This can make it hard to work out which column is which. If you’ve got a column for home phone and mobile phone, for example, there’s a risk you’ll get them mixed up if you can’t see the column header.

129

10_711965-ch04.indd 12910_711965-ch04.indd 129 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

You can set it up so that the ﬁ rst row never scrolls off the screen, so that you can always see your headers. This is called freezing the pane. To do this, follow these steps:

1. Click the View tab on the ribbon. 2. Click Freeze Panes on the ribbon in the Window section. A new menu will open, as shown in Figure 4.10. 3. Click Freeze Top Row.

Figure 4.10

Now, when you scroll the spreadsheet, the top row will always stay in place, so you can always understand what you’re looking at. To switch that off again, follow steps 1 and 2 above, and then choose Unfreeze Panes.

Finding people in your address book

The point of typing all this data in, of course, is not to exercise our fi ngers but to make it easier to fi nd people’s details. There are a few different techniques you can use to organise your friends. And if you’ve ever spent 20 minutes trying to decide with your friends what fi lm to watch or where to go for lunch, I’m sure you’ll agree it’s much easier in Excel.

130

10_711965-ch04.indd 13010_711965-ch04.indd 130 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

Searching for people

If there’s someone speciﬁ c you want to know about, you can use Find, the same as you did in Word. It takes two clicks of the mouse to do this (on the Home ribbon, click Find & Select in the Editing section shown in Figure 4.11, and then click Find). Many people ﬁ nd it quicker to use CTRL+F.

A new window opens, where you can enter the word you would like to search for and then click Find Next to jump to it in the spreadsheet. You can search for parts of names or addresses too. You don’t have to type in the full cell contents to get it to work.

Sorting your address book

You have probably entered your list of people as they’ve come to you, in random order. Sorting your address book by surname makes it much more intuitive to navigate and means you can ﬁ nd people at a glance. This will be important when you come to print it out. Sorting also brings families together, which is nice.

To sort your address book: 1. Click Sort & Filter on the Home tab of the ribbon, shown in Figure 4.11. 2. From the menu that opens, choose Custom Sort. Excel will select your data automatically. 3. The sort window shown in Figure 4.11 appears. Check that the tickbox at the top right is ticked to say that your data has headers. Otherwise, the headers will be sorted and mixed with your data as if they were names and addresses. 4. Beside where it says ‘Sort by’, click the pulldown menu. This will show your headers. Choose ‘Last name’. 5. Click the Add Level button at the top. A new row will appear that enables you to choose how people who have the same last name will be sorted. Choose ‘First name’, as I have in Figure 4.11. 6. You can ignore the menus for Sort On and Order. (If you wanted a reverse alphabetical listing, you would change the Order pulldown menu so it reads ‘Z to A’.) 7. Click OK.

131

10_711965-ch04.indd 13110_711965-ch04.indd 131 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Find & Select

Sort & Filter

Figure 4.11

Your data will now be sorted alphabetically by surname and then by ﬁ rst name, so Ed Case will appear before Justin Case, for example.

As is often the case with Microsoft Ofﬁ ce, there’s more than one way to sort a cat. You can select a particular area (such as a range of rows) and just sort those rows.

When sorting, it’s very important to make sure you select all the related data. If you just select the ﬁ rst name and last name columns, you’ll shufﬂ e the names without moving the associated addresses, which will effectively scramble your data.

132

10_711965-ch04.indd 13210_711965-ch04.indd 132 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

If you just want to sort by one column (such as Last name), place your cursor on any cell in that column. Click on Sort & Filter on the ribbon, and then choose Sort A to Z in the menu that opens (or Sort Z to A for a reverse alphabetical listing). The whole spreadsheet will be sorted, with the entries placed in alphabetical order according to that column, and all the addresses and phone numbers kept with the right names.

You can also sort by town (which might be useful if you’re managing a membership list for a local organisation), by country, or by any other column.

Using ﬁ lters to identify groups quickly

Sometimes you want to fi nd people who have certain things in common. You might want to fi nd everyone who lives in Birmingham or Ireland, because you’re planning a trip there. Or you might want to fi nd everyone who has the surname ‘Case’ so you can invite them all to a family get-together.

Filters are a simple but powerful tool that enable you to do this easily. To switch them on, click the Sort & Filter button on the Home ribbon, and click Filter on the menu that opens. You’ll notice that a button now appears in the right-hand corner of each of your headers (see Figure 4.12).

Let’s look at what happens when you use the ﬁ lter for the city column. Click the button to the right of the City header, and a menu will open (see Figure 4.12). This provides you with a quick way to sort your address book by city – but the real power is further down the menu. You’ll see a list of all the cities your friends live in. If you untick the box beside Select All, all the tickboxes are cleared. Tick the box beside the city you are interested in (for example, Birmingham) and then click OK.

Your address book will now be ﬁ ltered so it only shows people who live in that city (see Figure 4.13). If you look at the row headings, you can see that they don’t run consecutively. In my case, Excel only shows rows 3, 27 and 28.

Don’t panic – nothing’s been deleted. All your data is still there, it’s just that your view has been ﬁ ltered so you can only see some of it.

133

10_711965-ch04.indd 13310_711965-ch04.indd 133 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Figure 4.12

The Filter button at the top of the City column shows a funnel (shown in Figure 4.13), so you can see that the spreadsheet is being fi ltered by that column. To turn the fi lter off again, click to open that menu and then click the tickbox for Select All. You can also click the Sort & Filter button on the ribbon and click Filter on the menu again to switch all the fi lters off.

You can use ﬁ lters on different columns at the same time: for example, you could ﬁ lter by both last name and country if you wanted to see all the people from the same family in Australia.

When you save your fi le, any fi lters that are on will be saved with it. That can be confusing when you open it again and see that some of the data’s missing, so it’s a good idea to remove any fi lters before you save the document.

134

10_711965-ch04.indd 13410_711965-ch04.indd 134 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

Funnel

Figure 4.13

Printing your address book

Having your address book on the computer is a great way to manage it, but there’s nothing as portable as a piece of paper. It doesn’t take fi ve minutes to boot up before you can read it, either. One of the advantages of having your address book on the computer is that you can print it in different ways and make multiple copies. You could print a copy for everyone in your household, and print a new version whenever there are signifi cant updates (no crossing out required!). And you can do things like fi lter the city to Birmingham and print that, so you’ve just got the numbers you need when you visit the city.

Printing in Excel is a bit more complicated than it is in Word because Excel documents tend to be quite wide and are often created to be read on screen.

Setting up your printing options

Click the Page Layout tab to open the ribbon shown in Figure 4.14. Although the printing options in the backstage area (Offi ce 2010) and behind the Offi ce button (Offi ce 2007) are different, the Page Layout tab is the same in both versions of Excel.

135

10_711965-ch04.indd 13510_711965-ch04.indd 135 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Figure 4.14

There are a lot of different controls on this ribbon, but most of them you can safely ignore. There are a few that can be important, though: • Orientation: this controls which way up the paper is. For your address book, you will most likely want to change it to landscape (wider than it is tall). • Print Area: if you only want to print part of a spreadsheet, you can use this option. First select the area you would like to print on your spreadsheet, and then click the Print Area button. From the menu that opens, click Set Print Area. The area you’ve defi ned will be marked on the spreadsheet with a dashed line and when you print, only that part will come out. When you’ve fi nished, come back to the Print Area button, click it and choose Clear Print Area from the menu. • Print Titles: if your print-out is going to cover multiple printed pages, you can repeat the headers at the top of every page. Click Print Titles and a menu opens. There is a box for you to specify the rows that should be repeated at the top of each page. In this box, enter 1:1. This means print rows 1 to 1 at the top of every page. (If you had two rows of headers, you would use 1:2.) For this spreadsheet, I also recommend that you repeat columns A:B as well, so that the contact names print on every sheet. That way, if your phone numbers or other information come out on a separate sheet of paper, you can easily match them up with the names. Excel will put a $ sign before each row or column reference here if you go back to edit it, but you don’t need to bother with that. • Width: you can ask Excel to scale your address book so it fi ts on one page wide, reducing the text size to make it fi t. To do this, change the Width pulldown menu from Automatic to 1 page. • Gridlines: the gridlines you see on screen aren’t printed unless you tick the box beside Print underneath Gridlines. If you print these, it can make it much easier to read across from the name to the phone number without slipping into a different row by mistake.

136

10_711965-ch04.indd 13610_711965-ch04.indd 136 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

To preview your printed page, in Offi ce 2010, you click the File tab and then click Print. You can also access all the above options from here. In Offi ce 2007, click the Offi ce button, fi nd the Print part of the menu and then click Print Preview.

Tricks to help your address book print on one page

As you play with the print options, you’ll see dotted lines appear on your spreadsheet to show you where the printed page ends. If you’re struggling to ﬁ t everything onto one page widthways, there are two things you can try.

Firstly, you can try narrowing the columns. Don’t forget that double clicking on the column dividers will snap the columns to the minimum necessary. You could narrow them even further and use Word Wrap to make sure you can still see everything.

You can also hide speciﬁ c rows or columns. If you only wanted to have the names and phone numbers printed, for example, you would:

1. Select the Street, City, Postcode and Country columns by clicking the Street heading, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse right to select the other columns. 2. Click the Home tab on the ribbon. 3. Click Format in the Cells part of the ribbon (see Figure 4.15). 4. Click Hide & Unhide on the menu that opens (see Figure 4.15). 5. Click Hide Columns.

As if by magic, the columns disappear. As with fi ltering, nothing has been deleted – it’s just hidden from view. This can be really confusing when you come back to the spreadsheet later and fi nd great chunks have vanished, so I recommend you unhide columns when you’ve fi nished. You can tell when a column is hidden because its letter will be missing in the headings. You can see this in Figure 4.16, where the column headings run A, B, G, H, which indicates that columns C, D, E, and F are hidden from view.

137

10_711965-ch04.indd 13710_711965-ch04.indd 137 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Hide Columns Hide & Unhide

Unhide Columns Format

Figure 4.15

Figure 4.16 138

10_711965-ch04.indd 13810_711965-ch04.indd 138 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

To bring back the missing columns, select the two columns either side of those that have been removed. In this case, I’ve clicked on the heading for column B and moved the mouse into column G to select them both. Then retrace the steps used to hide the column until the ﬁ nal step, when you should select Unhide Col- umns (you can see this in the menu in Figure 4.15).

What else can you do?

This Excel project has taught you the basics of creating spreadsheets. There’s a lot more you can do with the skills learned in this chapter. Here are just some ideas: • Plan your garden planting. You could have a column for the plant name, one for plant type, another for when you should plant seeds indoors, and a fourth for when you should move them to the garden. You could then fi lter to see what you should be doing in any given month, or for information on specifi c plant types (vegetables or fl owers, for instance). • Store the details of your record collection. • Store details of hotels you’ve stayed at, so you can easily rebook and refresh your memory about whether it’s worth staying there again. • Create to-do lists, with different categories of task. You could add a column for where you do those tasks, then use a fi lter to see all the things you need to do in that location at the same time. There’s a simple template for this on my website. • Store membership records for any local community organisations you are involved with. • Create checklists to help you manage complex projects like redesigning the kitchen or building an extension. You could mark a job as complete by colouring the cell beside it green, and mark it as abandoned by colouring it red. • Create a grid to keep track of the meals you’ve cooked at dinner parties for particular friends, so you don’t serve the same thing to the same people. • Plan your Christmas shopping or your wish list.

139

10_711965-ch04.indd 13910_711965-ch04.indd 139 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Summary Spreadsheets are made up of cells, arranged in rows and columns • to make a grid. The cursor is a black box around the cell and can be moved with • the mouse or keyboard. • You can ﬁ ll in the cells in any order. Everything on the same row should be about the same person or • thing (eg information about Karen). Everything in the same column should be of the same type (eg • phone numbers). Information should be broken down into the smallest useful pieces, • with each one going into its own cell. The formatting tools are similar to Word and can be used to make • your headers stand out. When you’re typing in data, press Tab to move to the next cell • along. If you’re entering a number that isn’t a real maths or counting num- • ber, such as a booking reference or phone number, put an apostrophe before it. You can adjust the width of the columns using the mouse, by enter- • ing width values or by using the Autoﬁ t function. You can use word wrap to show a cell’s contents on multiple lines • within that cell. • To edit a cell, double-click it or move the cursor to it and press F2. You can copy and paste individual cells or groups of cells to avoid • typing the same things repeatedly. Take care when deleting and sorting: if you delete or sort only part • of someone’s details, you could mix up your information.

140

10_711965-ch04.indd 14010_711965-ch04.indd 140 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Managing your address book with Excel

To fi nd people, you can search by name, sort the address book or • use fi lters to identify people with names, cities or countries in common. When you use fi lters or hide columns, the cell contents are • unchanged and nothing is deleted. The only change is what you can see. Switch off fi lters and unhide columns when you’ve fi nished with • them to avoid confusion later. • Use the Page Layout ribbon to confi gure your printing. To fi t more on the page, set the width to one page wide, narrow the • columns, and hide any columns you don’t need.

141

10_711965-ch04.indd 14110_711965-ch04.indd 141 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Brain Training

How did you get on with your ﬁ rst Excel project? Let’s ﬁ nd out with a short quiz. There might be multiple right answers.

1. Imagine you’re making a spreadsheet (c) Whether they’ve paid their subs or not to plan your garden planting. One (d) Email address cell says ‘tomatoes’ in it. On the same row, you might see: 4. After typing something into a cell, (a) The month to plant tomatoes outside you can move to the next one in the (b) The price of tomatoes same row by pressing: (c) The word ‘onions’ (a) Enter (d) The header ‘vegetables’ (b) Tab (c) Cursor right 2. In that same spreadsheet, in the (d) Cursor down same column as ‘tomatoes’ you might see: 5. If you want to clear the contents of a (a) The month to plant tomatoes outside cell, click it and then: (b) ‘Runner beans’ (a) Press the Delete key on the keyboard (c) ‘Onions’ (b) Press the Delete button on the home (d) The price of tomatoes ribbon (c) Press Esc 3. A spreadsheet for your local garden- (d) Press the Backspace key ing club might have one column that contains: (a) Full name (b) Postcode

Answers

Q1 – a and b. And not just because tomatoes are technically fruit!

Q2 – b and c Q3 – b, c, and d Q4 – b and c Q5 – a or d

142

10_711965-ch04.indd 14210_711965-ch04.indd 142 9/13/10 2:51 PM9/13/10 2:51 PM Creating a basic 5 holiday budget in Excel

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Microsoft Excel 2010 or Microsoft Excel 2007 (see Introduction).

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball). Basic familiarity with navigating Excel documents, selecting and copying cells, and entering text into cells (see Chapter 4).

In the previous project, you learned how you can use Excel to organise information. In this chapter, we’ll unlock the real power of Excel: its ability to do calculations on numbers in the cells. If that’s sent you cowering behind the sofa, you can come out – the beauty of doing your maths with Excel is that you don’t have to get involved with any of the adding up, multiplication, subtraction or division. Excel takes care of it all.

You might be thinking that you’ve managed ﬁ ne until now with a pen, paper and a beaten-up old calculator, so why bother changing? But if you use Excel right, you can do all sorts of things that are impractical or difﬁ cult on paper because Excel makes it easy to answer ‘What if’? questions. What if the value of sterling crashes before we go abroad? What if we add another couple of nights to our trip? Can we afford to do that once we’ve factored in the price of extra petrol for the hire car and a few more lunches? What if we move to a different hotel for a few nights? How will that affect our total costings? On paper, you would have to run all your sums again from the start, or at least pick apart the details to insert the new costs. On the computer, you can just type in the new information and Excel will recalculate everything instantly. That enables you to make better informed decisions, and to plan more accurately.

11_711965-ch05.indd 14311_711965-ch05.indd 143 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Every holiday is different, and I’ve kept the spreadsheet simple here. You might have multiple modes of transport, different sites to visit and a lot more costs to factor in. I haven’t got into the nitty gritty of budgeting for sun cream and ice creams, either; if I tried to add in everything, the project would become confusing (and both of those items are so important for a successful holiday that I doubt you’d forget them). Nevertheless, you can use my holiday plan (download it at www.sean.co.uk) as a template for your own, and embellish it to make sure it’s comprehensive.

Starting your holiday spreadsheet

Come into the lab. There’s a lot of experimentation involved when you’re using Excel. It’s extremely rare that you’ll start out with a vision in your mind of what the whole spreadsheet will look like. As you enter each piece of information, you’ll probably think of another piece that needs to go in somewhere else. It doesn’t matter. If you tried to plan every spreadsheet in your head ﬁ rst, or even on paper, you’d go mad. You’d probably be too confused to start. The whole point of Excel is that you can make it up as you go along, and build new parts of the spreadsheet as you need them. In Chapter 4, you saw how easy it is to add a row or a column into Excel and how you can cut and paste cell content from one part of the spreadsheet to another. So if you need to move something around to accommodate something else, it doesn’t matter. That’s the right way to use Excel.

We’re going to France for our holiday. Most of the time we’ll be based in a hotel in town but we’re also planning to spend one night in a treehouse on a camp site. We did it once before and it was fabulous. Here’s the information I have to hand for my holiday: • How much the taxi is going to cost us to and from the airport in France (estimated). • How much it costs to stay in the Hotel Pierre in the centre of town each night. • How much our treehouse retreat will cost for a night. • The cost of car hire per day. All these ﬁ gures are in euros. I’m also going to budget 30 euros per driving day for petrol, and 30 euros per ticket for the two of us to go to a concert.

I’m not sure how long we can afford to go for, though. Hm. I wonder if Excel can help me to work that out?

144

11_711965-ch05.indd 14411_711965-ch05.indd 144 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

Entering the basic information into the spreadsheet

As you saw in Chapter 4, spreadsheets are most helpful when information is broken down into the smallest useful chunks. We could tot up the total hotel bill, for example, and type that into a cell. But then if we want to change the length of our stay, we’ll have to recalculate it and type it in again. If we just put in the basic ﬁ gures, we can let Excel do the updating when and if necessary.

In column A, we’re going to put our expense items. In column B, we’re going to put the price in euros. Because these are real mathematics numbers (as opposed to serial numbers or phone numbers), you just type them into the cells without using an apostrophe. Excel right-aligns them in the cell, which is how you know you’ve entered them correctly as numerals. If they’re left-aligned, it means Excel thinks they are text. In column C, we’re going to enter information on how that price is measured, so in the case of the hotel it’s per day and in the case of the taxi it’s per fl ight. As far as possible, these descriptions should be standardised, so that you can analyse them later using fi lters if you want to. You could fi lter for ‘per day’ to see your daily costs at a glance, for example, but the costs won’t be complete if you’ve entered the hotel pricing as ‘per night’, as the ‘per day’ fi lter won’t pick it up.

I’ve adjusted the width of column A by double-clicking on the divider between the headings for columns A and B. The resulting spreadsheet looks like Figure 5.1.

Don’t put any currency symbols or words in the price column for now. Just type in the numbers.

Changing the format of your information

So far, all the formatting we’ve done on cells has been purely cosmetic, just adding a lick of colour or changing the font on what we’ve typed in. But Excel also enables you to format cells to help you to understand their meaning. For example, you can tell Excel that the number in a cell represents money, so that it will be shown with a currency symbol.

145

11_711965-ch05.indd 14511_711965-ch05.indd 145 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Select the cells that contain your prices and click Format on the Home ribbon (indicated in Figure 5.1). From the menu that opens, click Format Cells to open the Format Cells window you can see in Figure 5.1.

The categories on the left of the Format Cells window show you all the types of format you can use. There are 12 different formats, but you will probably only ever need ﬁ ve of them: • General. This is the default and shows exactly what you typed in. • Number. You can specify how many decimal places should be shown and whether a comma is used in numbers larger than 999 (eg 1,000). • Currency. You can choose a currency symbol, and specify the number of decimal places to use. • Date. This enables you to standardise how dates are displayed, with choices including ‘14 March 2001’ and ‘14/3/01’. You can type a date into a cell in any of these formats and Excel will recognise it as a date and convert it to your chosen format. • Percentage. If you want to enter 5% into a spreadsheet, for example, type in 0.05 and then format it as a percentage. On screen, you’ll see 5%, but the cell’s value will still be 0.05, which means you can just multiply it with another cell to work out 5% of that other cell. Don’t worry if that’s confusing for now. You’ll have a gentle introduction to maths with Excel shortly. • Text. This is the same as putting an apostrophe as the ﬁ rst character – it tells Excel to treat numbers like words.

Click Currency. Where it says Symbol, click the pulldown menu and scroll through all the different fl avours of pounds, dollars and yen to reach the euros. If you use the mouse, the money can fl y past your eyes too fast (a bit like watching your direct debits on payday using internet banking). It’s easier to click the Symbol pulldown, use the up and down cursor keys to fi nd the right one, and press the Enter key when you’ve found it. As well as a euro option for each member country, there are two different generic euro formats so you can choose to put the symbol after or before your number. When you click OK, your cells will be formatted with the currency symbol.

146

11_711965-ch05.indd 14611_711965-ch05.indd 146 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

Format

Format painter Number format Clear

Figure 5.1

You can use the format painter (see Figure 5.1) to copy the cell formatting from one cell to another. As well as copying colours and fonts, it copies the currency, date, percentage or other content formats.

To clear the formatting on a cell, select a cell (or group of cells), click the Clear button on the Home ribbon (indicated in Figure 5.1) and then click Clear Formats on the menu that opens.

147

11_711965-ch05.indd 14711_711965-ch05.indd 147 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

In Microsoft Ofﬁ ce, there are usually several different ways to achieve the same ends and formatting is no exception. Excel can work out some formats if you use indicative symbols when you type in your numbers, but it’s not consistent and complete. It can cope with you typing in dates, 5% or £5, but it can’t understand $5 if your computer has its region set to be UK, and can’t understand £5 if your region is US. Alternatively, you can select a cell or group of cells and use the Number format pulldown menu on the Home ribbon to change their formats. This only provides the most common formats, though, and doesn’t offer us the euro currency.

You can type in a euro symbol by holding down the Alt Gr key (on the right of the space bar) and pressing 4. Excel will recognise the euro symbol and convert your cell to a currency format.

Calculating the quantities

Now that I’ve gathered together all the prices and entered them into Excel, I can start thinking about how much I need to spend on each item. Some of the quantities will be fi xed, however long my trip lasts. I’ll only be taking one fl ight there and one fl ight home again, so I’ll only need two taxi trips from and to the airport in France. We’re only going to one concert, so we’ll just need a ticket each for that, and we’re only spending one night in the treehouse.

But the cost of the main hotel will change, depending on how long our stay is. And we plan to hire a car for half our trip, so the cost of that will vary too.

To start with, let’s work out the holiday cost based on a trip of 10 days. If you typed in quantities for the Hotel Pierre, car hire and petrol budget, you’d need to go back and change them all again if you decided to calculate a shorter trip. Instead, what you need to do is enter the length of the holiday into a cell, and then get Excel to work out the quantities for each of these expenses, based on the length of the holiday.

As you know, Excel will let you put information anywhere on a spreadsheet. You might want to change values like the length of the trip, which govern so many

148

11_711965-ch05.indd 14811_711965-ch05.indd 148 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

other ﬁ gures. I like to put key ﬁ gures like these at the top, so they can be seen easily and don’t get mixed up with the rest of the information.

Select row 1 by clicking on its heading, and then click the Insert button on the Home ribbon twice. This will insert two blank lines at the top of the spreadsheet: one for our trip length value, and the other to add some space and improve readability.

In cell A1 write ‘Trip length’, and in cell A2, enter the number 10. Add a header to column D for ‘Quantity’, and enter any known ﬁ xed values into that column (2 taxi trips, 1 treehouse night, 2 concert tickets). Your spreadsheet should now look like Figure 5.2.

Figure 5.2

Entering your ﬁ rst formula

So far, we have typed in all the information in our spreadsheets. Now we’re going to try something a little different. We’re going to type a formula into a cell so that Excel can calculate what should be there for us. Formulae can get quite advanced, but this project will give you a gentle introduction.

Before we look at how formulae are entered, we should spend a moment thinking about grid references. As you know, columns have letters to identify them and numbers have rows to identify them. By using a combination of a column letter and row number, it’s possible to uniquely identify every cell. The cell in the top

149

11_711965-ch05.indd 14911_711965-ch05.indd 149 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

left corner, for example, is cell A1. The next one to the right is B1, and the one underneath A1 is A2. This is similar to the way we use grid references on maps, so I’m sure it feels familiar, but feel free to refer to Figure 5.2 if it helps to make it clearer.

If you don’t know the reference for a cell, put the cursor on it. The headings of the row and column for that cell are coloured orange, so you can see at a glance which column and row it is in. In Figure 5.2, you can see this effect for cell B1.

The ﬁ rst calculation we want Excel to perform is the length of the stay at Hotel Pierre. This will be the length of the holiday minus the one night spent in the treehouse. We’ve already entered the length of the holiday into cell B1, so we just need to give Excel a formula so it can work out the value of cell D5, which stores the length of our hotel booking.

Click on cell D5 as you normally would if you were going to enter a number into it. To tell Excel you’re entering a formula, you use the equals sign as the ﬁ rst character. To tell it to take the value from another cell, you enter that cell’s reference. Enter the following into cell D5:

=B1

It doesn’t matter whether you use upper or lower case. When you type the B, a menu will pop up on screen, but you can just ignore this. Type the 1 and the menu will go away again, and Excel will put a blue outline around cell B1 so that you can check you’ve entered the right reference. You can see this in Figure 5.3.

Figure 5.3

150

11_711965-ch05.indd 15011_711965-ch05.indd 150 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

Press Enter, the Tab key or one of the cursor keys and your formula will be entered into the cell and the cursor will move to a different cell. Cell D5 will now show the number 10, which is equal to the content of cell B1. The formula bar will show you the formula you’ve entered into the cell to calculate that.

This isn’t the same as copying a cell with a number in it. If you copy a cell, its contents are moved to another cell once only. If you use a formula in a cell, its contents will be updated whenever related cells change.

Put the cursor on cell D5 and then click the formula bar. Because we’ll be spending one night in the treehouse, the ﬁ gure we actually want for our hotel stay is one less than the length of our total trip. To achieve that, we modify our formula so it reads:

=B1 - 1

The spaces are optional, but including them can make it easier to read your formula. To translate the formula into something resembling English, we want cell D5 to be equal to the contents of cell B1, minus one. When you enter that formula, the ﬁ gure in the cell for the booking at Hotel Pierre will change to 9.

It’s hard to justify letting off too many ﬁ reworks in celebration of that effect. But try typing different numbers for the trip length into cell B1, and you’ll see that cell D5 is immediately updated too. Imagine that you’ve got a spreadsheet that has 20 different values from spending money to beach hut rental, all of which depend on the length of stay. You can update all of them simply by typing in a single number, and see the effects ripple throughout the whole spreadsheet. This is what makes Excel so powerful: you can describe the relationship between numbers, so that Excel can recalculate things as circumstances change.

The best way to understand formulae is to try them out on screen and see what happens when you make changes to the spreadsheet. You can always Undo (CTRL+Z) if something unwanted happens.

151

11_711965-ch05.indd 15111_711965-ch05.indd 151 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

You can perform other calculations with Excel, of course. In school, you probably used an x to represent multiplication and ÷ for division, but you don’t use these in Excel. The x might get confused with a letter and the division symbol isn’t on the keyboard. Instead, you use an asterisk (*) for multiplication and a forward slash (/) for division. Table 5.1 provides a quick summary.

Table 5.1 Maths operators in Excel Operation Symbol Example Addition + =B1 + 5 Subtraction - =B1 - 1 Multiplication * =B1 * 3 Division / =B1 / 2

Note the direction of the slash used for division. The other one won’t work (I don’t even want to put it in your head by writing it here!). If you get an error message in a division formula, check you have the correct slash before you check anything else.

Entering the other quantity formulae

There are two other quantity formulae we need to calculate. The ﬁ rst is to calculate the number of car hire days. We’ve decided to rent a car for half our trip. The other formula is the number of days of petrol we need to budget for.

If you don’t want to know the answer, look away now! Why not try entering these formulae yourself before I reveal the answers?

Our car hire days will be half of our trip length, so the formula for this is:

=B1 / 2

152

11_711965-ch05.indd 15211_711965-ch05.indd 152 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

When you enter that, you see the value 5 go into the cell, which is half our trip length. So what about our petrol budget? This is also calculated per day. If you thought the right answer was to use the same formula as the one used for car hire, award yourself half a point. For the full point, you need to take a different approach.

The size of the petrol budget actually depends on the number of car hire days more than it does the length of our holiday, so you should base the calculation for the petrol budget on the number of car hire days. In cell D8, which represents the number of days of petrol you need to budget for, enter the formula:

=D7

This takes the number of car hire days from cell D7 and puts it into the cell for the number of days a petrol budget will be needed. The numbers on screen are the same as they would have been if we’d reused the same formula, so why make a distinction? It’s because it makes the spreadsheet more ﬂ exible. What if, later on, we decide to rent a car for the whole holiday? By doing the formula this way, we only need to change the number of car hire days and our petrol budget will update automatically. Similarly, we can take out all car related costs by setting the car hire days to zero. If we had calculated our petrol from the number of days, we would have to update that formula too, whenever we changed our car hire formula.

The art of creating good spreadsheets is partly about working out relationships like this. It’s not always easy, but the more speciﬁ c you can be about describing how numbers relate to each other, the more reliable your spreadsheet will be. I’ve only got six rows on my spreadsheet, but your full holiday budget might run to 20 rows or more. If you need to change two things to reﬂ ect one decision, there’s always a possibility you might introduce inconsistencies or forget to update something, which will throw your sums out.

You can also use the mouse or cursor keys to indicate cells you want to use in a formula. Enter the equals sign into a cell then either click on another cell or use the cursor keys to move around to the cell you want. Press Enter and its reference will come up in the formula.

153

11_711965-ch05.indd 15311_711965-ch05.indd 153 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Rounding numbers

There is a problem with this spreadsheet, and it will only come to light when you have an odd holiday. By that, I mean a holiday with an odd number of days, not a short break dressing as a brontosaurus and making triﬂ es. Each to his own.

If you go away for seven days and the car hire is calculated as half your holiday, the budget will calculate the costs of hiring a car based on 3.5 days. Most hire fi rms only hire a car for a whole day at a time. To make sure our budget refl ects this, we can ask Excel to round up our fi gure for car hire days.

To do that, we use a function called ROUNDUP. We need to tell the function what number we want to round, and how many decimal places we want the result to have. If we say we don’t want any decimal places, we’ll get the next largest whole number, which is exactly what we need.

To use the ROUNDUP function, we wrap it around our formula for days of car hire. The formula so far is:

=B1 / 2

To make its result always round up to the next whole number, change the formula to:

=ROUNDUP(B1 / 2, 0)

In English, this means, make the cell equal to a rounding up of the contents of cell B1 divided by two, and don’t use any decimal places in the rounding.

Because you’ve based the petrol budget on the number of car hire days, you only need to do this rounding for the car hire days. The number of days of petrol budget automatically reﬂ ects your car hire days.

There is also a ROUNDDOWN function which works in the same way, but will always round down. There is a ROUND function too, which rounds up or down to the nearest number. A number that’s exactly in the middle (like 3.5) will be rounded up.

I do like a well-rounded holiday!

154

11_711965-ch05.indd 15411_711965-ch05.indd 154 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

This isn’t the same as changing the format of a cell to display no decimal places. The format only affects what’s displayed on screen and does not change the underlying value of the cell or any calculations based on it. The functions here change what’s actually stored in the cell.

Calculating the total cost for each item

In column E, you’re going to calculate the total cost in euros for each item on your spreadsheet. That is calculated by multiplying the price for each item by the quantity of that item. So to work out the total cost of Hotel Pierre, for example, we multiply the cost per day by the number of days we will stay there.

So far, we’ve only used one cell reference in a formula, but you can incorporate as many as you want, using any mixture of mathematical operators. Into cell E4, enter this formula:

=B4 * D4

This means make the contents of cell E4 equal to the contents of cell B4 (the price of a taxi) multiplied by the contents of cell D4 (the number of taxi trips). As you enter each cell reference, Excel will highlight it on the spreadsheet, the ﬁ rst one in blue and the second one in green. In the formula bar, your cell references will use the same colours, as you can see in Figure 5.4.

Figure 5.4 155

11_711965-ch05.indd 15511_711965-ch05.indd 155 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Once you have completed the formula by hitting the Enter key, cell E4 will show a value of 100, which is what we would expect if we multiplied 50 by 2. Excel will also format the answer in euros. If we learn that our taxi estimate was too expensive, we can change the value for the taxi price, and the total euro cost will recalculate automatically.

Copying the total cost formula

All the cells in our total cost column are going to use the same pattern: they’re going to take the value of the cells in columns D and B on the same row, and multiply them. Excel is smart enough to recognise the pattern, which means we can avoid having to type in a formula for each one of these cells separately.

After you’ve entered the formula for cell E4, put your cursor on it and use CTRL+C or the copy icon on the ribbon to copy the cell. A dotted line will animate around the outside of the cell so you can see where you’re copying from. Select all the cells you want to paste into. One way to do that is to click the ﬁ rst cell you’d like to paste into, hold the mouse button down, and move your mouse pointer down the screen until all the cells are selected, as shown in Figure 5.5.

Click the Paste button on the ribbon or use CTRL+V, and the correct formula will be entered into every selected cell. If you’re not sure whether it’s worked or not, do a quick sanity check on the easier calculations to make sure it looks correct.

Figure 5.5

156

11_711965-ch05.indd 15611_711965-ch05.indd 156 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

How has this worked? You’ll see that Excel has changed the formula as it has copied it. As it moved down each row, Excel changed the row reference in the formula before pasting it. The formula was taken from row 4, but when it was pasted into row 5, Excel changed all the references from row 4 to row 5. This ensures that the total euro cost in row 5 is based on the price and quantity cells in row 5. Click on the total euro cost cell for row 5, and you’ll see the formula is:

=B5 * D5

Excel made these changes for each row you pasted into, as you can conﬁ rm by looking at the formula for those cells.

A quicker way to copy

If you’re copying into cells next to the cell you’re copying from, as we are here, there is a quicker approach you might want to try:

1. Click on the cell you want to copy from. 2. Hold down the CTRL key. 3. Click the bottom right corner of the cursor so that it turns into a small plus sign. 4. Hold down the mouse button. 5. Move the mouse pointer to select the cells to paste into.

When you release the mouse button, the contents of the ﬁ rst cell will be copied into the selected cells. The formulae will be modiﬁ ed as they are with normal copy and paste.

If you don’t hold down the CTRL key, Excel does a ‘series ﬁ ll’. In this case, you might not spot a difference. But if you enter ‘January’, Excel will put the other months in turn into the cells. You can also put a number in one cell, another underneath it, and then select both cells. If you then follow steps 3 and 4 above, Excel will complete the sequence of numbers for you.

157

11_711965-ch05.indd 15711_711965-ch05.indd 157 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Converting the currency

All your prices are in euros, but that doesn’t tell you how much the holiday is going to cost you in pounds sterling. Let’s add the exchange rate in a cell underneath the trip length at the top.

Insert a row underneath the top row of your spreadsheet by clicking the heading for row 2 to select it and then clicking the Insert button in the Cells section of the Home ribbon. Excel will take care of the formulae; as everything moves down a row, Excel will make sure the formulae are updated so that they are still referencing the right data. Take a look at row 5, which used to be row 4. The total cost formula has been changed so it multiplies cells B5 and D5, so all the data is still correct.

There are different ways to express the exchange rate, but it’s easiest to enter the number of euros you can buy with one pound. This is the ﬁ gure you’ll be quoted when you buy your currency. In reality, you’ll probably end up paying different exchange rates depending on whether you use cash or credit cards, but the standard rate is good enough for planning. You can get current exchange rates at www.xe.com.

You can use the format painter (shown in Figure 5.1) to copy the euro currency style from one of your existing currency cells onto your new cell. Click on the cell you want to copy formatting from, click the format painter button on the ribbon, then click the cell you want to apply the formatting to.

Let’s calculate our total costs in sterling for each row in column F. The formula we need will be the total euro cost for that row divided by the number of euros a pound can buy. Excel will format the column using the euro symbol automatically, so you’ll need to change the currency formatting to the pound sign. Your spreadsheet should now look like Figure 5.6.

158

11_711965-ch05.indd 15811_711965-ch05.indd 158 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

Figure 5.6

When copying formulae goes wrong

If you’re racing ahead, you might already have discovered that the technique you used to copy formulae for the total euro cost doesn’t work when you try it for the total pound cost. At best, it gives us some extremely optimistic calculations. I wouldn’t say no to half a week’s petrol for 73p and two concert tickets for 26p. At worst, it gives us complete nonsense, with error messages in the cells, as you can see in Figure 5.7.

The error messages are probably a better result than the numbers, because at least it’s obvious there’s something wrong with those cells. There’s a risk that calculation errors might be missed when they are more subtle, which is why it’s important to understand what’s gone wrong here.

In Figure 5.7, I’ve edited the formula for the last total pound formula so that you can see the cells it’s based on highlighted in blue and green. As Excel has copied the formula down the spreadsheet, it has updated the row references in it. The formula in cell F10 is now:

=E10/B7

The problem is that we didn’t want Excel to update the row for both of the cell references; we only wanted it to update the row for one of them – the total euro cost, in column E. We wanted it to use the same exchange rate cell in column B

159

11_711965-ch05.indd 15911_711965-ch05.indd 159 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

for each of the formulae. Instead, it has moved the cell reference for the exchange rate down one row each time it copied the formula into a new row, similar to what it did for the total euro cost. By the time we get to cell F10, we’re dividing the total euro cost for concert tickets taken from cell E10 (correct) by the price of the treehouse hotel in cell B7 (utter nonsense).

No wonder there are error messages. The ‘DIV/0!’ error message has happened because Excel is trying to divide the total hotel bill by the value of an empty cell underneath the exchange rate, and you can’t divide by zero. The ‘VALUE!’ error is what happens when you divide a number by the word ‘Price’. These are two of the rare instances where you’ll see an exclamation mark used in a computer error message, so you can tell how alarmed Excel is about this.

The solution is to put a special character into the cell reference in our formula to tell Excel that we don’t want the row to be modiﬁ ed when the formula is copied. That special character is the dollar sign and it goes before the row reference. The formula for the total pounds cost on row 5, then, should be:

=E5 / B$2

Now, when you copy the formula into the cells below, the reference to E5 will be changed for each row, but the reference to cell B2 will stay the same.

Autosum

Figure 5.7

160

11_711965-ch05.indd 16011_711965-ch05.indd 160 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

In other projects, you might copy formulae across different columns, and the column references in the formulae will be updated as they are copied. To stop that for a particular cell reference, put $ before the column letter (eg $B2). You can ﬁ x both the row and the column at the same time (eg $B$2).

Adding in more expenses in pounds

There will be some expenses that need to be paid in pounds too, such as the cost of ﬂ ights and airport parking. Where is the best place to put these on the spreadsheet?

The golden rule is that everything in the same column should be of the same type. If we enter our sterling costs in column B, we’ll end up with some of our values in that column in euros and some of them in pounds. The number in a cell will have a different meaning depending on where it is in the column. That can create a lot of confusion later on. But we do now have a column at the end (column F) where we can add additional expenses measured in pounds.

If you needed to work out these costs in more detail, using multiplication as we did for the Euro costs, you could add another column for Price in pounds, and reuse the units and quantity columns. I’m just going to add these as static costs in column F.

Totalling the pound cost

Now, let’s see how much this jaunt is going to cost! We could create a long formula to add up the total cost cells, using cell references of F5+F6+F7+F8 and so on. But there is a function called SUM that makes it much easier. This is how you use it:

1. Put the cursor on the cell you would like the total to appear in. An ideal place is at the bottom of the column you are totalling. 2. Type the formula =SUM(. 3. Click the cell at the start of the range you’d like to total.

161

11_711965-ch05.indd 16111_711965-ch05.indd 161 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

4. Hold the mouse button down and move the mouse pointer until you have selected all the cells you want to total. 5. Type the close bracket ). 6. Press Enter, Tab or a cursor key to conﬁ rm.

You can also select the cells to sum using the cursor keys. After step 2, press the cursor keys to move to the start of the range, press full stop, move to the end of the range, and resume at step 5.

The cell will now show the total of the cells you selected.

To avoid confusion, it’s a good idea to format the total with a different colour of cell and a bold font. If you insert more rows between those you’re summing, their values will be added to the total too.

If your spreadsheet is well structured (as this one is!) you can just click on an empty cell at the bottom of the column or end of the row and click the Auto- sum button indicated in Figure 5.7. Excel will select the range automatically, and you can just press Enter to conﬁ rm or Esc to cancel.

If you want to work out the total cost in euros, you can copy the formula you’ve entered for pounds into the column to its left. Excel will change the column references as it copies the formula into a different column, so that it still totals the ﬁ gures above it.

There are some other functions you can use in the same way as the SUM function. AVG takes the numbers in a range of cells and works out the average for you. COUNT will count the number of cells in a range that contain numbers (including any calculated by formulae), and COUNTA will count the number of cells in a range that aren’t blank.

162

11_711965-ch05.indd 16211_711965-ch05.indd 162 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

When you select a group of cells, you can see the sum of their values, the average value and the number of cells selected at the very bottom of the screen. It only ﬂ ashes up while the cells are selected, but it can be a quick way to check a running total.

Writing your own formulae

Excel is capable of much more sophisticated formulae than you have discovered in this project, and it can handle any calculations you can dream up for it.

I have two warnings, though. The ﬁ rst is that although you can type a lot of your working out into a cell, you probably shouldn’t. You could type your exchange rate directly into a price formula, for example, and this might seem like a time saver if you know you’re only using it once, but it makes it hard to see what’s going on when you look at the spreadsheet. It’s better to make your workings as transparent as possible, as I did with the exchange rate, by putting your numbers into cells where you can see them, rather than having to dig around in formulae to ﬁ nd out what’s going on.

The second warning is that, when you’re creating complicated formulae, sometimes you need to tell Excel which bits of it belong together to avoid errors. What’s 15 minus 5 times 2? It depends on whether you do the subtraction or the multiplication ﬁ rst. In Excel, you use brackets to show which bits belong together. For example:

=15 - ( 5 * 2 )

=(15 - 5) * 2

The ﬁ rst calculation gives the result 5 (5 times 2 is 10, and taken away from 15 that leaves 5), and the second gives the result 20 (15 minus 5 is 10, times 2 is 20). You’ll get an error if you don’t have the same number of opening and closing brackets.

If your formula isn’t doing what you expect or is giving an error, it’s usually not too hard to work out what’s gone wrong. Here’s a quick checklist that can help you ﬁ nd the problem more quickly: 163

11_711965-ch05.indd 16311_711965-ch05.indd 163 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser • Check that your formula starts with an equals sign. • Check that your cell references are logical, especially if you’ve copied the formula. If you edit the formula, you can see that the cells it uses are outlined in colour (as in Figure 5.7). • Check that you’re using the right maths symbols, including a full stop for a decimal point (it’s easy to mistype a comma instead), an asterisk for multiplication and a slash (/) for division. • Check that you have meaningful numbers in the cells you’re referencing. Pay particular attention to any cells that contain zero, because you can’t divide by zero. • Check that every opening bracket has a closing bracket, and vice versa. • Check that you have the cells in the right order, so that you’re subtracting the right number from the right number and haven’t got them reversed. The same applies to formulae with division.

Using your spreadsheet to plan your holiday

Now you can start using your spreadsheet to plan your holiday. It’s not just a calculating machine – it can help you to make decisions by telling you what will happen if some of your assumptions change. Figure 5.8 shows the complete planning spreadsheet.

Using this spreadsheet, you can: • Enter different trip lengths to see how this changes the total cost of your holiday. • Experiment with different exchange rates to see how ﬂ uctuating currency might affect the cost of your holiday in pounds. • See what happens if you decide to rent a car for your whole holiday, instead of just half of it. • See what effect it has if you change your estimate for the taxi cost, or for the amount of petrol you use per day, based on a friend’s advice. • Check what happens if you go during high season when the hotel rates are higher. • Write a formula to calculate the cost per day, so you can see how this holiday compares with other holidays you’ve planned. 164

11_711965-ch05.indd 16411_711965-ch05.indd 164 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

Figure 5.8

Why not test your skills by adding that formula for the cost per day?

This is a fairly simple spreadsheet, but it’s a powerful decision making tool. As you extend the spreadsheet for your own needs, you might ﬁ nd other variables that you can put into it to make it more useful.

Adding a holiday countdown

As well as doing maths with quantities and currencies, Excel can do some simple maths using dates. That means you can easily add a countdown to your holiday spreadsheet so you can see how much time you have to save up the money you need!

165

11_711965-ch05.indd 16511_711965-ch05.indd 165 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

To work out how many days there are until you go, you just need to subtract today’s date from your departure date. That doesn’t make much sense to humans, but Excel can work it out. Refer to Figure 5.9 as you follow these steps:

1. Insert four blank lines at the top of your spreadsheet, using the same technique as you did earlier in this project. 2. Write the label ‘Departure date’ into cell A1, and type your departure date into cell B1 using a format like 15/10/2010. 3. On the next row down, write a label of ‘Today’s date’ in cell A2. 4. In cell B2, enter =TODAY(). This is a special function that automatically puts today’s date into the cell. Every time you open the spreadsheet, it shows the current date. 5. On the next row down, write a label of ‘How many days to save up!’ 6. In cell B3, write the formula =B1-B2. This subtracts today’s date in cell B2 from the date of the holiday in cell B1 and puts the answer into cell B3.

Figure 5.9

Cell B3 will now count down to your holiday every day you open the spreadsheet. It will automatically adjust the number of days left if you change your departure date.

Protecting your privacy with encryption

Although this particular example contains basic and generic information, you may choose to include more detailed or personal information alongside the ﬁ g- ures (for example, the username and password for your online ﬂ ight booking). If you decide to do this then you should consider adding some additional security to your Excel document.

To stop any prying eyes, you can put a password on your document. This will stop anyone who doesn’t have the password from opening the ﬁ le.

166

11_711965-ch05.indd 16611_711965-ch05.indd 166 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

You can use this same technique to password protect Word and PowerPoint ﬁ les too.

The way you do this is slightly different in Offi ce 2010 and Offi ce 2007. • In Offi ce 2010, go to the backstage area. Click on Protect Workbook and then click Encrypt with Password. • In Offi ce 2007, click the Offi ce button. Click Prepare on the menu and then click Encrypt Document.

Whichever version of Microsoft Ofﬁ ce you are using, you will be asked to enter the password twice. It won’t come up on screen as you type it, so the second time is to make sure that you’ve typed it correctly and there is no misunderstanding. Passwords are case sensitive, so if you set your password as ‘Hello123’, it won’t work if you type in ‘hello123’ or ‘HELLO123’.

When you open the fi le, you’ll need to match the password you provided exactly. But what happens if you lose the password? You won’t be able to open the fi le any more. The idea is to keep intruders out, not lock yourself out! So make sure you pick a password that is highly memorable but not easy for others to guess. If necessary, write it down somewhere secure, but not somewhere it can be found with the fi le.

If you decide to remove the password later, follow the same steps for setting a password. When asked to provide the password, just press Enter to tell Excel the password is nothing (ie there isn’t one).

Password protection is a useful tool, particularly if you’re going to be moving ﬁ les or your computer around a lot. However, the best protection is to keep the actual ﬁ les somewhere they won’t be found, such as stored on a USB key in a locked drawer.

There are some tips for creating secure but memorable passwords on my website at www.sean.co.uk.

167

11_711965-ch05.indd 16711_711965-ch05.indd 167 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Copying your budget into your itinerary in Word

If you need to coordinate the family, or even just want to make sure you’ve got all the information on your holiday organised for yourself, you might want to write an itinerary you can take with you. This might include details such as the location of the hotel, some maps and important phone numbers. You might also want to incorporate your holiday budget into that document. Excel isn’t a good tool for creating text-heavy documents, though, and it’s a distraction to have information in different ﬁ les. The solution is to use Word to create your itinerary, but add in your information from Excel. It’s easy to do. Here’s how:

1. In Excel, select the cells you would like to copy. You can use the Select All button (see Figure 4.5), or select just the cells you’d like to copy. You probably don’t need the length of the holiday, for example, or the countdown. 2. Click the Copy button on the Home ribbon or use CTRL+C. 3. Go into your Word document. Place your cursor where you would like to add in your spreadsheet. 4. Press the Paste button on Word’s Home ribbon or use CTRL+V.

Your spreadsheet will now be added into your Word document, so you can write at greater length and easily insert pictures above and below it to create your complete itinerary, as shown in Figure 5.10.

When you take information from Excel to Word like this, you’re only taking what you see on screen, not the formulae. Word can’t do any of the clever maths crunching that Excel is so good at, so the date countdown won’t update itself and if you change one of the numbers, it won’t affect any cells that depend on it. If you need to make changes to the content, it’s a good idea to make them in Excel and then copy the spreadsheet across again.

In Word, your spreadsheet is formatted as a table. If you need to remove it again, follow these steps:

1. In Word, click anywhere on the spreadsheet you’ve pasted in. 2. On the ribbon, click the Table Layout tab underneath where it says Table Tools in yellow on the right. You can see this on Figure 5.10.

168

11_711965-ch05.indd 16811_711965-ch05.indd 168 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

3. Click the Delete button on the ribbon in the Rows & Columns section, also shown on Figure 5.10. 4. When the menu opens, click Delete Table.

You can then copy and paste in your updated Excel spreadsheet.

You don’t have any gridlines in Word. If you want to make it easier to read across the rows, click on your table and move the mouse to select its cells. Under the Table Tools Design tab, you can then add borders to those cells.

Delete button Table layout

Figure 5.10

169

11_711965-ch05.indd 16911_711965-ch05.indd 169 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Microsoft Ofﬁ ce for the Older and Wiser

Now you have your itinerary ready, the only thing left is to pack your bags and go. Bon voyage!

What else can you do?

In this project, you’ve learned how to use Excel to carry out calculations and create a planning tool. There are many projects you can create using these skills, including: • If you’ve got children in the family who are learning their times tables, you can use Excel to create revision grids. Just enter the times table required at the top, and Excel can work out 1x, 2x, all the way up to 12 and show them in different cells. You don’t have to type out the numbers 1 to 12. Use a formula that adds one to the value above it. If you can’t quite envisage this, you can download an example from my website. • If someone in the family has a wedding or anniversary party to plan, you can use Excel to juggle the guest numbers and budget costs. • You can create a health grid to record your calorie intake and exercise regime. • If you’re thinking about buying a new house or getting a new job, you can use a simple spreadsheet to model how your disposable income will change. • You can keep track of the money in different savings accounts and work out your total assets. You can even estimate the interest you’re likely to get, based on the current interest rates for each account. • Use Excel to keep track of your hobbies or creative endeavours. I keep track of how many words I’ve written using Excel, but you might want to record the length of your walks or the yield you get from the vegetable plot. • Work out a simple proﬁ t and loss for a cake sale. Is it worth hiring a table at the village fete? How many buns do you have to sell to break even? What if you put up the price of a cake? Excel can help answer all these questions. • You can use Excel to keep an eye on the value of your stamp, music or antique collections.

170

11_711965-ch05.indd 17011_711965-ch05.indd 170 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating a basic holiday budget in Excel

Summary Don’t be afraid to experiment with Excel, and add in new rows and • columns as you need them. Avoid burying important numbers in formulae: put the numbers • into cells so that you can easily see them and change them. Keep one-off values like the exchange rate at the top of the spread- • sheet so they’re easy to fi nd. • Use an equals sign to start entering a formula into a cell. • Multiplication is represented by * and division is represented by /. Cells using formulae are recalculated immediately when other cells • they depend on are changed. Use formulae to create relationships between cells so you can min- • imise the number of formulae you might need to change later. Use the ROUND, ROUNDUP or ROUNDDOWN functions in a • formula if you only want whole numbers in a cell. You can copy a formula into a different row but might encounter • problems if it uses a cell reference from a row other than the row you’re copying from. To fi x a row or column reference in a formula, put $ before it (eg B$2 • for a row and $B2 for a column, or to fi x on a specifi c cell use $B$2). • You can use CTRL and drag the bottom right of the cursor to copy. • Use SUM to add up a row or column. Use brackets in complex formulae to show • which bits belong together. Use your spreadsheet to experiment and • see what happens if you change certain costs or assumptions.

171

11_711965-ch05.indd 17111_711965-ch05.indd 171 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Brain Training

Let’s try a quiz to see what you’ve learned. There might be multiple right answers.

1. If a cell has a formula in it but you (a) =B1 want the calculated values always to (b) =B1 \ 2 be whole numbers, you should: (c) =B1+B2) * 3 (a) Format the cell so it has no decimal (d) =B1 / 3 places (b) Use ROUND to round the cell to the nearest whole number 4. If you want to copy a formula to a different row but want to still refer (c) Make sure you only enter whole to cell B2, you could: numbers into your spreadsheet (a) Use the Home ribbon when you (d) Format the cell as a percentage paste it (b) Change the cell reference to $B$2 2. To make sure your spreadsheet is (c) Change the cell reference to $B2 ﬂ exible, it’s a good idea to: (d) Take the number that’s in cell B2 and (a) Put as many of your basic numbers as write it into the formula possible into formulae (b) Put as much of your information as possible on screen in cells 5. If you want to know the total of three cells that are next to each (c) Use formulae to link cells that will always be closely related other, you could: (d) Do stretching exercises by changing (a) Use SUM to total them the column widths regularly (b) Write a formula that adds them up (c) Select the cells and look at the 3. Which of these formula is valid (at bottom of the screen least one will produce an error): (d) Check the headings

Answers

Q1 – b Q2 – b and c Q3 – a and d Q4 – b Q5 – a, b and c

172

11_711965-ch05.indd 17211_711965-ch05.indd 172 9/13/10 2:52 PM9/13/10 2:52 PM Creating 6 personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Microsoft Word 2010 or Microsoft Word 2007, and Microsoft Excel 2010 or Microsoft Excel 2007 (see Introduction).

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball). Familiarity with laying out documents in Word and managing your address book in Excel (see particularly Chapters 3 and 4).

Whether you’ve cautiously ﬁ led a copy of your letters to the bank (see Chapter 1), plastered the town with posters (see Chapter 2) or become a press impresario with your own newsletter (see Chapter 3), you’ll know that one of the key advantages of using a computer is that you can print as many copies as you like of each document. You can happily leave the printer churning out posters or newsletters until it’s time for you to go to bed or the cartridge runs out (which will probably be sooner). Each copy will look as good as the ﬁ rst, which can’t be said of handwritten documents. I wonder whether people whose surnames begin with Z ever receive Christmas cards they can decipher.

What happens if there are minor variations in the documents you want to print, though? Scribbling additions or corrections onto the printed page makes it look unprofessional and is time consuming. It isn’t much quicker to revise the document for each recipient in Word before printing it, either.

12_711965-ch06.indd 17312_711965-ch06.indd 173 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

In this project, you’ll learn about a fantastic tool called ‘mail merge’ that you can use to create lots of documents that have slight variations between them. Mail merge was originally used to print a set of addresses onto letters and envelopes, which is how it got the ﬁ rst half of its name. It’s the same technology your electricity company uses to send you a personally addressed letter that is essentially identical to about a million other letters it prints on the same day. But don’t let that put you off! It might be best known for its role in junk mail, but why should the devil have all the best tunes?

I’m going to show you how you can use mail merge to create tailored invitations, using an event I’m planning as an example.

For this project, you’ll be building on the skills you learned in earlier chapters. For a dazzling layout, you’ll draw upon your experience using text boxes and images in Word, which you learned about in Chapter 3. You’ll also need an address book in Excel, which was the project in Chapter 4. If you haven’t created an address book and want to experiment with the project in this chapter anyway, you can download my project ﬁ les from www.sean.co.uk, but you might need to refer back to Chapter 4 to understand how to do some of the manipulation in Excel.

As you can see from the ideas at the end of this chapter, this project opens up lots of creative opportunities for you, from personalised story books for your grandchildren to place settings for a dinner party.

What is mail merge?

Mail merge is a feature of Word. You might have heard it mentioned or stumbled across it in Word’s menus. So what’s it all about?

When you want to create a document that contains slightly different information for each person you send it to, mail merge enables you to do this by creating a document in which you leave gaps where you want information to be added in automatically. Usually, this will be information about the person that you’re sending the document to, but it doesn’t have to be. When your bank sends you a standard marketing letter, for example, they leave a gap at the start where it says ‘Dear’, so that the computer can automatically insert your name.

It’s called a mail merge because Word merges your standard letter with an Excel spreadsheet of information, to ﬁ ll the gaps in it.

174

12_711965-ch06.indd 17412_711965-ch06.indd 174 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

You can perform a mail merge without using Excel by typing the information that will ﬁ ll the gaps into a special table in Word, but it’s much easier and more ﬂ exible if you use an Excel spreadsheet.

I’m planning to invite my friends to a summer walk through London, followed by dinner at home for a select few. Each invitation will have the recipient’s name on it, taken from my address book, and Word will automatically add in text if the recipient is also invited to dinner.

For our invitation, we’re going to leave a space for the invitee’s name. We’ll get Word to ﬁ ll this gap using our address book spreadsheet (see Chapter 4), and we’ll also get Word to make some of the decisions for us. We only want to invite people who live in London, and we want to invite some of our friends to join us for dinner afterwards. Using Ofﬁ ce, this is easy. Best of all, we don’t risk losing anyone who can’t read our handwritten addition to the invitation, or offending anyone by crossing out the dinner bit and scrawling ‘Not you’! on it!

Mail merge is another feature that only works if your spreadsheet is the right way up. Make sure all the information on a row refers to the same person, and all the information in a column is of the same type. See Chapter 4 for help with this.

Creating the standard invitation

The ﬁ rst step is to design the standard invitation. You can use a template for this (see Chapter 2) but I wouldn’t recommend it for your ﬁ rst mail merge project. Some of the templates can be complicated and may make the process more confusing. I suggest you keep it simple.

For now, just create your invitation as if it is only going to one person. So that I don’t get confused and think this is a real invitation ready to send at any time, I’m going to create an invitation for someone called ‘Whoever Youare’. I’ve used ﬁ c- tional ﬁ rst and second names to make sure there will be space for both once the

175

12_711965-ch06.indd 17512_711965-ch06.indd 175 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

real names are added later. I’ve also included the details about dinner to make sure they ﬁ t, even though not everyone will see them on their invitation. Figure 6.1 shows my invitation.

Make sure your design can accommodate all the information that will be added later. It’s going to get messy if you ﬁ ll all the space available, and forget about the optional additional content that only some people will see.

To create the invitation, you’ll need to use your skills from the ﬁ rst three chapters. If you want a quick refresher, here are the steps I used to create my invitation:

1. Start a new Word document, and save it. (You didn’t need to be reminded to save this time, I’m sure!) 2. In the Page Layout ribbon, change the page orientation and size to what you need. I’m going to print my invitations on A5 paper, which is half the size of A4. I’m also going to use a landscape layout and I’ve changed the margins to be narrow, because the normal setting takes up too much space on a small page. 3. On the Insert ribbon, insert a Picture. I’ve stretched my photo to ﬁ ll the page because I will be able to put my text on top of the large area of sky. If you don’t have a picture with blank space like that, insert your picture and then move it and resize it so that it only takes up half the page. You can use the other half for your text. 4. On the Insert ribbon, insert a text box. Use a simple text box, and move it to where you would like your text to go. I’ve put mine on top of the blank area of my photo, and I’ve stretched it so it covers the right half of the page. I’ve also made it transparent by changing Shape Fill to No Fill, and changing Shape Outline to No Outline in the Drawing Tools tab (or Text Box Tools tab in Ofﬁ ce 2007). (If you can’t see the tab, click the text box.) On Figure 6.1, you can see the boundaries of my text box. 5. Add in the text of the invitation. Don’t forget that you can use Shift+Enter to start a new line without having paragraph spacing between the lines.

176

12_711965-ch06.indd 17612_711965-ch06.indd 176 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Figure 6.1 6. Use the formatting controls on the Home ribbon to format the text appropri- ately. I’ve used the font called Arial Bold at a size of 18 pt for the heavier copy. For the rest, I’ve used the font Calibri at 14 pt, with bold used for emphasis on some parts.

I’ve gone through that really quickly, because it’s all been covered in earlier chapters. But feel free to take your time over your invitation. Have fun designing it, and create something that will really inspire people to attend!

Figure 6.1 shows my standard invitation. It doesn’t matter if yours looks different but you should aim to get it as close to ﬁ nished as possible. There might be a few design tweaks along the way, of course. When the real names are added, you

177

12_711965-ch06.indd 17712_711965-ch06.indd 177 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

might ﬁ nd they’re longer than your sample text and the font is too large for them to ﬁ t on one line, for example. Ideally, you would do the mail merge just before you print or send the messages, though, so make sure you’re happy with your layout before you proceed to the next step. You could even print out your invitation with the dummy text to see how it looks on paper.

Preparing your invitees list

It takes two to merge. Now we’ve prepared our invitation, we need to make sure that all the personalised information we want to put in it is included in our address book, so go into Excel and open your address book. You can leave Word open to save time reopening it later. (Although, on a slower computer, you might ﬁ nd that closing Word helps to speed things up.)

For this project, the only thing that’s missing on the address book spreadsheet is whether each person is to be invited to the dinner after the walk. Remember that this invitation is for a two-part event and, in order to limit the kitchen chaos, only some of those invited on the walk are invited to dinner afterwards as well.

We can add a column to our spreadsheet to show whether or not we want to invite each person to dinner. My address book uses columns A to G at the moment, so I’ll put this information into column H. If you have added additional columns to your address book, you might be using a different column for this, but it doesn’t matter.

Give the column the header ‘Dinner’. For each person in the address book we need to consider whether they’re invited or not. If somebody is invited, put a ‘Y’ into their ‘Dinner’ cell. It doesn’t add anything to enter ‘N’ for those who aren’t, because it should be obvious that if there’s no ‘Y’, the person isn’t invited. If you leave the cells blank for those who aren’t invited, it’s a lot easier to see at a glance how many have been invited and who they are, as you can see from Figure 6.2.

It doesn’t matter whether we use ‘Y’ or ‘Yes’ or ‘Sausages’ to indicate invitees. What is important is that we mark all invitees in exactly the same way. This isn’t going to work if we put ‘yes’ beside one name and ‘absolutely’! beside another.

178

12_711965-ch06.indd 17812_711965-ch06.indd 178 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Figure 6.2 shows my address book, including the ‘Dinner’ column. Don’t forget, if your spreadsheet is too wide to fi t on the screen, you can freeze the fi rst two columns so that you can still see the names while you’re using a column that’s normally too far to the right to see at the same time. To freeze the fi rst two columns containing the fi rst and last name, and the top row containing the headers too, put your cursor on cell C2. Then click Freeze Panes on the View ribbon (shown in Figure 6.2). You might need to Unfreeze Panes fi rst if you have already frozen the top row.

Freeze panes

Count

Figure 6.2

179

12_711965-ch06.indd 17912_711965-ch06.indd 179 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

How many people are coming to dinner? If you click on the heading for your ‘Dinner’ column to select it, Excel shows ‘Count: 10’ (or however many) at the very bottom of the screen (see Figure 6.2). This shows how many cells have text in them in the area you’ve selected. Take care, though – it includes the header text (‘Dinner’) as well, so subtract one before setting the table.

For any future mail merge projects you do, even if you don’t need to add any information or make any changes, I recommend you check your data in Excel ﬁ rst. In Word, you can only comfortably see one personalised document at a time, so it can take a long time to spot any mistakes. In Excel, you can see a lot more data at once, so it’s much easier to spot anything that might cause a problem for your project (such as somebody whose address is missing).

Save your ﬁ le and you can then close Excel.

Selecting recipients in Word

Now we have all our party people in a spreadsheet, and our invitation in Word. The next step is to combine them.

Switch back to Word (you can ﬁ nd it on the Windows taskbar at the bottom of the screen). If you closed Word to work in Excel, restart Word and open your standard letter again.

We’re going to use a new ribbon now: the Mailings one. Click the Mailings tab to bring that ribbon to the front. It looks like the tab at the top of Figure 6.3, although most of the buttons will be greyed out and inactive when you ﬁ rst come to it.

The language Word uses is quite speciﬁ c to personalising letters for posting, but this ribbon is where you ﬁ nd the controls for any project that involves customising a document with data from Excel.

180

12_711965-ch06.indd 18012_711965-ch06.indd 180 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Figure 6.3

To bring our Excel address book into Word, we need to ‘select recipients’. This is another example of Word being very focused on mailings. If you were doing a project that didn’t involve posting anything (such as creating a series of posters using slogans organised in Excel), you would still need to use this button to bring your information from Excel into Word.

Click Select Recipients on the ribbon and choose Use Existing List from the menu that opens. A new window will open with a lot of technical jargon in the middle of it (shown in Figure 6.4) or it might tell you that no items match your search. This is the best kind of jargon, though, because you can completely ignore it. Use the options on the left to go to the Desktop, Documents or Computer and then navigate to your Excel fi le as you would normally when opening a fi le. When you’ve found your fi le, double-click on its fi le name, or click it once to select it and then click the Open button.

Don’t click the New Source button. If you click it by mistake, click the Can- cel button to go back a step.

A new window will open, which looks like Figure 6.5 for my address book. Excel enables you to have more than one spreadsheet in the same ﬁ le, so your results might vary. You can switch between them using the tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet (named Sheet1, Sheet2, Sheet3) and can add a new one by clicking the Insert Worksheet tab beside them. For most simple projects, you won’t need to worry about this, but Word might ask you to pick a worksheet now anyway. If it does, choose Sheet1. Make sure the tickbox in the bottom left is ticked to indicate that your data has headers at the top of it.

181

12_711965-ch06.indd 18112_711965-ch06.indd 181 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Figure 6.4

Figure 6.5

When you click the OK button, your Excel data will be brought into Word. That takes place behind the scenes, though, so the only difference you will notice will be that the Mailings tab will now light up. Any buttons that were greyed-out will go full colour because they are now available to use.

182

12_711965-ch06.indd 18212_711965-ch06.indd 182 9/13/10 3:19 PM9/13/10 3:19 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Selecting which rows of your spreadsheet to use

Often, you won’t want to use every row in your spreadsheet. I only want to send an invitation to people who live in London, for example. Again, Word’s language is very speciﬁ c to mailings here because we have to use the Edit Recipient List button. This is really about choosing which rows in your spreadsheet will be used.

If you don’t want to create a customised document for every row in your spreadsheet, you need to ‘edit recipients’ in Word-speak, even if your project doesn’t involve posting anything.

Click the Edit Recipient List button (indicated in Figure 6.6) on the Mailings ribbon and you will see your address book details in a new window, also shown in Figure 6.6. You can’t edit your data here (such as fi xing spellings), but you can sort and fi lter it, using controls that are a bit like the fi lters in Excel. For example: • You can click a header, and the data will be sorted according to that header. Click the Last Name header, for example, to sort the data alphabetically by surname. • You can click the black triangle on a header to open a menu with fi ltering options. This menu shows you all the entries in that column. If you click on one (such as ‘London’), the data will be fi ltered so that only people who live in London will be used. The black triangle will turn grey to show that a fi lter is active. Choose (All) from the menu to switch off the fi lter. You can’t fi lter on columns where the data is too varied, such as surname or postcode. • If your doctor or bank manager has ended up in the list by mistake, you can exclude them by clicking the tickbox beside their name to clear it. To change your mind, click the tickbox again to bring back the tick.

For most projects, including our invitations, these ﬁ ltering options provide all the control you need. In my case, I just need to ﬁ lter the City to London to select my invitees. If you’re not interested in anything more complicated for now, feel free to skip to the next section.

183

12_711965-ch06.indd 18312_711965-ch06.indd 183 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Edit Recipient List

Figure 6.6

It is possible to use many more selection criteria using the advanced ﬁ ltering options. You could, for instance, ﬁ lter to include people from more than one city, or add in everyone with a particular surname, wherever they live, to make sure none of the relatives are forgotten. The options are mostly selected using pulldown menus, so it’s not too hard, although the window looks a bit daunting, as you can see in Figure 6.7.

You choose which ﬁ eld (or spreadsheet column) you want to compare and how you want to compare it (such as making sure it’s equal or not equal to what you want), and then type in the information you’d like to compare it with. Figure 6.7 shows how you can ﬁ lter your recipient list so that it shows anyone from London (City Equal to London), plus anyone from Birmingham (City Equal to Birming- ham), plus anyone with the surname Case (Last Name Equal to Case).

184

12_711965-ch06.indd 18412_711965-ch06.indd 184 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Figure 6.7

Be careful about whether you choose ‘And’ or ‘Or’, when you fi lter your list. Only use the ‘And’ option to combine fi lters if you want to make sure both fi lters are satisfi ed. For example, use ‘And’ if you want people who live in Birmingham who are also called Case, but want to exclude everyone else who lives in Birmingham and everyone else called Case. Use ‘Or’ to combine these fi lters if you want everyone in Birmingham plus everyone called Case.

Adding names to your invitation

Now that Word knows where to ﬁ nd the data and who to include, we need to show it where to use this data on our invitation. At the moment, my invitation has dummy text saying ‘Whoever Youare’ where Word needs to add the ﬁ rst and last names of the invitee.

Personalising the invitations with the recipients’ names is a simple three-step process:

1. Select the dummy text for the ﬁ rst name. Remember, you can do this by clicking on it twice or by clicking at the start of the word and dragging the mouse to the end. This step is important to preserve the formatting you want on your invitation.

185

12_711965-ch06.indd 18512_711965-ch06.indd 185 9/13/10 3:19 PM9/13/10 3:19 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

2. Click the bottom of the Insert Merge Field button on the Mailings ribbon. (Click the words, not the picture.) 3. A menu opens, showing all the merge ﬁ elds, which is what Word calls your spreadsheet’s column headers. Click First Name to select it.

Word replaces the dummy text in your invitation with the special code <>, as you can see in Figure 6.9. Because of Step 1 above, it will have the same formatting as your dummy text had. You can change its font and colour the same way as you can for any other text, and you can delete it in the same way you would delete any other word.

Repeat the process for the last name, making sure there’s a space between the ﬁ rst and last name codes, as there would be if you were normally typing a ﬁ rst name and surname. Note that you can’t just type in the special code. You need to use the Insert Merge Field button to add it, otherwise it won’t work.

Any time you want to add information from your spreadsheet into your Word document, you can use Insert Merge Field. You only need to do Step 1 in the process above if you want to replace existing placeholder text and keep its formatting.

Why not sign off your invitation with ‘We hope to see the <> family there’?

Previewing your invitations

If you’re dying to know whether it’s worked or not, there’s a quick way to ﬁ nd out. Click the Preview Results button on the Mailings ribbon (see Figure 6.8) and the mail merge codes in your document will be replaced with a real name taken from your data. This shows you the ﬁ rst invitation that will be created, but you can work your way through the rows of your spreadsheet (which Word calls records), by clicking the next and previous record buttons on the ribbon, shown in Figure 6.8.

186

12_711965-ch06.indd 18612_711965-ch06.indd 186 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

If you spot anything that needs to be changed on a particular invitation (such as a spelling mistake in someone’s name), make a note of it so you can edit it later. Don’t make any changes now because this is just a preview and your edits will be lost.

You can make changes to the formatting, though. If the font is too big for one of your names to ﬁ t on the invitation, you can select the text and change its size. The change will apply to all your invitations.

When you’ve ﬁ nished previewing, click the Preview Results button again, and the merge ﬁ eld codes will return.

Current record number

Previous record Next record

Jump to first record Jump to last record

Preview Results

Figure 6.8

The Highlight Merge Fields button on the Mailings ribbon (see Figure 6.9) will tint your merge fi elds so you can see them easily. For longer documents with more text in them, this can help you to fi nd these fi elds quickly.

Adding conditional content

We’re not inviting everyone to dinner after the walk, so we need to get Word to tailor the invitation depending on whether somebody has a ‘Y’ in their ‘Dinner’ column or not. This is also an easy process, although Word won’t preserve the existing formatting if you overwrite your dummy text. Here are the steps to take:

1. If you have existing dummy text, select it and use CTRL+X to cut it. 2. Position your cursor where you would like the optional text to be added in your invitation.

187

12_711965-ch06.indd 18712_711965-ch06.indd 187 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

3. Click Rules on the Mailings ribbon (indicated in Figure 6.9) and then click If… Then…Else on the menu that opens. 4. A new window opens, shown in Figure 6.9. Use the pulldown menu and the text box to defi ne the rule you want to use for deciding whether this optional text is included or not. In my case, the rule is if the fi eld name (or column) ‘Dinner’ is equal to Y. 5. In the Insert this text box (see Figure 6.9), enter the text you would like to be inserted. If you have cut dummy text from the invitation, you can use CTRL+V to paste it here. 6. Optionally, you can enter text in the lower box. This text will be added if the rule isn’t satisfi ed (if someone isn’t invited to dinner, in this example). Some- times this option can help to balance the design. You could avoid having a big gap by inserting something like ‘Don’t forget your camera!’. Remember that those invited to dinner won’t get to see this, so make sure this does not include any information that is essential for them too. 7. Click OK.

What you see on screen will depend on the record number that is showing in the Preview Results part of the ribbon. If this record has a Y in its Dinner ﬁ eld, you’ll see the text about dinner. Otherwise, your alternative text (if you have some) will be shown. You can click the next and previous buttons in the Preview Results part of the ribbon (see Figure 6.8) to get to a record that displays text if you’ve provided no alternative text.

The text is inserted in a standard black font, but you can now select it and format it however you want.

Remember that you can use the format painter to copy formatting from else- where in the document (see Chapter 1 and Figure 1.7).

188

12_711965-ch06.indd 18812_711965-ch06.indd 188 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Highlight Merge Fields Rules Finish & Merge

Figure 6.9

You should only use conditional (or variable) content for parts of the invitation that are shared by a lot of people. You’ll have a chance to tweak individual invitations shortly.

Creating your ﬁ nished invitations

Now we’re ready to create our customised invitations. On the Mailings ribbon, click the Finish & Merge button indicated in Figure 6.9. A menu will open, from which you need to select Edit Individual Documents. You’ll see there is an option here to Print Documents, but I recommend you always edit them ﬁ rst just in case there’s something that needs ﬁ xing.

189

12_711965-ch06.indd 18912_711965-ch06.indd 189 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

There is an option to create personalised emails, but it will only work if you have Microsoft Outlook or another compatible email program installed and have email addresses included in your Excel address book.

You’ll be asked which records you want to merge, and you should leave the default selection of All. Note that this takes into account the ﬁ lter you applied earlier, so when it says ‘All’, it only means all those you have previously chosen to send an invitation to. It’s not going to override your party plans and invite everyone in the address book.

When you click OK, you’ll see Word rattle through all your records quickly. Word will then open a new ﬁ le in a new window, which includes all of your invitations. Page one will be the ﬁ rst invitation, page two will be the second invitation, and so on. You can save this document so you’ve got a copy in case you need it. Scroll through the pages to check the invitations look right, and then you can print them in the normal way (see Chapter 1).

You can also make any edits to individual invitations now. You might want to add a personal note to one of them (‘Bring your wedding photos’!) or ﬁ x the spelling on a name (don’t forget to update your address book too). Any change you make to one page here will have no effect on the other pages.

If you want to make a change to all the invitations in one go, return to your standard invitation ﬁ le, make the change there, and then click Finish & Merge again.

You’ve got two similar looking ﬁ les open now: the standard invitation you created, and the personalised invitations that Word just created. If you make any edits, check the ﬁ lename at the top of the screen to make sure you’re making the changes on the right one, and use the Windows taskbar to switch between them.

When you’re happy with your invitations, load the paper, set them to print and stand well back. The printing might take a while, so you can enjoy a well-earned tea break, or press ahead with making your mailing labels. 190

12_711965-ch06.indd 19012_711965-ch06.indd 190 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Creating your mailing labels

Congratulations on creating your invitations! That’s the hard part done, but you still need to address the envelopes. We’ve already got all the addresses in our address book, together with an indication of who is invited, so we can use that information to print the addresses automatically.

We have two options here. First, it is possible to print addresses directly onto the envelopes. To do that, you just change the paper size to match the size of your envelopes and change the page orientation to landscape. Both settings are changed in the Page Layout ribbon. You can then add merge ﬁ elds to your envelope for the full address, as I’ll show you shortly. However, envelopes are thicker than paper and there’s a good chance the printer will get jammed. And, while all our invitations are the same size, sometimes you’ll want to address envelopes of different sizes. At Christmas, for example, you might send cards that come from several different packs.

That’s why I recommend that you create mailing labels instead. You can buy sheets of labels from most stationers and they come in standard sizes, which Word recog- nises. You can print a whole sheet of labels and then stick them onto your envelopes one by one. It’s much easier than addressing them by hand, and it’s less likely to go wrong than trying to print onto envelopes.

It is easy to create labels, but it can take a bit of poking around the ribbons (on the screen, not the printer!) to work out how to do it, so let me show you.

Use the backstage area or Ofﬁ ce button to start a new ﬁ le, and go to the Mailings ribbon.

Ignore the Labels button in the Create section. It’s a red herring.

Click the Start Mail Merge button, which is the third button from the left (you can see it in Figure 6.3). When the menu opens, click Labels.

191

12_711965-ch06.indd 19112_711965-ch06.indd 191 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Figure 6.10

The Label Options window will open, which looks like Figure 6.10. You should be able to ignore the printer information at the top of this window. A continuous-feed printer is one where all the sheets of paper are joined together, which nobody uses at home any more, so the page printer should already be selected.

In this window, you need to tell Word what kind of labels you are using. Usually, the packaging for the labels will say what type they are. If you’ve lost that, check the sheet of labels itself. The label type is often written across the back or in tiny text on the front. Use the pulldown menu in the Label Options window to select which label vendor you are using. This is the company that makes the label. If you are using Avery labels, for example (Avery is one of the most popular brands in the UK), choose Avery A4/A5 to make clear that it’s a sheet of UK-sized paper, or choose Avery US Letter if you’re in the US.

The product number should also be on the labels and might be described as a template number. My product number is L7160. Use the scrollbar to ﬁ nd it in the Product Number list and then click it. Take care with this because there are a lot of label numbers that look similar. The product numbers are sorted alphabetically, but there are a lot so it might take a while to ﬁ nd yours.

Because Avery is the most popular label type in the UK, own-brand labels from stationers often give an Avery template number. In that case, enter the vendor as Avery and then use the Avery product number provided.

192

12_711965-ch06.indd 19212_711965-ch06.indd 192 9/13/10 3:19 PM9/13/10 3:19 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Ignore the Details and New Label buttons. When you’ve entered the label type, click OK.

Your page has now been divided up into boxes for each label, and will look similar to Figure 6.11 (although the boxes will be empty). If you don’t see gridlines to mark the edges of the labels, go to the Layout ribbon on the far right (not the Page Layout ribbon) and click View Gridlines.

Now your page is set up to print on labels, you just need to design the labels. After creating your invitations, this process will feel familiar. If any of it is confusing, refer back to how we created invitations earlier in this chapter. To design your labels, take these steps:

1. Go back to the mailing ribbon. Use Select Recipients to link the labels to your address book. 2. Use Edit Recipients to select only those you are inviting (in my case, Londoners). If you don’t do this, you will have a label for everyone in your address book. 3. Click on the top left label. You can type whatever you want into this space and it will be printed on the fi rst label. We want to have our addressee’s details here, so click on the bottom of the Insert Merge Field button on the ribbon and insert the <> fi eld, followed by a space and the <>. 4. Lay out the rest of the address by inserting the merge fi elds and pressing Enter to start a new line. You don’t have to use Shift+Enter this time to avoid a large gap. Remember you can format the merge fi elds, so if you want the names to be bold, apply bold formatting where it says <> <>. You can see the end result for the fi rst label in Figure 6.11. 5. On the mailings ribbon, click the Update Labels button (shown in Figure 6.11). All the other labels will be updated so that they match the fi rst one, as shown in Figure 6.11. Word inserts a Rule called <>, which stops all the names and addresses being for the same person, but you don’t have to worry about it. If you make any changes to the fi rst label, press the Update Labels button again. 6. Click the Preview Results button to check that your labels look okay. 7. Click Finish & Merge and choose Edit Individual Documents. Your labels will be created in a new fi le.

193

12_711965-ch06.indd 19312_711965-ch06.indd 193 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

8. Print your labels using the backstage area or the Ofﬁ ce button, as you would normally print a document.

Update Labels

Figure 6.11

What else can you do?

You have now completed a simple mail merge project, using just a couple of pieces of information and a single page. You can create much more ambitious projects, however. Here are some suggestions: • Create wedding invitations. You can even create the reply slips and include the name of the invitees automatically, so all they have to do is tick a box and send the slip back to you to RSVP.

194

12_711965-ch06.indd 19412_711965-ch06.indd 194 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word • Create a set of posters with slightly different wording and a different email address for the response, so you can test which words are most effective before you do a larger poster campaign. • Create customised story books for your grandchildren. Start by making a spreadsheet that contains their names, favourite places, favourite animals, favourite toys, and so on. Then use Word to write a story that incorporates these items. Each time you want to mention the animal, for example, insert the favourite animal merge fi eld. When you merge, you will have a unique story for each child, featuring all their favourite things. You can change the story content by updating the spreadsheet and merging again, or you can reuse the same spreadsheet to fi ll in lots of different stories. The only limit is your imagination! • Create place settings if you’re having a formal dinner. • Create certifi cates for sports or pub quiz events. You can compare numbers in merge fi elds in a rule for conditional text, so you could add a ‘Top Scorer’! section for those scoring more than 90%. • You can create more attractive formatting for your address book, or print it on personal organiser paper (there’s a template on my website for personal organiser paper). If you want to put more than one address on a page, click Rules and then click Next Record. This adds a special code that advances to the next person. (You should add one before each new address.) • Create personalised newsletters, with sections that change according to the reader’s interests or age group. You might have a different lead story depending on whether the person is over or under 55, for example. • If you’ve ever played the card game where you compare statistics on your themed card with those on your competitor’s, you could use mail merge to create your own card deck. • Create labels for your Christmas cards.

If you want to perfect your knowledge of where all the different buttons are on the ribbon, Microsoft has created a game for you. Ribbon Hero chal- lenges you to use new features and gives you points when you do so. It’s free to download at www.ofﬁ celabs.com/ribbonhero.

195

12_711965-ch06.indd 19512_711965-ch06.indd 195 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Summary Mail merge enables you to insert information automatically from • an Excel spreadsheet into the right places in a Word document. Put dummy text of an appropriate length into your standard docu- • ment to help you to design it. Check the quality and completeness of your information in Excel • before bringing it into Word. To bring your Excel spreadsheet information into Word, use Select • Recipients on the Mailings ribbon, even if the spreadsheet isn’t about people. Use Edit Recipient List on the Mailings ribbon to change which rows • of your spreadsheet (known as ‘records’ in Word) will be used. If you’re using advanced fi ltering options, only combine them with • AND if you need all the fi lters to be true at the same time, in order for that person to be included (eg the person should be called Jones AND be from London). If you want either of the fi lters to qualify someone for inclusion, use • OR instead (eg the person should be called Jones OR be from London). Whenever you want to add information taken from your spread- • sheet, use Insert Merge Field on the Mailings ribbon to insert a mail merge code. You can use as much or as little of the information that is available • in each person’s record as you like. • Click the Preview Results button to test the mail merge. Don’t make any edits to individual invitations while in Preview • mode. Your changes will be discarded.

196

12_711965-ch06.indd 19612_711965-ch06.indd 196 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Creating personalised party invitations using Excel and Word

Click the Rules button and then select If…Then…Else to insert text • that changes depending on whether a fi eld contains a particular value or not. To create your invitation, click the Finish & Merge button and then • select Edit Individual Documents. Your invitations are created in a new document that opens. You can • edit these invitations, save them and print them. The language used by Word is specifi c to creating personalised let- • ters, but the applications of mail merge are much broader than that, and include invitations, certifi cates and much more.

197

12_711965-ch06.indd 19712_711965-ch06.indd 197 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Brain Training

This chapter used multiple applications and introduced some advanced concepts. How did you get on? Try this quiz to ﬁ nd out.

1. I keep my record collection database 4. If you want to add a personal in Excel. I want to use mail merge to greeting to a round-robin letter, you create a more attractive layout for can: printing. To bring my music informa- (a) Type ‘Dear’ and then use Insert tion into Word, I need to use: Merge Field to add the ﬁ rst name (a) Select Recipients code (b) Edit Recipient List (b) Type ‘Dear <>’ (c) Open in the Word 2010 backstage (c) Leave it blank and write it on area or behind the Word 2007 Ofﬁ ce afterwards button (d) Type the greeting for each person (d) The Rules button while previewing results

2. Each row (or record) represents a 5. To improve the quality of your mail different album. If I only want to merge, you can: include the albums by Pink Floyd in (a) Check the spreadsheet in Excel my mail merge, I should use: before starting (a) The Rules button (b) Preview the results of your mail (b) Edit Recipient List merge (c) Insert Merge Field (c) Make changes to individual invitations while previewing results (d) Sort (d) Edit your ﬁ nal invitations

3. For the mail merge to work correctly, information about the same item should be: (a) In the same record in Word (b) In the same ﬁ eld in Word (c) In the same row in Excel (d) In the same column in Excel

198

12_711965-ch06.indd 19812_711965-ch06.indd 198 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM Answers

Q1 – a

Q2 – b

Q3 – a and c

Q4 – a. Handwriting a greeting (c) can be a friendly touch, but it’s a bit of a cop-out if you’re only doing it because you don’t know how to do it with mail merge!

Q5 – a, b and d

199

12_711965-ch06.indd 19912_711965-ch06.indd 199 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM 12_711965-ch06.indd 20012_711965-ch06.indd 200 9/13/10 2:53 PM9/13/10 2:53 PM PART III Using Ofﬁ ce to Organise and Share Your Photos and Ideas

Toby Jones has sent us personalised invitations to his 5th birthday party. Black tie, or cocktail dress.

13_711965-pp03.indd 20113_711965-pp03.indd 201 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM 13_711965-pp03.indd 20213_711965-pp03.indd 202 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide 7 show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Micro- soft PowerPoint 2010 or Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 (see Introduc- tion), plus a connection to the Internet to download templates.

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball). Familiarity with common Microsoft Ofﬁ ce components including the ribbon, selecting text and simple formatting controls (see Chapter 1).

In the days when all cameras used ﬁ lm, people kept shoeboxes full of photos that needed sorting out, and stored the negatives in envelopes in places where they could never ﬁ nd them. A select few photos sometimes made it into an album, but many of them never saw the light of day again.

Now, thanks to the rise in cheap digital cameras and scanners, most of us keep our photos on our computers instead. The problem hasn’t improved, however; in fact, if anything, it has got worse. There’s no easy way to make an album of your best photos so that you can revisit your favourite memories. Instead, everything is mixed in together. Not only that, but there’s no convenient way to share your photos with friends, either.

14_711965-ch07.indd 20314_711965-ch07.indd 203 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

There are lots of tools available for managing your photos, but if you have a copy of the Microsoft Ofﬁ ce suite you will already have PowerPoint, which can do the job pretty well. In this project, you’ll learn how you can use PowerPoint to create a slide show of your favourite photos, complete with captions. You can think of the slide show as a digital photo album in which you can showcase your best pictures.

Along the way, you’ll also pick up valuable skills that will enable you to use Pow- erPoint if you are ever called upon to deliver a talk. If you’re sharing your experience with your local U3A group, for example, PowerPoint can make it easy to create presentation slides that look great and help to reinforce your message.

What is PowerPoint?

The most popular use of PowerPoint is to create slides to accompany a talk. While the managing director is droning on about the company’s sales ﬁ gures, a screen behind him will show the graphs and strategic priorities in a presentation created using PowerPoint. Obviously, I use the word ‘popular’ in the loosest sense here! The people who have to sit through presentations like that often end up hating PowerPoint. The end result is that the software gets the blame for the content created using it, which seems awfully unfair. I have a similar problem with panpipes – perhaps they can be used to perform interesting music, but I’ve never heard it.

Unlike panpipes, however, PowerPoint can be a great communications tool. It makes it easy to organise and share information and photos, especially if you’re already familiar with tools (like the ribbon) that feature in other Ofﬁ ce applications. If you’re giving a talk, it is best used for pictures that help to communicate your message or for pithy bullet-point summaries of what you’re saying. In this project, you’ll see how you can use a template to create a photo album quickly, complete with captions.

In PowerPoint, you create your documents one screenful at a time. Each screenful in PowerPoint is called a slide, which is a nod towards the traditional slide projec- tors that PowerPoint has, in many cases, replaced. The sequence of slides you create is called a PowerPoint presentation or slide show and is played back at full screen size, so that the viewers only see your content. Simply pressing a key enables you to move backwards and forwards through the slides. That means you’re always in control. If there’s a photo that prompts a lot of discussion or makes the group dissolve into giggles, you can keep that slide on show as long as you like and there’s no risk that you’ll miss the next one.

204

14_711965-ch07.indd 20414_711965-ch07.indd 204 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

Whether you email your ﬁ nished presentation to friends so they can enjoy it at home, or gather the family around the PC to show it, PowerPoint enables you to create presentations that people will love to watch. If you have access to a projector that connects to a computer, perhaps through your U3A group or local col- lege, you could even show your photos on a giant screen.

Many of the features in PowerPoint are similar to Word and Excel. Like those two programs, you can start PowerPoint in a number of different ways, but you are guaranteed to fi nd it in the Start menu (see the tips for starting Word in Chapter 1). PowerPoint 2010 has a backstage area for saving fi les and PowerPoint 2007 has the round Offi ce button, which is the same as in Word and Excel.

This is a fairly easy project and to avoid repetition, I’ll assume that you’re happy with concepts like the ribbon and text formatting, which were introduced in Chapter 1.

Starting a new PowerPoint document

We’re going to cut the work of creating a PowerPoint presentation by using one of the templates supplied with Ofﬁ ce. The template includes a set of standard slide designs that you can ﬁ ll with your own content, and probably represents a day or more of professional design work for your slide show. It’s free, so there’s no reason not to make the most of it.

For this project, I recommend you use the colourful Contemporary Photo Album template. For other photo albums, you might want to try the Classic Photo Album, which is based on charcoal tones that go particularly well with black and white photographs. There are lots of templates available for non-photo projects too, some of which are described at the end of this chapter.

The process for starting a new document is slightly different in PowerPoint 2010 and PowerPoint 2007, but is extremely similar to the process used to choose a Word template in Chapter 2.

In PowerPoint 2010, you’ll need to be connected to the Internet. You don’t need to use Internet Explorer (or any other browser) because PowerPoint will download templates from the Internet for you. If you’re using broadband, you’re probably already connected by default. If not, do whatever you normally do to connect to

205

14_711965-ch07.indd 20514_711965-ch07.indd 205 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

the Internet before collecting your email or visiting a website. Then follow these steps:

1. Click the File tab to go to the backstage area. 2. Click New. 3. Your options will look similar to Figure 2.1 in Chapter 2. Find the search box that says ‘Search Ofﬁ ce.com for templates’. Click on it and type ‘photo’ and then press the Enter key. 4. You will see a selection of photo templates for PowerPoint, which looks similar to the Word templates in Figure 2.2. Find the Contemporary Photo Album template and click it. 5. Click the Download button on the right side, underneath the template preview. The template will download from the Internet.

If you’re using PowerPoint 2007, the template is installed with the software, so you do not need an Internet connection and can follow these steps:

1. Click the round Ofﬁ ce button. 2. Click New. 3. Click Installed Templates on the left. 4. You will see a selection of photo templates for PowerPoint, which looks similar to the Word templates in Figure 2.3. Find the Contemporary Photo Album template and click it. 5. Click the Create button in the bottom right corner of this window.

Whichever version of PowerPoint you are using, you will now see your template opened in PowerPoint. It looks like Figure 7.1.

206

14_711965-ch07.indd 20614_711965-ch07.indd 206 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

From Beginning button

Undo Ribbon

Navigation pane Notes area Editing area

Figure 7.1

Previewing or showing your slide show

Some activities are risky because you don’t know how they’re going to turn out until you’ve ﬁ nished. You can’t taste a cake until it’s come out of the oven, for example. PowerPoint is risk-free because if you’re using a template, as we are here, you can get a ﬂ avour of the end result by viewing the demonstration slides.

207

14_711965-ch07.indd 20714_711965-ch07.indd 207 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

To start, click the Slide Show tab to bring its ribbon to the front. On the left of this ribbon is a group of controls for starting a slide show. Click the From Beginning button on the left, which is indicated on Figure 7.1.

The fi rst slide will now fi ll the screen. For our Contemporary Photo Album template, it’s a title slide that has a large picture of a sunfl ower. To move to the next slide, press the right arrow on the keyboard or any of the other next slide keys shown in Table 7.1. If you want to go back a slide, press the left arrow key, or any of the other options in Table 7.1. Don’t be overwhelmed by all the keyboard controls: you only need to remember one for each action.

Table 7.1 Navigating a PowerPoint slide show Action Keys Next slide N, right arrow, down arrow, space, Enter, left mouse button Previous slide P, left arrow, up arrow, Backspace Black out screen (hide slide show) B White out screen (hide slide show) W Finish Escape When you come to the end of the slide show, the screen will go black with a small message at the top that conﬁ rms you’re at the end. You can then press the Escape key to ﬁ nish the slide show. You can also use this key to abort the slide show at any time.

These are the same controls you would use if you were showing your own slide show to your friends, and you can use them for testing your slide show during development and for rehearsing your talk if you’re going to provide a commentary.

If you want to start the slide show from a slide you’ve selected (you’ll learn how to select a slide shortly), start the slide show using the From Current Slide button.

208

14_711965-ch07.indd 20814_711965-ch07.indd 208 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

Whichever version of PowerPoint you are using, you save fi les in the same way as you do in Word and Excel. Use the backstage area or Offi ce button to save your fi le, and the disk button in the top left or CTRL+S to update your saved fi le regularly.

In this template, the demonstration slides show vibrant pictures of ﬂ owers, bal- loons and other highly colourful objects. Don’t be distracted by the content, though. What you’re looking at is the variety of ways you can lay out your photos and captions.

If you don’t like the template you’ve chosen, then you can close it (go to Power- Point 2010’s backstage area or via PowerPoint 2007’s Ofﬁ ce button) and then start a new document with a new template.

Once you’ve found a template you’re happy with, save your presentation ﬁ le.

Familiarising yourself with the PowerPoint interface

Before you start to create your own presentation, take a moment to familiarise yourself with the basic PowerPoint interface. It’s made up of four elements, all indicated in Figure 7.1: • The ribbon. This runs across the top of the screen and includes some old friends like the Home ribbon featuring Font formatting options, which we’ve already seen in Word and Excel. • The navigation pane. This runs down the left of the screen and is used to move to a particular slide. It shows a small version of each slide (a ‘thumbnail’). If there are too many thumbnails to ﬁ t on the screen, there is a scroll bar in the navigation pane. When you click on a thumbnail, you jump to that slide in the editing area. • The editing area. This ﬁ lls most of the screen and usually shows one slide at a time. This is where you change the content of your slides. You can use the scrollbar to move between the slides, but it’s much easier to use the navigation pane.

209

14_711965-ch07.indd 20914_711965-ch07.indd 209 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser • The notes area. This isn’t always shown, but if you want to add notes to your presentation, just for you, this is where you type them. You can print out your notes so you can use them as a prompter when you’re talking about your slide show.

Have a go at clicking on the slides in the navigation pane to move between them in the editing area.

If the view has got a bit messy, go to the View ribbon and click Normal on the far left. If you can’t see all of a slide in the editing area, click the Fit to Window button on the View tab.

Deleting a slide

The ﬁ rst thing I recommend you do is delete all the demonstration slides. Other- wise, they can get in the way and you can end up with somebody else’s demo photos in the middle of your photo album.

To delete a slide, you click on it in the navigation pane and then press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also right-click on it and then select Delete Slide from the menu that appears. To delete all the slides at once, click one of the thumbnails, use CTRL+A to select all of them, and then press the Delete key.

You’re only removing these demonstration slides from this presentation, so they will still be in the template if you start another presentation using it. As you will see, you will still be able to make slides that look like these, too. All you’re doing here is stripping out the dummy content that comes with the template.

If you make a mistake deleting a slide, you can undo it by clicking the Undo button (shown in Figure 7.1) at the top of the screen or using CTRL+Z.

210

14_711965-ch07.indd 21014_711965-ch07.indd 210 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

Adding a new slide

Now you’ve deleted all the demo slides, you should be looking at a dull grey screen. Let’s ﬁ x that. To add a slide, click on the bottom half of the New Slide button on the Home ribbon (on the words, and not the icon above words), where indicated in Figure 7.2.

A menu opens to show you all the different slide layouts that are available in the current template. There’s a title slide, for example, which is what you see when you ﬁ rst open the template, and there are different slide layouts to accommodate various sizes and numbers of photos and captions. Depending on the number of slide layouts in the template, there might also be a scrollbar to view any that won’t ﬁ t on the screen.

Click here Scrollbar

Figure 7.2

211

14_711965-ch07.indd 21114_711965-ch07.indd 211 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Figure 7.2 shows the New Slide menu. Click the Album Cover slide, and a new slide is added to your presentation. You can see it in the editing area, and can see its thumbnail in the navigation pane.

This blank slide, shown in Figure 7.3, has a number of areas you can edit. Most obviously, you can click the icon in the middle of the picture area to add your own photo. When you click it, a ﬁ le browser opens, which you use to select the picture you’d like to go into this space. Your picture will be cropped to ﬁ t the space available.

If you click on the text box along the bottom or running up the right of the picture, you can type your own captions into the spaces. If you just want to get rid of the dummy text but don’t want to provide a caption, just type a space to overwrite the dummy text.

Figure 7.3

212

14_711965-ch07.indd 21214_711965-ch07.indd 212 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

It doesn’t matter if you later think of a wittier caption or ﬁ nd a more striking picture to start the album because you can easily go back and change your content. To replace a picture, right-click on it and then click Change Picture in the menu that opens. Note that this will change the picture to have the same shape as the picture you’re opening, though, which can result in gaps appearing if the new picture is a different shape to the old one. If you’ve only just added a picture and want to change it, it’s better to use Undo and then add a picture again because that will preserve the existing layout.

If you want to change something you’ve typed into a text box, you can click on it and can then edit it using the same keys as you would in Word or Excel (cursor keys, Backspace, Delete).

If you like the look of the demonstration presentation, you can also replace the content in that and use it as it is, without deleting or removing any slides. It does restrict you to using the template creator’s choice of layouts, though.

To add in your next slide, click the New Slide button again and choose the next slide layout you’d like to use. Each slide is added after the one you’re working on, which is selected in the navigation pane. If you’ve gone back to edit an earlier slide, click on the last slide in the navigation pane to make sure the new slide is added at the end of the presentation. If you want to insert a slide in the middle of your presentation, click the one that will go before it, and then add a new slide.

If you make a mistake and insert a slide in the wrong place, you can select it in the navigation pane and delete, or you can move it to where you want it. To move a slide:

1. Click its thumbnail in the navigation pane and hold down the left mouse button. 2. Move your mouse pointer up or down in the navigation pane. A horizontal line between two slides near your pointer shows where your slide will be moved to. As you move the mouse, this horizontal line will move too. 3. Release the mouse button when the horizontal line is in the right place. Your slide will be moved to where the line was.

213

14_711965-ch07.indd 21314_711965-ch07.indd 213 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

That’s almost everything you need to know about creating a presentation in Pow- erPoint. I told you it was easy! But there are a few special effects you can add, which can bring some life to your presentation.

Adding transitions and animations

When you are playing your slide show and press a key to move between different slides, one slide will fade out as the next fades in. This is known as a transition, but there is a wide range of other special effects you can use between slides. If you watched Top of the Pops in the 1980s, you’ll recognise a lot of these effects.

There are two types of special effect you can add: • Transitions, the effects used between slides. • Animations, the effects used on parts of a slide, such as a picture or a text box. They are usually used to reveal things in stages while you’re talking about them, so that people can’t read about what you’re going to say before you’ve said it, for example. To reveal something that is introduced with an animation during your slide show, you have to click a Next key (see Table 7.1).

The way to select transitions and animations and the way they work is slightly different in Ofﬁ ce 2010 and Ofﬁ ce 2007.

Adding transitions and animations in PowerPoint 2010

The most stunning transitions were introduced in PowerPoint 2010 and sadly aren’t available in PowerPoint 2007. In PowerPoint 2010, a few changes have been made to how transitions and animations are managed, too. There is now a dedicated ribbon for Transitions and a separate one for Animations. To apply a transition to a slide, follow these steps:

1. Select the slide by clicking it in the navigation pane. 2. Go to the Transitions ribbon, shown in Figure 7.4. 3. The transitions work in the same way as the Word Quick Styles list you learned about in Chapter 3. Click where indicated in Figure 7.4 to open all the transitions.

214

14_711965-ch07.indd 21414_711965-ch07.indd 214 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

4. When you roll the mouse over a transition’s icon, you will see it previewed on the slide in the editing area. 5. To add a transition to a slide, click it. If you want to remove a transition again, add the transition called None. 6. Click the Effect Options button (shown in Figure 7.4) to change options such as the direction of a wipe.

Effect Options

Open all transitions

Play animations

Figure 7.4

215

14_711965-ch07.indd 21514_711965-ch07.indd 215 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

You can also apply animations to the different parts of a slide. To do this, you simply:

1. Click the picture or the text box you want to animate. 2. Go to the Animations ribbon, shown in Figure 7.5. 3. Select one of the animation effects, in the same way as you select a transition. The effect is previewed on the slide below as you hover over the animation’s icon, and added to the content when you click it. The effects include ﬂ ying the content into the screen and fading it in. To remove an effect from a picture or text box, click it and then click the None animation.

Figure 7.5

Adding transitions and animations in PowerPoint 2007

PowerPoint 2007 has a more limited selection of transitions and animations, but they’re still an impressive way to move between different parts of your slide show. In Power- Point 2007, all the effects are on the same Animations ribbon, shown in Figure 7.6.

Animations pulldown menu

Open all transitions

Figure 7.6

To apply a transition to a slide, you need to:

1. Select the slide by clicking it in the navigation pane. 2. Go to the Animations ribbon, shown in Figure 7.6.

216

14_711965-ch07.indd 21614_711965-ch07.indd 216 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

3. The transitions work in the same way as the Word Quick Styles list you learned about in Chapter 3. Click where indicated in Figure 7.6 to open all of them. 4. When you roll the mouse over a transition’s icon, you will see it previewed on the slide in the editing area. 5. To add a transition to a slide, click it. If you want to remove a transition again, add the transition called None.

To apply an animation to a picture or text box, follow these three steps:

1. Click the picture or the text box you want to animate. 2. Go to the Animations ribbon, shown in Figure 7.6. 3. Use the pulldown menu indicated in Figure 7.6 to select an animation. When you hover over an animation, it is previewed in the editing area. Click it to add it, and click on No Animation in the pulldown menu to remove the effect again.

Previewing animations

To see the transition and animations applied to a particular slide, click on the shooting star underneath its slide number in the navigation pane (indicated in Figure 7.4). In Ofﬁ ce 2007, you can also click the Preview button on the Anima- tions ribbon. In Ofﬁ ce 2010, this will only show you the animations and you have to click the Preview button on the Transitions ribbon to see those.

To see the cumulative effect of all your transitions and animations, play the slide show from the start. The transitions are quick, but they can seem slow if viewers are forced to watch too many of them when they really want to see your photos. As a rule of thumb, the more stunning a transition is, the less frequently you should use it.

Creating an instant photo album

You’ve now learned everything you need to know to create albums that look great, and to edit other PowerPoint templates for other projects.

217

14_711965-ch07.indd 21714_711965-ch07.indd 217 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

The only drawback is that it can take a long time if you have a lot of photos to include. If you’re prepared to compromise on the quality and variety of the design, though, there is a shortcut you can take which will automate much of the process for you. To get the most from it, you’ll still need to use the skills you’ve learned in manipulating slides and adding transitions from the rest of this chapter.

You can create your photo album in under ﬁ ve minutes using this technique. Give it a go! Use the instructions in the section on previewing your slide show to see your results.

Most of the work you do to create an instant photo album is compressed into a single window, so refer to Figure 7.7 as you follow these steps:

1. Start a new blank presentation without using a template (via the backstage area in PowerPoint 2010 or Offi ce button in PowerPoint 2007). Leave the empty slide in the presentation for now. 2. Go to the Design ribbon. Here you can fi nd a set of design themes. When you roll the mouse over them, they will be previewed on your empty slide in the editing area. Find a theme that you like and remember its name. 3. Go to the Insert ribbon and click Photo Album. A window will open that looks like Figure 7.7. 4. Click the File/Disk button in the top left (see Figure 7.7 for this and the rest of the steps). A fi le browser will open, as shown in Figure 7.8. To select several fi les at the same time, hold down the CTRL key and then click them with the mouse. Selected fi les have a blue border, shown in Figure 7.8. You can deselect a fi le by using CTRL+clicking it again, so you can sometimes save time by using CTRL+A to select all photos and then using CTRL+click on the ones you don’t want. Click the Insert button indicated on Figure 7.8. 5. In the Picture layout pulldown menu, choose the layout you prefer. You can have one, two or four pictures to a slide and can choose to include a title for the slide too. 6. In the Frame shape pulldown menu, choose a frame if you want your pictures to have one. The same frame will be added to each picture.

218

14_711965-ch07.indd 21814_711965-ch07.indd 218 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

7. Where it says Theme, click the Browse button. A fi le browser will open. Use it to fi nd and open the theme you chose in Step 2. 8. If you want to have captions on all your pictures, tick the appropriate Picture Options tickbox. 9. If you want to change the order of any picture, click its fi lename and then use the move up and move down buttons. The slide numbers beside the fi lenames show where each new slide starts. To remove a picture, click its fi lename and then click the Remove button underneath the box of fi lenames. 10. You can add a text box for an extended caption after a photo. To do this, click the photo’s fi lename and then click the New Text Box button. 11. Click the Create button.

Step 9

Step 4

Step 10

Step 8

Move up/down

Step 5 Step 6

Step 7 Step 11

Figure 7.7

That might seem like a lot of work, but it enables you to create a presentation of 100 photos (or more!) in a minute or two. The price you pay is that the slide layout is more basic and every slide looks the same, but you can then edit the slides once you’ve got all your images in the presentation.

219

14_711965-ch07.indd 21914_711965-ch07.indd 219 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

You can insert more than one photo album in a presentation, one after another. To add some variety, you could insert two or more photo albums that use different slide layouts and then manually swap the slides around.

Selected files

Insert

Figure 7.8

Enabling automatic playback of your slide show

Slide shows of family photos can make a great backdrop to an anniversary party or wedding, particularly if you can plug your computer into a projector or large computer screen to display them. Here’s how you make your slide show play automatically:

1. Click one of the slides in the navigation pane and then use CTRL+A to select them all.

220

14_711965-ch07.indd 22014_711965-ch07.indd 220 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

2. Find the timing controls. In Offi ce 2010, go to the Transitions ribbon and they are in their own group on the right (see Figure 7.9). In Offi ce 2007, go to the Animations ribbon and you can fi nd them at the right-hand side of the Transi- tion to This Slide group. 3. In the Advance Slide options, tick the box beside After: (Offi ce 2007 says Automatically After:) and use the arrows to increase or decrease the time (all shown in Figure 7.9). For example, to have the slide changing every 30 seconds, change the numbers to read 00:30.00, or just click the number box and type ‘30’.

Those steps will set the same timings for each slide, but you can change the timing for an individual slide by selecting it (and only it) in the navigation pane, then following Steps 2 and 3 in the above instructions.

Tick box for automatic slide show

Increase and decrease time

Figure 7.9

What else can you do?

There’s much more to explore in PowerPoint. You can create presentations from scratch and design your own layouts, and you can insert your own text boxes and pictures anywhere using the Insert tab. You can move a photo or text box around by clicking it and dragging it, the same as you do in Word (see Chapter 3). You can use the Font and Paragraph controls on the Home ribbon to change your text appearance, as you did for your newsletter.

You can even change the contrast and brightness of your pictures using the Picture Tools Format ribbon, which you ﬁ rst used for your newsletter project in Word in Chapter 3. The same picture styles and effects are available as you used in Word to apply borders or 3D effects, too.

221

14_711965-ch07.indd 22114_711965-ch07.indd 221 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

The skills you’ve acquired in this project can be used for many other purposes, including: • Creating slides you can use if you’re leading a class or group, or giving a talk about your hobby or holiday. In the Presentations category of the templates, you can ﬁ nd presentations ideal for training or public speaking. • Customising an advent calendar. PowerPoint includes an advent calendar template (search the templates using the keyword ‘advent’ to ﬁ nd it). It shows a house with doors on it and you can click one each day to reveal a picture. There are detailed instructions for customising the pictures, so you could put photos of your family behind the doors. • Running a quiz. There’s a template (search for ‘quiz’) that shows the question and provides four question formats, including true or false and multiple choice. The answer is revealed using some great transition effects, such as all the incorrect options fading away one by one to leave the right answer on screen. • Turn your computer into a virtual art gallery. If you’re not working on it, why not use it to display art works, which change every few minutes.

222

14_711965-ch07.indd 22214_711965-ch07.indd 222 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Creating a slide show of your holiday photos using PowerPoint

Summary PowerPoint documents are created one screenful at a time. Each • screenful is called a slide. • A PowerPoint presentation or slide show is a sequence of slides. To play a slide show from the start, click the From Beginning button • on the Slide Show ribbon. You can use the cursor keys (and many others) to move backwards • and forwards through the slide show. • You can also set a timer so that slides advance automatically. Templates include a set of different slide layouts and some demon- • stration slides to showcase them. Click the New Slide words on the Home ribbon to add one of the • slide layouts from the template you’ve chosen. • Use the navigation pane to select a slide to edit, move or delete. In PowerPoint 2010, there is a separate ribbon for Transitions and • Animations. In PowerPoint 2007, both are on the Animations ribbon. • A transition is what happens when one slide moves to the next. An animation happens to something that is on a slide, such as a • picture. If you have a lot of photos, you can insert a photo album from the • Insert ribbon so you don’t have to add them to your slide show one at a time.

223

14_711965-ch07.indd 22314_711965-ch07.indd 223 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Brain Training

Do you know a PowerPoint from a plug socket, and a slide from a roundabout? Try this quick quiz. 1. Each screenful of content in Power- (c) A wipe Point is called a: (d) A brief power cut (a) Presentation (b) Text box 4. To see the animations that have been (c) Slide added to a slide, you can: (d) Transition (a) Select a slide, then play the slide show from that slide (b) Click the slide’s shooting star in the 2. To replace a picture in a navigation pane presentation: (c) Click the Preview button on the (a) Click on it Animations ribbon (b) Right-click on it and then Change (d) Hover over the animations Picture (c) Go to the Insert tab and choose Picture 5. The disadvantage of the Insert photo album feature is: (d) Click on it twice (a) It can’t cope with lots of photos (b) All the slides look the same 3. During a slide show, one slide fades away into nothing before another (c) The design is not as good as using a one fades in. This is: template (a) An animation (d) You can’t add any text boxes (b) A transition

Answers

Q1 – c Q2 – b Q3 – b Q4 – a, b and c Q5 – b and c

224

14_711965-ch07.indd 22414_711965-ch07.indd 224 9/13/10 2:54 PM9/13/10 2:54 PM Keeping a recipe 8 book with OneNote

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Microsoft OneNote 2010 or Microsoft OneNote 2007 (see Introduction).

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball). Familiarity with Word and Excel is helpful, particularly the ribbon, if you are using OneNote 2010.

As you discovered in the Introduction, the Home and Student edition of Ofﬁ ce comes with Microsoft OneNote. I wouldn’t be surprised if you’ve never heard of it; it’s the most overlooked program in the Ofﬁ ce suite, even though it is incredibly useful.

OneNote works like a scrapbook on your computer. You can use it to store all kinds of information, including text, pictures, screenshots and information from websites. It’s designed to enable you to capture ideas in lots of different ways, so that it doesn’t interrupt your train of thought and you can note your ideas as you have them. That’s why it’s ideal for organising creative projects like a novel or for storing research, such as information about your holiday destination. In this project, you’ll learn how to use it to create a recipe scrapbook.

OneNote has much in common with Word and Excel. These have been covered extensively in the ﬁ rst seven chapters of this book so, in this chapter, I’m going to assume that you know how to use them. There are a few differences, however. Most notably, if you’re using OneNote 2007 it doesn’t feature the ribbon you

15_711965-ch08.indd 22515_711965-ch08.indd 225 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

have, by now, learned to love. OneNote 2010 has brought the program up to date and introduced the ribbon. That means you might see some differences between some of my screenshots and what you’re using on your PC, but they will mostly be limited to the top of the screen and I’ll clarify any important differences as we go along.

To start OneNote, follow the same steps as you did for Word (see Chapter 1), Excel and PowerPoint. You might have an icon on your Windows desktop, but you are certain to ﬁ nd OneNote in your Windows Start menu.

Understanding the OneNote screen

Do you have a love affair with stationery? If you’re one of those super-organised people who spends more on A4 paper than chocolate, and can snap ring binders shut without cutting your ﬁ ngers, you’ll love OneNote. The software is organised along the same lines as a paper folder of notes.

In OneNote you have: • A notebook: This collects together all your related information. You can have lots of different notebooks, and OneNote automatically gives you one for work, one for personal stuff and one full of instructions. Think of each notebook as a ring binder. • Tabbed sections: These are used to organise pages into logical groups, much the same way as you might insert a tab page into a ring binder so you can ﬁ nd all the related pages easily. • Pages: Like Excel, a page in OneNote can be much bigger than a sheet of paper. A OneNote page can take up many sheets of paper if you print it out. Despite that, it’s still called a page. • Subpages: This is where the ﬁ ling metaphor breaks down. You could think of them as sticky notes attached to the pages in a folder, but since these subpages can also be extremely deep, that doesn’t quite sit right in the imagination. To avoid confusion, I recommend you forget about subpages. You might come across them, though, so it’s worth knowing they exist.

226

15_711965-ch08.indd 22615_711965-ch08.indd 226 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

Navigating OneNote 2010 and OneNote 2007

Figure 8.1 shows what OneNote 2010 looks like, and includes a picture from the guide that helps to explain how OneNote is structured. Down the left-hand side, written sideways up the screen, you can see your notebooks, including a OneNote Guide notebook that provides instructions on how to use OneNote. You can click the arrow indicated in Figure 8.1 to expand this view. Not only does that avoid you having to twist your neck to read the names, but it also shows you the tabbed sections within each notebook, as you can see in Figure 8.2. To go to a particular notebook, click its name.

It doesn’t matter if your notebooks are different from mine. Mine include guides to both OneNote 2007 and OneNote 2010 because I have both installed, but you will probably only have one version. The content of the guides is different between the versions too, so you might not be able to match my screenshots exactly.

The large white area in the middle of the screen is the current page you are reading or editing. I’ll show you how you can edit the content in OneNote pages later, but you can use the scrollbar on the right to move up and down the page to read the sample pages now.

Above the current page, you can see the tabs. In Figure 8.1, there is just one section tab called OneNote Guide. You click a tab to move to that section. To the right of the current page, you can see a list of all the pages within the current tabbed section of the notebook. The current page is highlighted in white in Figure 8.1, and you can click on the other pages to move to them.

To familiarise yourself with OneNote, it’s a good idea to try moving around the OneNote guide and sample pages provided when you ﬁ rst use the software. The way you do this is exactly the same in OneNote 2010 and OneNote 2007.

227

15_711965-ch08.indd 22715_711965-ch08.indd 227 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Expand notebooks

Create new section

Tab Formatting controls New page

Notebooks Current page Scrollbar

Pages in the current section

Figure 8.1

Understanding OneNote 2007

As I said at the start of this chapter, OneNote 2007 doesn’t feature the ribbon that you’ve used for all the other Ofﬁ ce programs in this book. For that reason, Figure 8.1 might look a bit alien to you if you’re running OneNote 2007, even though it’s only the top of the page and the user guide notebook that are different. Figure 8.2

228

15_711965-ch08.indd 22815_711965-ch08.indd 228 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

shows what OneNote 2007 looks like. I’ve clicked where indicated in Figure 8.1 to expand the notebooks on the left.

Create new section

Close expanded notebooks

Menu bar New page

Cut, copy, & paste Tab Formatting controls

Notebooks Current page Scrollbar

Pages in the current section

Figure 8.2

At the top of the screen, you can see OneNote 2007’s menu bar. When you click on one of the words here (such as File), a pulldown menu appears, from which you can select the option you want. You will see this in action in Figure 8.4 when

229

15_711965-ch08.indd 22915_711965-ch08.indd 229 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

you create a notebook. After you’ve selected an option, the menu disappears again. It takes a bit longer to use than the ribbon in OneNote 2010, because the OneNote 2010 ribbon lays your options out before you all the time, so you can access them using one click (if you want something in the current ribbon) or two (if you need to switch ribbon ﬁ rst). The menu system used in OneNote 2007 always requires you to click to open the pulldown menu ﬁ rst.

The advantage of this is that you have more space available on screen for your actual document. There’s always an upside!

Underneath the main menu bar, you can see a row of icons and buttons (a toolbar) that is used to add content to your OneNote pages and to format them (see Figure 8.2). This toolbar provides quicker access to some of the most popular features from the menus.

Many of the icons and buttons will be familiar to you from Word and Excel, including the cut, copy and paste icons. The text formatting controls are similar to Word too, including those used for font and text style (bold, italic, underline), for bullets and indentation, and for colouring text. If you put your mouse over an icon, a box will pop up to tell you what it does.

Don’t be afraid to try something out. If you make a mistake, you’ll ﬁ nd the Undo option in the Edit menu in OneNote 2007 or you can use the Undo button in the top left corner of OneNote 2010. CTRL+Z will undo, too.

Creating a new notebook for your recipes

When you start it, OneNote gives you a work notebook and a personal notebook, and suggests that you might like to keep recipes in your personal notebook, all stored in a single tabbed section called ‘Recipes’. That might be okay if you’re only going to have one or two recipes, but it becomes difﬁ cult to organise once you’ve got more than a handful.

I suggest you dedicate a new notebook to recipes. This will keep them separate from other personal stuff, such as your shopping lists and travel plans. It also means you can use tabbed sections to organise different recipes, with a section dedicated to starters, mains, puddings and those all-important cakes.

230

15_711965-ch08.indd 23015_711965-ch08.indd 230 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

Creating a new notebook in OneNote 2010

To create a notebook for your recipes in OneNote 2010, follow these steps:

1. Click the File tab to go into the backstage area. 2. Click New in the menu on the left. It will be highlighted in purple (see Figure 8.3). 3. Now work your way down the screen (see Figure 8.3). First, OneNote asks where to store the notebook. Click My Computer. 4. Enter a name for your notebook. Let’s call it ‘Recipes’. 5. Check where OneNote will store the ﬁ le. In most cases, the default location will be ﬁ ne and will be where your other notebooks are. 6. Click the Create Notebook button.

Figure 8.3

231

15_711965-ch08.indd 23115_711965-ch08.indd 231 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Creating a new notebook in OneNote 2007

Because there is no ribbon and backstage area in OneNote 2007, the way you create a new notebook here is a bit different. Here’s how it works:

1. Click File in the menu bar. The File pulldown menu will open, shown in Fig- ure 8.4. 2. Click New. A menu will open to the right of the pulldown menu, also shown in Figure 8.4. Choose Notebook from it.

Figure 8.4 3. A new window will open where you enter the options for your new notebook (see Figure 8.5). Enter ‘Recipes’ as the name for your notebook. Check that the Blank template is selected. Click the Next button. 4. Select the radio button to say that you will use the notebook on this computer. Click the Next button. 5. Check where OneNote will store the ﬁ le. In most cases, the default location will be ﬁ ne and will be where your other notebooks are. 6. Click the Create button.

232

15_711965-ch08.indd 23215_711965-ch08.indd 232 9/13/10 3:23 PM9/13/10 3:23 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

Your new recipes notebook is now ready to be ﬁ lled with yummy ideas!

Figure 8.5

There are templates for notebooks in both versions of OneNote, including a template for research and one for work. They have some sections already set up for you and include tips on how to use them.

How OneNote saves your work

After all the reminders and nagging in the rest of the book, I expect you’re having a Pavlovian response now: ‘I’ve created a ﬁ le, I need to save it! Where’s the Save button gone’? The short answer is that there isn’t one.

OneNote is one of the few places in Ofﬁ ce (and computing generally) where everything is saved automatically. Whenever you put something into a OneNote page, OneNote saves the updated notebook for you. That enables your note- taking to be as smooth as possible. You can make a note, close OneNote and get back to what you were doing, conﬁ dent that your brainwave has been captured.

233

15_711965-ch08.indd 23315_711965-ch08.indd 233 9/13/10 3:23 PM9/13/10 3:23 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Take care: in OneNote, all changes you make are saved. If you don’t want a particular change saved (overwriting an earlier version), undo that change straight away.

When using OneNote, people usually leave all their notebooks open. Because you can expand and organise notebooks using sections, you will most likely only need a handful on your computer. If they’re all open, it’s easy to ﬁ nd the right place to add your notes. When you open OneNote, it will automatically open up all the notebooks that you were using last time.

You should only rarely need to use the backstage area (in OneNote 2010) or the File menu (in OneNote 2007). They do have options to close and open notebooks, though, as well as various options for sharing notebooks.

If you have a notebook you don’t want to see any more (such as the OneNote guide notebook containing instructions), you can close it.

To close a notebook in OneNote 2010, click the File tab to go into the backstage area. You will see a list of notebooks that are open, and there is a scrollbar on the right if they won’t all ﬁ t at once. Find the one you want to close, and click the Set- tings button to the left of its name. A pulldown menu opens, from which you can select Close.

To close a notebook in OneNote 2007, ﬁ rst go to it by clicking its name on the left of the screen (see Figures 8.1 and 8.2). Click to open the File menu, and then click Close This Notebook.

A closed notebook disappears from view and won’t be opened automatically next time you start OneNote. If you want to open a closed notebook again, or want to open one that somebody has emailed to you, use the backstage area or File menu and then click Open. File opening works in the same way as in Word and Excel.

234

15_711965-ch08.indd 23415_711965-ch08.indd 234 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

Creating the tabs for your notebook

Whichever version of OneNote you are using, you should now have a blank notebook in front of you. If you go into other notebooks and want to come back to your recipe book, you should click it in the list of notebooks on the left (see Fig- ures 8.1 and 8.2).

As the ﬁ rst step in creating your recipe book, I recommend you add some tabbed sections to organise the different types of recipes you might have. This will make it easier to browse your recipes because it will gather similar types together and will enable you to see more of your recipe pages without scrolling.

The way you add a tabbed section is different in OneNote 2010 and OneNote 2007. In OneNote 2010, you click the empty tab with a star on it (indicated in Figure 8.1). In OneNote 2007, you click the New Section button on the toolbar, indicated in Figure 8.2. It just says ‘New’ on it.

When you click either of those, a new tab will be added to your notebook. Your cursor will be placed in the tab, so that you can type in a name for that section. When you’ve ﬁ nished typing the name, press the Enter key on the keyboard.

All notebooks have a section called ‘New Section 1’ when they are created. You can rename a section by right-clicking on its tab and selecting Rename. You can also right-click on a tab if you want to delete a section.

If you delete a tab, all of the pages within its section will also be deleted. Don’t delete a tab in this project unless you’re happy to lose all the recipes underneath it.

I suggest you create four sections for your notebook: starters, main courses, des- serts and cakes. You could create the ﬁ rst one by renaming the ‘New Section 1’ tab, and add new tabs for the others.

235

15_711965-ch08.indd 23515_711965-ch08.indd 235 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Adding your recipes

Now it’s time to gather up all those scraps of paper and bits of old envelope that you’ve jotted your recipes down on over the years. Let’s start to add our recipes. You’ll notice lots of similarities here with Word and Excel, but there are enough differences to keep you on your toes, too. I’ll ﬂ ag them up as we work through the recipes.

Adding a recipe page

As I said earlier, you can have OneNote pages that extend far off the screen. You could, theoretically, put all your cake recipes onto just one page, but that would involve a lot of scrolling around to browse what’s there. To make it easy to ﬁ nd your recipes and keep them organised, I recommend that you stick to having just one recipe per page.

When you create a section for a notebook, a blank page is added into it for you automatically. For your ﬁ rst recipe, you can use this. When you come to add more recipes, you will need to insert a new page for each one.

To insert a new page, ﬁ rst click the tab of the section where you would like to add the page. Then click the New Page button. You’ll ﬁ nd this at the top of the list of pages in the current section, on the right of the screen (see Figures 8.1 and 8.2). If the list of pages is not visible, click on the ‘expand’ arrow beside the New Page button at the top of the right-hand column.

OneNote automatically timestamps a page underneath its title with the time and date it was created.

Adding a title to your page

Every page in OneNote has its own title. You can see this on the page itself but, more importantly, it’s also used to help you ﬁ nd the right page in a notebook. The page title is what appears in the tabs on the right showing all the pages in a particular section. If you have a clear title, you can easily jump to the right recipe just

236

15_711965-ch08.indd 23615_711965-ch08.indd 236 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

by clicking on its tab on the right. If the title is ambiguous, you might have to read a few pages to ﬁ nd what you’re looking for.

At the top of each page is a dotted box with rounded corners (see Figure 8.2). This is the title box. Click on it, and you will see a cursor appear there, so that you can type in the name of your recipe. If your title is longer than the box, the box will expand to ﬁ t your title. Short titles are best, though, because there’s only room for a few words on the tabs on the right. Make sure you put the important words at the start of your title. If you write ‘Nana’s Recipe for Dumplings’, it will be shorted to ‘Nana’s Recipe for Du’, which could be dumplings or duck.

When you enter your title, you’ll see that it appears on that page’s tab on the right of the screen, so that you can easily ﬁ nd your way back to this page again later.

Adding a table of ingredients

Every good recipe starts with the ingredients so you can make sure that you’ve got everything before you begin. Nobody likes having to jog to the corner shop to pick up something they’ve forgotten while the pots are already boiling.

To create the ingredients list, we’re going to use a table that lays out the information in a simple grid. My recipe has ﬁ ve ingredients, and I want to make it easy to see the measures at a glance, so I’ll use a table that has two columns (one for the ingredient and one for the quantity) and ﬁ ve rows (one for each ingredient).

The way you insert a table differs depending on which version of OneNote you are using. • OneNote 2010: Go to the Insert ribbon and click Table on the left. A menu will open showing you a grid of empty boxes (see Figure 8.6). As you move your mouse pointer over this grid, you will see that the boxes to the left and above it are highlighted. That represents the size and shape of table you want to insert. If you want a table that is two columns wide by fi ve rows deep, then put your mouse pointer over the square that is in the second column, fi ve boxes down. Click the left mouse button to confi rm your table size. • OneNote 2007: Click Table on the menu bar to open the Table menu, and then choose Insert Table from the pulldown menu. A window will open (see Figure 8.7), inviting you to enter the number of columns and rows you want into two

237

15_711965-ch08.indd 23715_711965-ch08.indd 237 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

boxes. Click on each box in turn and type in the appropriate numbers, and then press OK.

If you’re using OneNote 2010 and ﬁ nd inserting a table ﬁ ddly, you can just type in the values as you do in OneNote 2007. To do that, select Insert Table from the Table menu, shown in Figure 8.6.

Insert table

Figure 8.6

Figure 8.7

You should now see a grey grid on your recipe page, which is the outline of your empty table. Completing the table is easy. You can click on any of the empty boxes (or ‘cells’) and just type what you want to go into that space. You can also click the cell in the top left, and enter information into the cells in turn, using the Tab key to move to the next cell, working from left to right and from top to bottom.

238

15_711965-ch08.indd 23815_711965-ch08.indd 238 9/13/10 3:23 PM9/13/10 3:23 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

If you remember another ingredient at the last minute, you can easily add another row. When your cursor is in the last cell in the bottom right of the table, press the Tab key on the keyboard and a new row will appear. There are options for adding and deleting rows, which you can ﬁ nd by right-clicking on the table and then choosing Table on the menu that appears. In OneNote 2010, there is also a Table Tools Layout ribbon that offers easier access to these options. It appears when you are editing your table (see Figure 8.8).

You can also use the cursor keys to move around the cells. The up and down cursor keys take you to the cell above or below. The left and right keys will move your text cursor through the words you are editing, and will then move you to the next cell to the left or right when you reach the end of the current cell’s content.

Don’t worry about the size of the cells. They start off tiny, but they expand as you type more information into them. OneNote will resize the table automatically as you type into it, to try to keep it easy to read.

Figure 8.8 shows my recipe page so far, with the ingredients table at the top of it.

Figure 8.8

239

15_711965-ch08.indd 23915_711965-ch08.indd 239 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

There is a table feature in Word and PowerPoint too, and it works in a similar way to the OneNote 2010 tables. If you like this way of presenting information, why not try it in Word too?

Adding your recipe content

Now we have listed our ingredients, we need to add the magic instructions that turn them into something delicious.

OneNote will let you type information anywhere you want on the page. Place your mouse cursor somewhere, click and start typing. It’s as easy as that. As in Word, when you reach the right side of the screen, OneNote will move you to the start of the next line. To force the cursor to move to a new line now, press the Enter key. Unlike Word, you’ll need to press it twice if you want to have a clear space between the paragraphs.

You can use many of the same basic formatting options that you know from Word. You can change the font and text size; use bold, italic or underlined text; add bullet points, change text colours; and indent paragraphs. In OneNote 2010, you’ll ﬁ nd these options in the Basic Text group of the Home ribbon. In OneNote 2007, the formatting controls are on the toolbar and are shown in Figure 8.2. If you’ve learned keyboard shortcuts for formatting text in Word, such as CTRL+B for bold text, they will also work here.

There are cut, copy and paste options, as you might expect. In OneNote 2010, these are on the Home ribbon. In OneNote 2007, click Edit on the menu bar (see Figure 8.2) to ﬁ nd them. The CTRL+X (cut), CTRL+C (copy), and CTRL+V (paste) shortcuts also work, and there are icons on the toolbar (see Figure 8.2).

Sometimes you’ll want to adapt recipes, which might mean changing the quantities of ingredients. OneNote includes a simple calculator. If you enter a sum followed by the equals sign and a space (such as 320*5= ), OneNote will insert the answer for you. You can delete the sum part and leave just the answer on screen if you want, or keep all of it. OneNote can’t do advanced formulae like Excel can, but this handy feature can save you messing around with a calculator.

240

15_711965-ch08.indd 24015_711965-ch08.indd 240 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

Get the equals sign in the right place. In Excel, it goes at the start. In One- Note, it goes at the end.

Inserting pictures into your page

If you’ve taken some pictures of the ﬁ nished meal or of the ingredients from the allotment, as I have, why not add them to your recipe book? In OneNote 2010, go to the Insert ribbon and click Picture. In OneNote 2007, click Insert on the menu bar, then click Pictures and choose From Files. Whichever version you are using, you can then browse through the ﬁ les on your computer and choose a picture to insert.

The picture will be inserted into your page at full size, which is likely to be too large to be useful. Like pictures in Word, there are resizing controls on the side and in the corners, which you can use to shrink the image (see Figure 2.5 in Chap- ter 2). In OneNote 2010, just click the picture to make the resizing controls appear. OneNote 2007 is a little trickier: you need to put your mouse pointer over the image and then click on the dotted line that appears around it. The resizing controls will then appear and you can use them in the usual way.

In OneNote 2010, you can move a picture by clicking on it, holding down the mouse button and then moving the mouse. In OneNote 2007, you’ll need to put your mouse pointer over the dotted line around the edge of the picture so that the pointer turns into a four-headed cursor. You can then click, hold down the mouse button, and move the mouse to reposition the image.

If it looks like your recipe has vanished, don’t panic – it’s probably just been pushed off the bottom of the screen. Inserting a large picture can force your other content to be bumped around the page to make room, but I’ll show you how you can move things to where they belong.

Moving your content around the page

When you add text or tables in OneNote, they go into a box, which is a bit like a text box in Word. As you type into the box, you can see its edges, as you can see for my recipe instructions in Figure 8.9. When you ﬁ nish editing in that box, its outline disappears.

241

15_711965-ch08.indd 24115_711965-ch08.indd 241 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Figure 8.9

To move a box of content, ﬁ rst click on it to make its borders appear. The thick border along the top is like a handle that you can use to pick up the box and move it around. To use it, just put the mouse pointer over this border so that the pointer turns into a four-headed cursor. Click the left mouse button and keep it held down. As you move the mouse, the box will follow, so you can position it where you want it. When you release the mouse button, the box will drop into place.

If you want to change the width of a box, click on its right border and keep the mouse button held down. Move the mouse left or right, and the box will stretch or shrink accordingly. Take care not to make boxes too wide. OneNote will keep them to a width that will print okay on an A4 page, but if you make the boxes wider or add content to the right of where they normally end, your recipes might spill over onto more than one page widthways.

242

15_711965-ch08.indd 24215_711965-ch08.indd 242 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

Capturing recipes from the Internet

There are many great recipes on the Internet, and you can easily add them to your OneNote recipe book. There, you can annotate them with your own experiences.

There isn’t space here to explain how to ﬁ nd recipes on the Internet or how to use a web browser, but there are detailed instructions for getting started with a web browser in the appendix to Social Networking for the Older and Wiser and at www.sean.co.uk.

First, ﬁ nd a recipe on the Internet that you want to keep. There are then several different ways you can add it to OneNote from Internet Explorer: • Click to open the Tools menu on the browser and then select Send to OneNote (shown in Figure 8.10). Although this strips out most of the design of the page, it will include navigation links and buttons. You can easily edit and delete anything you don’t need. • Alternatively, click the arrow beside the Print button to open the print menu (Figure 8.10) and choose Print. When the print options open, change the printer to ‘Send to OneNote 2010’ (or 2007, accordingly). This inserts a picture of the printed page into your recipe book. The upside is that the printed page tends to look nicer, but the downside is that you can’t edit the text. You can add your own text on top of the webpage, though. (You can use the printer driver in this way to send information from any program to OneNote.) • Another way is to select the text you want to add to OneNote by clicking at the start of it, holding down the mouse button and moving the mouse pointer to the end of the text. Your selected text will be highlighted. Release the left mouse button, and then right-click anywhere on your selected text. From the menu that opens, choose ‘Send to OneNote’. (This is the least reliable method.) • You can also select the text you want in the webpage (as described in the previous technique), but use the CTRL+C keyboard shortcut to copy it from the webpage and use CTRL+V to paste it into a OneNote page. You can paste into OneNote from most programs. You sacriﬁ ce advanced formatting features, and spreadsheets will also lose their formulae when you paste from them. • If you arrange a OneNote window and a browser page side by side on the screen, you can drag the selected text from the webpage into OneNote. You can use this approach for other applications too (such as Word).

243

15_711965-ch08.indd 24315_711965-ch08.indd 243 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser • Another technique is to insert a screen clipping. This is like taking a photo of part of the screen. First, click Internet Explorer. Then click OneNote and use the Insert ribbon (in OneNote 2010) or Insert menu (in OneNote 2007) to insert a Screen Clipping. OneNote will disappear from view, and the Internet Explorer screen underneath it will be tinted white. Click in the top left corner of where you’d like to start your clipping, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer to the bottom right corner of the area you want to ‘grab’. On screen, it will appear in non-tinted colours so you can easily see what you’re selecting. When you release the mouse button, OneNote will insert a picture of the part of the screen that you selected. This option won’t let you edit the text in OneNote, and you’re limited to grabbing one screenful at a time.

Open print menu

Send to OneNote Reproduced by permission of Eliza James, www.therecipeblog.co.uk Figure 8.10

244

15_711965-ch08.indd 24415_711965-ch08.indd 244 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

If you use Send to OneNote or the printer option for OneNote 2010, you will be asked which notebook, section or page to add your content to, as shown in Figure 8.11. It’s usually tidiest to click on the appropriate section and then click OK, and let OneNote make a new page for your recipe.

Figure 8.11

OneNote 2007 doesn’t know where it should put the recipes from the Internet, and it doesn’t ask, so it puts them into a separate section called Unﬁ led Notes. Once you’ve added a recipe to your Unﬁ led Notes, you should move it to the right place in your recipe notebook.

To do that, follow these steps, and refer to Figure 8.12:

1. Go to your Unﬁ led Notes. You’ll ﬁ nd them at the bottom of your list of notebooks on the left. 2. Find your recipe by browsing the pages listed on the right. The latest page will be at the bottom. 3. OneNote will give your page a title if you use Send to OneNote. Otherwise, you need to complete the title box at the top of the page.

245

15_711965-ch08.indd 24515_711965-ch08.indd 245 9/13/10 3:23 PM9/13/10 3:23 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

4. Click the page’s tab on the right and keep the mouse button held down. Move the mouse across the screen to your notebook list on the left, so that the pointer is on top of the appropriate section of your Recipes notebook, indicated in Figure 8.12. 5. When you release your mouse button, the page will be moved from your Unﬁ led Notes into the correct section of your Recipes notebook.

You can also use this technique to move pages between different sections of your recipe notebook, or to move pages between other notebooks.

Step 2 Search box

Step 4

Step 1 Reproduced by permission of Eliza James, www.therecipeblog.co.uk Figure 8.12

246

15_711965-ch08.indd 24615_711965-ch08.indd 246 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

You can change the order of pages within a section. Click a page’s tab on the right, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse up or down. When you release the mouse button, the page will be moved to where your mouse pointer is in the pages list.

Searching your recipes by ingredient

If you want to make creative use of leftovers, or need to whip up something impressive from the meagre remains of the larder at the end of the week, you can search your recipe book for ideas. OneNote is smart enough to search for text inside pictures, too, so it can ﬁ nd your chosen words in screen clippings and printed pages, as well as in editable text.

The search box is at the top right of the screen, underneath the ribbon or toolbar. It’s indicated for OneNote 2007 in Figure 8.12 and has a similar look and location in OneNote 2010.

Click on the search box, type in the name of your spare ingredient – in this example, courgettes – and press Enter. OneNote will ﬁ nd every recipe containing courgettes, and will also highlight every time courgettes are mentioned in those recipes. In OneNote 2007, you are taken to your ﬁ rst search result (in this case, ratatouille) and the search box is replaced with controls to move through the results (see Figure 8.13). Use the arrows to work your way through each mention of the search term in each recipe. Any pages containing your ingredient will have their tabs highlighted on the right-hand side of the page, as well. Click View List to see a list of pages containing your ingredient, and click the Close button to cancel the search results.

In OneNote 2010, when you search, a menu opens showing you all the pages that include that search term. Click a page to visit it.

Printing recipes

Computers are great, but in the kitchen you need something that can get splat- tered with batter without upsetting anyone. You can print any of your recipe pages, but there are a few differences to Word.

247

15_711965-ch08.indd 24715_711965-ch08.indd 247 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Cancel search

See all pages

Move through search results

Figure 8.13

Firstly, since your recipe page could be wider than a sheet of paper, it’s a good idea to preview the way it’s going to look on the page before you print it out. To do that, fi rst click the recipe you want in your recipe book. Then go to the backstage area and select Print (in Offi ce 2010) or click the File menu (in Offi ce 2007). Click Print Preview. When the preview opens, you will see that one of the options is to scale to the paper width. This is a good way to fi x pages that are slightly too wide to fi t on a sheet of paper. However, you might have to go back to that page of your recipe book and change the layout if you’ve gone wildly off the page.

248

15_711965-ch08.indd 24815_711965-ch08.indd 248 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

The formatting options in OneNote are a bit limited, so if you want to do something fancier, you can format your recipe in Word before printing it. In Ofﬁ ce 2010, go to the backstage area, click Send and then click Send to Word. In Ofﬁ ce 2007, click the File menu, click ‘Send to’ and then choose Word. The recipe will open in a new document in Word. From there, you can edit and format it as you would any other Word document. You could even incorporate it into your newsletter (see Chapter 3) or a letter to a friend (see Chapter 1).

Remember that Word doesn’t automatically save all your work in the way that OneNote does, so don’t forget to save it.

What else can you do?

OneNote is an extremely versatile tool for collecting and organising information and ideas. Here are some other ways you can use it: • Organise your holiday research. You can gather together maps, ﬂ ight itineraries, your Excel budget and more, and keep them all in a single notebook. • Keep scrapbooks of your hobbies, such as train spotting. You can combine your own photos, relevant webpages and your own notes, and keep them all in one place. You can search the text inside photos too, so if you’ve photographed trains that have a name on the side, you can quickly ﬁ nd them. • Plan your novel. One person I know has a notebook with separate tabs for plot, characters, locations, chapters, research and background information. He drags the chapter outlines around the page to restructure the story. • Plan a wedding or other major celebration, keeping information from all the different suppliers in one place. • Keep a Christmas shopping list. You can store the details of the gifts you would like to buy, including where you can buy them. If you want to password protect a section of your notebook, right-click its tab and choose Password Protect This Section. • Keep a collection of interesting cuttings from the Internet. Unlike when you add a page to your browser Favorites, you’ll have the information saved even if the website shuts down. 249

15_711965-ch08.indd 24915_711965-ch08.indd 249 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Summary • OneNote is a like a scrapbook on your computer. Each notebook is divided into tabbed sections that contain your • pages. • A OneNote page can be much bigger than a sheet of paper. Your notebooks are listed on the left, the tabs for sections run along • the top, and the tabs for individual pages are on the right. OneNote 2010 has a ribbon, while OneNote 2007 uses a menu bar • instead. You automatically have a work notebook and a personal notebook, • but it’s a good idea to create a new notebook for each new project. OneNote saves your work automatically, so make sure you undo • any edits you don’t want to be saved. Make each page speciﬁ c to one subject, such as one recipe. It’s • easier to navigate lots of short pages than it is to ﬁ nd something in a few long ones. • Use short, descriptive names for your page titles. You can insert a table to lay out information such as ingredients. • The table feature is also available in Word and PowerPoint. You can type content and insert pictures anywhere you want on a • OneNote page. • To get OneNote to calculate a sum for you, put an equals sign after it. To move a box of content, click its top border and drag it with • the mouse. • To change a box’s width, click its right border and drag it left or right.

250

15_711965-ch08.indd 25015_711965-ch08.indd 250 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Keeping a recipe book with OneNote

There are lots of ways to add web content into OneNote, such as • using the Print button, or using the Send to OneNote feature. You can use the print option and cut and paste to add content to • OneNote from any program. If you don’t specify where to put content (which is not an option in • OneNote 2007), it is added to your Unﬁ led Notes section. To move a page, click its tab and drag it onto the notebook section • you want to move it into. • You can search your notebooks by keyword. You can print directly from OneNote, or send your content to Word • to create a more attractive layout ﬁ rst. OneNote is ideal for any projects that involve gathering or organis- • ing information or ideas.

251

15_711965-ch08.indd 25115_711965-ch08.indd 251 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Brain Training

I hope I’ve convinced you that OneNote is a valuable addition to the Ofﬁ ce suite. Let’s see how much you can remember with a quick quiz.

1. OneNote is different to all the other (c) Outline schedule for planting seeds Offi ce applications because: (d) Untitled (a) It doesn’t use the ribbon (b) It enables you to make tables 4. To ensure your recipes print well, (c) It saves everything automatically you could: (d) You can search your fi les (a) Avoid placing content too far to the right (b) Use the ‘Scale to width’ feature in 2. The tabs at the top of the current Print Preview page show you: (c) Tidy it up in Word before printing (a) All your notebooks (d) Print it using Internet Explorer (b) All the pages in your current section (c) All the sections in your current notebook 5. To add content from Word into OneNote, you could: (d) All the subpages on the current page (a) Copy the content in Word and then paste it into a OneNote page 3. A good page title would be: (b) Use the Printer options in Word to (a) Rough notes for upcoming project on ‘Send to OneNote’ allotment (c) Right-click and use the ‘Send to (b) Seed planting dates OneNote’ option (d) Open a Word fi le in OneNote

Answers

Q1 – a (if you use OneNote 2007) and c are true. Other applications also offer tables and a ‘Find’ or search feature.

Q2 – c Q3 – b Q4 – a, b and c Q5 – a and b (c only works in Internet Explorer)

252

15_711965-ch08.indd 25215_711965-ch08.indd 252 9/13/10 2:55 PM9/13/10 2:55 PM Using email to 9 share your ideas and documents

Equipment needed: Computer (desktop or laptop) running Microsoft Ofﬁ ce 2010 or Microsoft Ofﬁ ce 2007, a web browser (such as Internet Explorer) and a connection to the Internet.

Skills needed: Ability to use a computer keyboard and mouse (or trackball). Understanding of how to use a web browser to visit websites. Familiarity with the Offi ce 2010 backstage area and the Offi ce button in Offi ce 2007 (see Chapter 1). Familiarity with using Windows to fi nd and run programs.

While some of the documents you create using Microsoft Ofﬁ ce will be private, many are intended for sharing. There’s not much point creating a newsletter that nobody reads, or designing a poster that doesn’t get posted anywhere.

In this chapter, I’ll show you how you can use email to send your documents to other people. There is an email program in the Ofﬁ ce Suite, called Outlook, but it’s only available in the more expensive versions of the Ofﬁ ce suite and so only tends to be used in the workplace.

I’ll tell you about Windows Live Mail, which is a free email program from Micro- soft. I’ll show you how to set it up and how you can use it to send people your Ofﬁ ce documents.

16_711965-ch09.indd 25316_711965-ch09.indd 253 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

There are lots of other cheap or free email programs available, but it isn’t possible to cover them all here. If you’re already using email happily, you can stick with your current email program and email address without a problem. Skip ahead to Emailing your Microsoft Ofﬁ ce ﬁ les, later in this chapter.

You will need a connection to the Internet, for which you will have to pay a subscription. You can often get an Internet connection from the company that provides your phone line or cable/satellite TV subscription. You might be able to save money by shopping around, though. In this chapter, I’m going to assume that you already have a working Internet connection.

I’m also going to assume that you already understand the basics of using a web browser to view webpages on the Internet. If you don’t already know how to do this, why not invite a web-savvy friend around for tea and biscuits? It doesn’t take long to learn to use the web, and it unlocks a whole world of knowledge, enter- tainment and communication.

There is a tutorial on this in an appendix to Social Networking for the Older and Wiser and you can ﬁ nd it on my website. You can also ﬁ nd all the links contained in this book at www.sean.co.uk, to save you having to type them in.

What is email?

Email is short for electronic mail, and it’s like a computer version of the real-world postal service. • In the real world, you write your letter, maybe attach a photo or newspaper clipping you think the recipient might like, pop it all in an envelope, write the address on the front of the envelope, attach a stamp and then stick it in the pillar box. The postal service collects your letter and delivers it, using a combination of bikes, little red vans, and black and white cats. • When using email, you write your message, perhaps attach some Ofﬁ ce ﬁ les that you want to send at the same time, type in the recipient’s email address, and then click Send. Your email provider takes your message and delivers it, using a combination of computers and wires, all over the world.

254

16_711965-ch09.indd 25416_711965-ch09.indd 254 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

To be able to send and receive email messages, you need to have an email address. This is like your postal address: it’s where your messages are delivered to. You will probably get one or more email addresses free with your Internet connection, but I’ll show you how to register for a free Hotmail email address.

Setting up email on your PC

Hotmail is a free email service provided by Microsoft. Hotmail takes care of delivering your messages, and gives you a place to have yours delivered to. It also enables you to read and write emails using a website at www.hotmail.com. The advantage of this is that you can read and send emails anywhere you can get an Internet connection, from the local library to a campsite Internet café in France.

The Hotmail website is not as easy to use as proper email software on your computer, though, so I’m going to show you how to use a free email program called Windows Live Mail to read your Hotmail emails.

The names can get a bit confusing, but you don’t have to worry about them too much. In short: Hotmail is your postal service; Windows Live Mail is how you will read and write messages.

When it launched, Hotmail was originally capitalised as HoTMaiL. That’s because HTML is the code used to build webpages, and Hotmail was the ﬁ rst service to enable you to send and receive emails using a webpage.

Creating your Hotmail account

The ﬁ rst step is to sign up with Hotmail. This is the process of registering your details with Hotmail so that it can create an email address for you. It won’t cost you anything and you can sign up in under half an hour (perhaps in just a few minutes if you type quickly!).

255

16_711965-ch09.indd 25516_711965-ch09.indd 255 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Companies sometimes change the design of their websites and move things around a bit, so in this chapter you might spot a few differences between your experience and mine. Any changes are likely to be minor, though, and are unlikely to cause too many difﬁ culties.

Figure 9.1

Here is how you sign up with Hotmail:

1. Open your web browser, which is probably called Internet Explorer. If you read the news online or shop on the Internet, your browser is the program you use to do that. 2. Go to the website www.hotmail.com. 3. Click the button to Sign up for a new account.

256

16_711965-ch09.indd 25616_711965-ch09.indd 256 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

4. You now see the registration form, which looks like Figure 9.1. 5. You need to invent the fi rst half of your email address. It will end with @hotmail.co.uk or @live.co.uk, depending on which you choose. Every email address must be unique, and with over 280 million people already registered at Hotmail, you will be extremely lucky to get your fi rst choice. Enter your name or something similar and then click Check availability. If someone’s already snaffl ed your preferred name, Hotmail will suggest some alternatives you could use, or you could try typing in something else. It doesn’t have to be your name: you could use your favourite band or TV show for inspiration. 6. You need to create a password. This ensures that only you can use your email address, so make sure it’s secure. Your password must be between seven and 16 characters long. To make it harder for someone else to get into your account, don’t use words in the dictionary or common names. Use a combination of letters, numbers and symbols. Hotmail won’t show you what you type on screen, in case somebody reads it over your shoulder, so you must type it into two boxes to check you’ve entered it correctly.

A good way to create a secure but memorable password is to use the initial letters from a line of a song, and add the year it was released in numbers to the end.

7. If you have another email address, you can provide it here. This allows you to recover your Hotmail email address if you ever forget your password. Other- wise, click the link to choose a security question. You can then enter your mother’s maiden name, your grandfather’s job or the name of your best friend at school (among other things). These questions are used to let you back into Hotmail if you lose your password, so make sure they are as unguessable as your password but absolutely memorable to you. 8. Enter your personal details. Your name will appear as the person your email messages come from. You’re also asked your country, postcode, gender and birth year. You have to complete these boxes. If you don’t want to tell Micro- soft this information and decide to ﬁ b, then make sure you remember what you enter. Microsoft might use this information to identify you if you lose your password.

257

16_711965-ch09.indd 25716_711965-ch09.indd 257 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

9. The last step feels like something from the Krypton Factor. You have to decipher some text on the screen or a mufﬂ ed audio recording to prove that you’re a real person. This can be a bit difﬁ cult and it might take a few goes before you get it right (it usually does for me). 10. You can click the links to read the service agreement and privacy statement if you want to, but there’s unlikely to be anything scary in there. To create your account, click the button to say that you accept them.

When you ﬁ nish, you will see the Hotmail website. You can use this to send, receive and read emails, and you can use your new email address and password to log in from anywhere in the world to do this (just visit www.hotmail.com to start).

However, I’ll show you how you can send emails using software on your computer at home.

Installing Windows Live Mail

Windows Live Mail is a program for your computer that enables you to write and read emails. Using this program, your emails are stored on your PC, so you can read them even when you’re not connected to the Internet. You can even write messages when you’re not connected to the Internet and get the program to send them when you next connect. If you have other email addresses, such as Google- mail (Gmail) or Yahoo addresses, you can use Windows Live Mail to access them all in one place.

To get Windows Live Mail on your computer, you need to download the software from the ofﬁ cial Microsoft website and then install it on your computer.

To install Windows Live Mail, follow these steps:

1. Open your web browser and go to the website http://explore.live.com/ windows-live-mail 2. Click the button to Download now. 3. When you are asked if you want to Run, Save or Cancel the download, click Save.

258

16_711965-ch09.indd 25816_711965-ch09.indd 258 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

4. When the fi le browser opens, choose somewhere to save the program. I recommend you put it on the desktop. The program will then download to your computer. You’ll have time for a sip of tea or a whole cup, depending on how fast your Internet connection is. 5. Go to where you saved the program. The program is called wlsetup-web.exe. You can hold down the Windows key on the keyboard and tap D to go to the desktop quickly. 6. Double-click on wlsetup-web.exe. Depending on the version of Windows you are using, you might see a warning message. To protect your computer and data, it’s usually not a good idea to install programs from the Internet. But this one has been downloaded from an offi cial Microsoft website, so it’s safe. Click the buttons to confi rm that you do want to allow the program to make changes to your computer if asked, and/or that you’re happy to run it. 7. The installation program will start, as shown in Figure 9.2. Windows Live also has programs for chatting with people in real time (Messenger), managing your photos (Photo Gallery), publishing on the Internet (Writer), protecting children on the Internet (Family Safety), and watching animations in websites (Silverlight). There is also a Toolbar for Internet Explorer that provides easy access to your email and Microsoft’s Bing search engine. They’re all free, so you can choose to install as many as you want. If you don’t want any of these programs, untick the box beside its name. For our purposes, the important thing is to make sure the box beside Mail is ticked (see Figure 9.2) to confi rm you want to install that. 8. Click where indicated in Figure 9.2 to install the software. 9. Windows might need to close some programs before the installation can continue. If so, make sure that you save your work. Then select the radio button to close the programs and click Continue. 10. The program you downloaded initially is only used to set up your software. When it starts to do its work, it downloads the actual programs you need from the Internet and installs them. This will take some time (perhaps 15 minutes or more, even if you have a fast Internet connection), but don’t feel you have to sit there watching it. Put the kettle on. 11. You will be shown an options screen (see Figure 9.3), which invites you to set your default search engine in your web browser to be Microsoft’s Bing and to

259

16_711965-ch09.indd 25916_711965-ch09.indd 259 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

set your web browser start page to be Microsoft’s MSN. Unless you have a brand new PC and haven’t made decisions on your preferred settings yet, I suggest you untick these options so that your web browser is unchanged. Microsoft also asks your permission to collect information about how you use your computer to improve its software and search results. You can decide whether to do this or not, but I prefer not to. Click Continue. 12. You will see a conﬁ rmation message that invites you to create a Windows Live ID. You don’t need to do this because you already have a Hotmail email address, which will also enable you to access the features of Windows Live. Click Close.

Tick here Click to install

Figure 9.2

260

16_711965-ch09.indd 26016_711965-ch09.indd 260 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

Figure 9.3

Setting up your email account in Windows Live Mail

Now you’ve installed Windows Live Mail, it will be in your Start menu. You’ll ﬁ nd there is a new folder of programs called Windows Live, and that Windows Live Mail is inside that. If you need a reminder on how to use the Start menu to ﬁ nd and run programs, refer back to the instructions for starting Word in Chapter 1.

When you open Windows Live Mail, the screen will be mostly blank. That’s because you need to set it up, so that it knows your email address. On the left, click the link that says ‘Add email account’.

A window will open (see Figure 9.4), which will ask you to enter your email address and password. Use the email address and password you chose when you signed up with Hotmail (Steps 5 and 6 in the walk-through earlier in this chapter).

261

16_711965-ch09.indd 26116_711965-ch09.indd 261 9/13/10 3:30 PM9/13/10 3:30 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

You need to enter your whole email address, not just the ﬁ rst bit, so your email address will be [email protected] or [email protected], where the ‘something’ is what you chose for ﬁ rst half of your Hotmail email address.

Figure 9.4

Windows Live Mail can remember your Hotmail password for you, so that it doesn’t have to ask you every time you use it. I recommend you keep the Remem- ber Password box ticked to enable this feature.

In the Display Name box, enter your full real name. The Display Name is used to tell people who you are when you send them an email. This is particularly useful

262

16_711965-ch09.indd 26216_711965-ch09.indd 262 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

if you had to compromise on your Hotmail email address and ended up with something that’s not close to your real name.

You can ignore the box that says ‘Manually conﬁ gure server settings’.

When you click Next, you should see a message conﬁ rming that you’ve success- fully entered the information required, and can then click Finish to close the window.

Before it can download your email, Windows Live Mail needs to download the folders that are used to organise the email. It will ask you to click a Download button to conﬁ rm you’re happy to do that. Once you do that, the folders and any emails you have will be downloaded.

If you have a Yahoo or Googlemail account, you can use these same steps to add them to Windows Live Mail too.

Reading your emails in Windows Live Mail

An email address without any email is a bit like a party with no guests, but luckily Microsoft sends you a few messages when you set up your Hotmail account to stop you feeling lonely. These download to your computer once you’ve ﬁ nished setting up Windows Live Mail. The program will download your latest messages whenever you start it in future, and will check for new messages every half hour.

If you’re using a dial-up connection, you don’t need to be connected all the time you’re using Windows Live Mail. You only need to be connected when you are downloading emails or sending them. If you click the Sync button on the menu bar at the top of the screen when you do connect (see Figure 9.5), your emails will then be sent and delivered.

Figure 9.5 shows the Windows Live Mail screen.

263

16_711965-ch09.indd 26316_711965-ch09.indd 263 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Reply Forward Messages in the current folder

New Reply all Sync

Email folders Preview pane

Figure 9.5

On the left, you can see the different folders for your emails (see Figure 9.5): • The Inbox is where your incoming messages are kept. • The Drafts folder is used for emails you’ve written but not yet decided to send. • The Sent items folder is where your outgoing emails are kept after you’ve sent them.

264

16_711965-ch09.indd 26416_711965-ch09.indd 264 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

• The Junk email folder stores emails sent to you that Hotmail thinks might be unwanted advertising, also known as ‘spam’. Spam is unavoidable, but the junk email folder minimises the intrusion it causes. It’s worth checking from time to time that genuine messages haven’t been diverted here by mistake. • The Deleted items folder is like the recycle bin in Windows. It’s where emails go when you delete them. They aren’t actually wiped from your computer unless you delete them from the Deleted items folder. • The Outbox is where your outgoing emails wait until they are sent. You can click on any of these folders to see the messages in it. Most of the time, you will be looking at your Inbox.

If you can’t ﬁ nd your recent incoming messages, make sure you have clicked the Inbox.

The middle column of the screen shows you the messages in the current folder. For each message, you can see who sent it (Windows Live Team for most of mine in Figure 9.5), the date it was sent (on the right), and the subject of the email (underneath the sender name). If a message is unread, its sender and subject will be in bold text.

Click a message to select it, and you can see it appears rapidly in the preview pane on the right. If you double-click the message, it will open in a new window so that you can read it clearly.

Figure 9.6 shows what an open message containing a couple of photos looks like. Use the scrollbar on the right to see the whole message.

265

16_711965-ch09.indd 26516_711965-ch09.indd 265 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Reply all Delete

Reply Forward Add to contacts Scrollbar

Figure 9.6

To help protect you from unwanted communications, you have several options when you receive email from somebody new. These are shown in a yellow bar at the top of the window. • Delete and block: This will get rid of the current message and stop that person from being able to send you any more messages. If you just want to get rid of a particular message, click Delete where shown in Figure 9.6. The message is then moved to the Deleted items folder. • Allow sender: Use this to tell Windows Live Mail that this is somebody you are happy to hear from.

266

16_711965-ch09.indd 26616_711965-ch09.indd 266 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents • Show images: You are only likely to see this in emails sent by companies, rather than friends. (It doesn’t appear in Figure 9.6.) Businesses sometimes use a special way to put images into their messages, which enables them to tell whether you viewed their message or not. Click Show images if you don’t mind the sender knowing you’ve read their email. Never click Show images in junk emails, because then the senders will know your email address works and will send you more junk. The preview pane in Figure 9.5 has lots of broken images (indicated by a red cross) because the email is from an unknown sender and Windows Live Mail has blocked the images to protect my privacy, at least until I decide to Show Images.

Replying to emails and sending new emails

If you want to send an email, there are several different ways you can do it. When you are reading a message or when you are viewing it in the preview pane, you can click the Reply button (see Figures 9.6 and 9.5). If the message was sent to other people as well as you, you can reply to everybody at the same time by clicking the Reply all button. If you want to forward the message to somebody new, click the Forward button. To start a new message from scratch, click the New button (see Figure 9.5).

If you reply to a message or forward it, your new email will automatically include the original message as well, so you can add your comments at the top. If you reply, any attached photos will be removed, however. (There’s not much point sending ﬁ les straight back where they came from.) When you reply, the email addresses of recipients are ﬁ lled in for you automatically.

If you start a new email from scratch, however, a new window will open in which you can compose it.

Composing your email

The window for composing an email looks like Figure 9.7. To send a message, all you need to provide is the email address of the recipient, the subject, and the message itself.

267

16_711965-ch09.indd 26716_711965-ch09.indd 267 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Cut, copy, paste Spellcheck

Font colour Bullets

Underline Indent text

Address book Size Italic Highlight and background colours

Font Bold Undo Insert link

Figure 9.7

The email address goes in the top box where it says To. If you want to enter more than one email address, type them all into the To box and use semicolons to separate them. If someone’s written down their address for you, a quick sanity check is that an email address must have no spaces, one @ sign, at least one full stop after the @ sign but no full stop at the end of the address.

If you use Windows Contacts, you can click the address book button (see Figure 9.7) to select email addresses from people in your Contacts folder, instead of

268

16_711965-ch09.indd 26816_711965-ch09.indd 268 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

typing the addresses in. When you receive an email from somebody, you can click beside their email address to add it to your Contacts, too, (see Figure 9.6) so that you can more easily send them messages in future. You can add anyone as a contact by clicking the triangle beside the New button (see Figure 9.5) and then choosing New Contact from the menu. Using Contacts like this can save you a lot of time typing in email addresses and is less likely to result in mistakes.

The subject line is what shows up as the message description when it arrives, and it can help to avoid getting different conversations mixed up. Pick something descriptive and speciﬁ c to that particular conversation, so that both you and the recipient can easily ﬁ nd the right emails in your inboxes later.

You type the body of your message into the large white area underneath the toolbar. The editor is more limited than Word, but you can use the controls indicated on the toolbar in Figure 9.7 to change colours, choose fonts and add basic formatting.

Depending on what email program the recipient is using, they might not be able to see your presentation changes, so don’t rely on these to get your message across.

When you’ve ﬁ nished creating your message, click Send to queue up your message for sending. If you’re connected to the Internet, your message will go immediately. Otherwise, click the Sync button (see Figure 9.5) when you are next connected to the Internet. You might need to pass another eye-straining word decryption puzzle to prove you’re human before you can send your ﬁ rst message.

Hiding recipients

As well as the To box, there are two others boxes, called Cc and Bcc, which are used for addressing recipients. To reveal these boxes, click the ‘Show Cc & Bcc’ text on the right of the Subject box, and you can then enter email addresses in the same way you do for the To box.

269

16_711965-ch09.indd 26916_711965-ch09.indd 269 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Cc is short for carbon copy, a relic from the time of typewriters and carbon paper. If you Cc somebody, they will get a copy of the email too. You might wonder why there is a Cc box at all, since you could simply add the person’s name in the To box. It’s just a slightly different way of addressing someone. If you copy somebody on an email, you’re merely keeping them in the loop. If you address somebody in the To box, you’re probably expecting them to reply.

Bcc is short for blind carbon copy. This is a bit sneakier. Normally, all recipients of the same email can see each other’s addresses; but anybody addressed in the Bcc ﬁ eld is hidden from the other recipients. The Bcc addressee will be able to see the people in the To and Cc boxes, but the others won’t be able to see them. You can put multiple people into the Bcc box, and they will all be hidden from each other and everyone else. The main use for this is if you’re emailing a lot of people who don’t know each other. It might be seen as rude to be giving out people’s email addresses to people they don’t know, so if you put all the addresses into the Bcc ﬁ eld, all the email addresses will be kept secret.

Emailing your Microsoft Ofﬁ ce ﬁ les

You can send Offi ce fi les with your emails. When you add a fi le to an email, it’s called an attachment, a nod to the days when you might have attached something to your letter with a paperclip. Now, you do it with the simple press of a button.

But fi rst, you need to think carefully about how your document will be used. Offi ce 2010 and Offi ce 2007 save their fi les in a new way, which older versions of Offi ce can’t open. Some people don’t use Offi ce at all, so they can’t open any Offi ce fi les. You can save your fi le as a different fi le type for these people, though, so it will work with the software they do have. The drawback is that they might not be able to do any editing or you might lose some of the more advanced formatting along the way.

Table 9.1 shows the main types of fi le you can create using Offi ce and some of the problems you might encounter with them. The fi le types higher up the table tend to offer a better experience for recipients, so go for the fi rst one you know people can open. The best way to work out what fi le type to send is often to ask the recipient what they want. Most people do have Offi ce, so it’s a question of which version. If somebody doesn’t have Offi ce, or if it’s important to preserve the appearance of a document, most people can open (but not edit) PDFs.

270

16_711965-ch09.indd 27016_711965-ch09.indd 270 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

Table 9.1 Different Microsoft Office file types File type What software you When to use it Potential need to open it pitfalls Word Docu- Office 2010 or For files you’ll keep If you open ment (.docx) Office 2007. on your computer, Office 2010 Excel Workbook You can also use or if the recipient documents in (.xlsx) the free Viewer has Office 2010 or Office 2007, PowerPoint programs for Office 2007. This is you will lose Presentation Word, Excel and the normal file type some of the (.pptx) PowerPoint, but for your version of advanced these can only be Office. features (such used to read on Recipients can use as the Text screen and print. their copy of Office Effects in You can down- to edit the Word). load these pro- documents. grams from the The Excel Viewer is Microsoft website. good for large spreadsheets that don’t print well and become hard to use in PDF format. OneNote 2010 OneNote 2010 To send pages or Cannot be Section (.one) sections from your opened in OneNote notebooks OneNote 2007. to somebody who Many people uses OneNote find OneNote 2010. files hard to use and prefer PDFs. OneNote OneNote 2010 or To send pages or Many people Package OneNote 2007 sections from your find OneNote (.onepkg) OneNote notebooks files hard to OneNote 2007 to somebody who use and prefer Section (.one) uses OneNote 2010 PDFs. or OneNote 2007.

271

16_711965-ch09.indd 27116_711965-ch09.indd 271 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Table 9.1 (continued) File type What software you When to use it Potential need to open it pitfalls Word 97-2003 Any version of If you’re sending You might lose Document Office after somebody an Office some features (.doc) Office 97 (includ- document and in your Excel 97-2003 ing Office 2010 you’re not sure document that Workbook (.xls) and Office 2007). they’ve got a recent aren’t sup- PowerPoint You can also use version of Office. ported by 97-2003 Presen- the free Viewer Recipients can use older versions tation (.ppt) programs for their copy of Office of Office, Word, Excel and to edit the including PowerPoint, but documents. some presen- these can only be tation features. used to read on screen and print. You can download these programs from the Microsoft website. PDF Adobe Reader or If you’re sending Documents equivalent. This finished documents cannot be free software can that recipients do not easily edited. be downloaded need to edit, such as at www.adobe. newsletters or com and is posters, or if recipi- already installed ents do not have any on most PCs. version of Office. Can also be used to prevent people editing your work. A PDF is like sending a printout in the form of a file. It preserves the appearance of your file well.

272

16_711965-ch09.indd 27216_711965-ch09.indd 272 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM

Using email to share your ideas and documents

It’s easy to create a new fi le version. You don’t need to do this at all if you’re sending someone an Offi ce 2010 or Offi ce 2007 fi le, because you can just send them the same fi le you use. Otherwise, you use a feature called Save As. This will save a new copy of the fi le on your computer, and this new copy can use a different fi le type.

In the 2007 versions of Word, Excel and PowerPoint, there is a shortcut you can use to create PDF and Offi ce 97-2003 fi les. Open your fi le in Offi ce and then click the Offi ce button. Hover the mouse pointer over Save As for a moment and you’ll see some options appear on the right (see Figure 9.8). You can then click one of these for the fi le type you want to use, and can skip Steps 1 to 3 below.

Figure 9.8

If you’re not using Ofﬁ ce 2007, you have to follow these ﬁ ve steps:

1. Open the ﬁ le in Ofﬁ ce. 2. In the backstage area, click Save as.

273

16_711965-ch09.indd 27316_711965-ch09.indd 273 9/13/10 3:30 PM9/13/10 3:30 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

3. Click where it says Save as type (see Figure 9.9) and choose your fi le type from the pulldown menu. There are many more than the main ones listed above, but they’re in alphabetical order so it shouldn’t take long to fi nd what you need. If you are saving your fi le as a PDF, click Options. The PDF fi le format is a bit like a printout in a fi le, so these settings are similar to your printer options. If you’re happy with what you see or you don’t understand any of the settings, the defaults are usually fi ne. Figure 9.9 shows the PDF options for Excel. 4. Enter the fi lename and choose where you would like to save the fi le in the usual way. 5. Click the Save button (see Figure 9.9). If you used the shortcut in Offi ce 2007 to Save As PDF, the button will say Publish instead.

Save as type Options Save

Figure 9.9

274

16_711965-ch09.indd 27416_711965-ch09.indd 274 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

If you created a PDF ﬁ le, it will be open on your computer in Adobe Reader so you can see how it came out. If you’re not happy with what you see, you can use the Page Layout ribbon in Word and Excel to change how your document looks and then try again.

If you created a 97-2003 ﬁ le, I recommend that you close the ﬁ le, and then open the version you just saved. This should show you if anything important is missing.

If you carry on working and don’t close the fi le, your changes might be saved to the new copy you made for emailing, and not to your original fi le. This happens if you save in a Word, Excel or PowerPoint fi le type.

Now you have a version of the fi le to share, you’ve done the diffi cult bit. All you need to do is attach the fi le to your email. Write your email in the normal way using Windows Live Mail, and then click Attach at the top of your email composition window (indicated in Figure 9.10). A fi le browser opens, which you can use to navigate to the fi le you want to attach. When you’ve found the fi le you want, double-click it, or click it and then click the Open button. You can add multiple fi les to the same email message. As well as attaching Offi ce fi les, you can attach digital photos using this technique.

The fi le is shown above your email text, as you can see in Figure 9.10. You can click the fi le and press the Delete key on the keyboard to remove it again. The fi le size is shown in brackets after each fi le too. Keep an eye on this. If you send fi les that are too large, you’ll block up the recipient’s email connection. Don’t send anything that has GB in the fi le size under any circumstances. I recommend you ask the recipient before you send anything of more than 1MB, which is the same as 1024KB. With permission, you can get away with sending fi les that add up to about 10MB on a single email, but that’s a very big email and you should avoid it if you can. For anything larger than that, you’re often better off putting it on a disc, stuffi ng it in a jiffy bag, and sending it the slow way.

275

16_711965-ch09.indd 27516_711965-ch09.indd 275 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

In Word and PowerPoint, there is a tool to compress pictures, so that your ﬁ le sizes are smaller. Click a picture and you’ll ﬁ nd it on the Picture Tools Format ribbon, in the Adjust group on the left.

Attachments on this message

Attach

Figure 9.10

While using Offi ce, you might come across features to send fi les from within Word, Excel and PowerPoint, but they don’t work with Windows Live Mail. They do work with Outlook and with some other free email programs (including Mozilla Thunderbird) but these programs can be diffi cult to set up, which is why I’ve plumped for Windows Live Mail.

The approach described here using Save As will work for any email program you use (and even for web-based email services, such as Gmail), but you will need to change how you attach ﬁ les if you’re not using Windows Live Mail.

Now you can share your wonderful Word documents, exciting Excel spreadsheets and powerful PowerPoint slide shows with friends everywhere.

276

16_711965-ch09.indd 27616_711965-ch09.indd 276 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Using email to share your ideas and documents

What else can you do?

Using the ideas introduced in this chapter, you can: • Use the Hotmail website to send a message home from your holiday. How often have you arrived home before your postcards? An instant email might have more impact. • Email your record collection in Excel to your friends so they can highlight anything they want to swap with you and email it back. • Distribute the newsletter you created in Chapter 3 as a PDF by email. Put the recipients into the Bcc ﬁ eld to keep your subscriber list private. • Share your holiday budget plans with the rest of your party. You could email the ﬁ les to them and ask them to email them back to you with their edits.

Summary • Email is short for electronic mail. • To send somebody an email, you need to know their email address. Every email address is unique and must have no spaces, one @ sign • and at least one full stop after that. • You can get a free email address from Hotmail. Although you can send and receive emails on the Hotmail website • from anywhere, it’s more convenient to use an email program such as Windows Live Mail when you’re using your home computer. You can use Windows Live Mail to manage all your email accounts • in one place. Don’t forget to check your junk mail folder from time to time in • case real messages have ended up there by mistake.

277

16_711965-ch09.indd 27716_711965-ch09.indd 277 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

To send an email, you can reply to an existing message, forward a • message to someone else, or just click New to start a new blank email. The Bcc fi eld enables you to hide the email addresses of recipients • from each other. • When you add a fi le to an email it is called an attachment. Before you send somebody an Offi ce fi le, convert it into the right • format for them. Open the fi le you create before you send it, to check if anything • important was lost in the conversion. • PDFs are like printouts of your document in the form of a fi le. • PDFs can be opened by most people, but cannot be easily edited. Get permission from the person you’re emailing before you send • them large fi les.

278

16_711965-ch09.indd 27816_711965-ch09.indd 278 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM Brain Training

How did you get on with using email to share your documents? Find out in the ﬁ nal quiz of this book.

1. It’s okay to email an attachment 4. If you get unwanted email from that is: someone you don’t want to hear (a) 30GB from again, you should: (b) 30MB (a) Delete the email (c) 30KB (b) Block the sender (c) Show images 2. Which of these is a valid email (d) Allow sender address: (a) www.hotmail.com 5. You want a friend to print off a (b) [email protected] poster advertising the village fete, and put it up around town. He’s got (c) snoaw9@gmail Ofﬁ ce 2000. What ﬁ le should you (d) snoaw9@gmailcom send him? (a) Word Document (.docx) 3. A good subject line might be: (b) Word 97-2003 Document (.doc) (a) Hello (c) PDF (b) Meeting up (c) Planning the Olympics party (d) Stuff

Answers

Q1 – c Q2 – b Q3 – c (and possibly b if you don’t often meet up) Q4 – b Q5 – c (a PDF will preserve the poster design the best; b might work, but you’d need to reopen it to check whether you lost anything important in the conversion)

279

16_711965-ch09.indd 27916_711965-ch09.indd 279 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM 16_711965-ch09.indd 28016_711965-ch09.indd 280 9/13/10 2:56 PM9/13/10 2:56 PM PART IV Appendices

You should share your ideas about growing courgettes. But not the ones about our neighbours being aliens from another planet.

17_711965-pp04.indd 28117_711965-pp04.indd 281 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM 17_711965-pp04.indd 28217_711965-pp04.indd 282 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Appendix: Using A keyboard shortcuts

Microsoft Ofﬁ ce includes a number of shortcuts to make it easier to use, particularly for those who cannot comfortably use a mouse. You can access all of the ribbon features by holding down the Alt key for a second or pressing F10. Letters will then appear on all the controls on the ribbon (see Figure A.1) and you can press the appropriate letter key to access that feature.

Figure A.1

If you press Alt to activate the keyboard controls, you can also use the left and right cursor keys to move through the tabs, and the up and down and left and right cursor keys to move around the different controls. When you open a pulldown menu, you can move up and down it using the cursor keys. When you have selected the control you need, press the Enter key to action it.

Sometimes you might activate the keyboard controls on the ribbon unintention- ally by holding down Alt for too long. If that happens, just tap the Esc key.

In OneNote 2007, you can open the pulldown menus by holding down the Alt key and pressing the letter that is underlined on the menu (see Figure A.2). To open the File menu, for example, you hold down Alt and then press F.

18_711965-bapp01.indd 28318_711965-bapp01.indd 283 9/13/10 3:28 PM9/13/10 3:28 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Figure A.2

Table A.1 shows the most useful keyboard shortcuts in the Microsoft Ofﬁ ce suite. Where they do not work in all Ofﬁ ce applications, I’ve noted in brackets which applications they do work in.

The picture of a keyboard in Figure 0.1 (Introduction) shows you where the most important keys are on the keyboard.

Table A.1 Useful Microsoft Office keyboard shortcuts Action Keyboard shortcut Basic controls Help F1 Zoom in and out CTRL+scrollwheel Cancel Esc Close or exit Alt+F4

File and document operations Save (Word, Excel, PowerPoint) CTRL+S Open CTRL+O Close file (Word, Excel, PowerPoint) CTRL+W New document (Word, Excel, PowerPoint) CTRL+N New page (OneNote) CTRL+N New slide (PowerPoint) CTRL+M New page break (Word) CTRL+Enter Print CTRL+P Switch print preview on or off (Word, Excel, CTRL+F2 PowerPoint)

284

18_711965-bapp01.indd 28418_711965-bapp01.indd 284 9/13/10 3:28 PM9/13/10 3:28 PM Using keyboard shortcuts

Action Keyboard shortcut Navigating documents Find CTRL+F Find and replace CTRL+H Go to a page or other location CTRL+G

Clipboard operations Cut CTRL+X Copy CTRL+C Paste CTRL+V Format painter: Copy formatting (Word, PowerPoint) CTRL+Shift+C Format painter: Paste formatting (Word, PowerPoint) CTRL+Shift+V

Text and paragraph formatting Select all CTRL+A Bold CTRL+B Italic CTRL+I Underline CTRL+U Insert a hyperlink CTRL+K Font (Word) CTRL+D Font size increase (Word, PowerPoint, OneNote) CTRL+Shift+> Font size decrease (Word, PowerPoint, OneNote) CTRL+Shift+< Change Case (Word, PowerPoint) Shift+F3 Centre paragraph (Word, PowerPoint, OneNote) CTRL+E Justify paragraph (Word, PowerPoint, OneNote) CTRL+J Right-align paragraph (Word, PowerPoint, OneNote) CTRL+R Left-align paragraph (Word, PowerPoint, OneNote) CTRL+L

285

18_711965-bapp01.indd 28518_711965-bapp01.indd 285 9/13/10 3:28 PM9/13/10 3:28 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

Table A.1 (continued) Action Keyboard shortcut Word styles Apply Normal style (Word) CTRL+Shift+N Apply Heading 1 style (Word) CTRL+Shift+1 Apply other Heading styles (Word) CTRL+Shift+number

Editing Undo CTRL+Z Redo CTRL+Y Show symbols (Word) CTRL+Shift+*

References Research Alt+click Spelling F7

Excel Sum (Excel) Alt+=

Application-speciﬁ c shortcuts

The following tables reproduce the keyboard shortcuts introduced in the chapters in the body of this book.

Table A.2 Keyboard shortcuts for navigating your Word document Effect on cursor Keys Move to the start of the current line Home Move to the end of the current line End Move up a page through the document. You’ll Page Up need to have a document that’s more than one page long to see this in action Move down a page through the document Page Down

286

18_711965-bapp01.indd 28618_711965-bapp01.indd 286 9/13/10 3:28 PM9/13/10 3:28 PM Using keyboard shortcuts

Effect on cursor Keys Move one word to the left CTRL+left Move one word to the right CTRL+right Move to the start of the next paragraph up CTRL+up Move to the start of the next paragraph down CTRL+down Move to the end of the document CTRL+end Move to the start of the document CTRL+home

Table A.3 Keyboard shortcuts for navigating Excel How the cursor moves Keys One cell in the direction of the cursor key Cursor keys (up, down, left, right) One screenful up Page Up One screenful down Page Down One screenful left Alt+Page Up One screenful right Alt+Page Down To the top left corner CTRL+Home To the end of your spreadsheet (where the last CTRL+End row and column used meet) Enter editing mode on a cell F2

Table A.4 Keyboard shortcuts for playing a PowerPoint slide show Action Keys Next slide N, right arrow, down arrow, space, Enter, left mouse button Previous slide P, left arrow, up arrow, Backspace Black-out screen (hide slide show) B White-out screen (hide slide show) W Finish Esc

287

18_711965-bapp01.indd 28718_711965-bapp01.indd 287 9/13/10 3:28 PM9/13/10 3:28 PM 18_711965-bapp01.indd 28818_711965-bapp01.indd 288 9/13/10 3:28 PM9/13/10 3:28 PM Appendix: Glossary B

animation In PowerPoint, animations are special effects that are used to display parts of a slide, such as fading in a text box or a picture.

application A piece of software (or instructions) for the computer that enables it to achieve a set of related tasks. Word, Excel, PowerPoint and OneNote are all applications. It’s also sometimes called a ‘program’.

attachment A ﬁ le that has been added to an email so it can be sent over the Internet.

backstage area In Ofﬁ ce 2010, the backstage area is behind the File tab and provides access to the functions used for saving, opening, closing, printing and sharing documents.

backup A spare copy of a fi le kept somewhere safe in case something happens to the original fi le. It’s important to make a backup of your fi les so that you don’t lose your data.

border A border around an object, such as a text box or picture, is a visible line that is added to improve its appearance.

broadband A fast connection to the Internet, which is permanently switched on so you can quickly view webpages, and download email, music or video.

button An area on the screen that you can click to make something happen. Buttons usually have a word or an icon on them. There are also mouse buttons, which are physical buttons you press on your mouse.

19_711965-bapp02.indd 28919_711965-bapp02.indd 289 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

cell A box on a spreadsheet or a table, into which you can enter information.

click To ‘click something’, you place your mouse pointer over it on screen and then press the left button on your mouse. You should always click with the left mouse button unless told to right-click.

clip art Illustrations and photographs included in Ofﬁ ce, which you can embed into your documents.

clipboard Used for temporarily storing text, pictures or other content that you have copied or cut. See cut, copy and paste.

close If you close a ﬁ le, you stop using it. You can reopen it if you want to read it, edit it or print it.

column In a spreadsheet or table, the columns go up and down the screen.

column divider In a spreadsheet, this is the thin line between the column headings. You can click and drag this to change the width of a column.

conditional content Content that is only used if certain conditions are satisﬁ ed. In a mail merge letter, for example, this might be a section reminding members to pay their subscription fee that is only added if the recipient hasn’t paid yet.

Control key Marked CTRL, the Control key is used in combination with other keys to perform special functions. By holding down the Control key and tapping the V key, for example, text can be pasted from the clipboard.

copy Makes a copy of selected content and puts it onto the clipboard. Accessed by the two-documents icon on the Home ribbon or CTRL+C. Use Paste (CTRL+V) to put content from the clipboard into a document.

CTRL See Control key.

cursor This shows you where you are working in a document and where new content will be added. When entering text, your text cursor is a ﬂ ashing vertical line. In Excel, your cursor is a thick outline on a cell, which shows you which cell you are editing or formatting.

290

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29019_711965-bapp02.indd 290 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Glossary

cursor key The up, down, left and right keys on the keyboard, which move the cursor around your Ofﬁ ce document.

cut Removes selected content from the document and puts it onto the clipboard. Accessed by the scissors icon on the Home ribbon or CTRL+X. Use Paste (CTRL+V) to put content from the clipboard into a document.

data Another word for information in a computer.

desktop The screen you fi rst see when you start using Windows. This usually includes program shortcuts and the recycle bin. You can also put fi les on the desktop so you can fi nd them easily.

dial-up connection A slow connection to the Internet over a phone line. When- ever you want to use the Internet, you have to dial up your connection, which is like your computer making a phone call to the Internet.

double-click To click something twice in quick succession. This is often a fast way to select something.

download Transfer information or ﬁ les from the Internet to your computer.

drag What happens when you click something, hold down the mouse button, and then move the mouse. Whatever you have clicked will be moved with the mouse, or dragged, if possible. Not all objects can be dragged.

dummy content (Usually meaningless) content that’s there purely to demonstrate the layout.

email Electronic mail. A way to transfer messages, photos and ﬁ les between different people and computers using the Internet.

email address An email address is used to route emails to the person you want to receive them. An email address always includes an @ sign and doesn’t have any spaces in it. You can get a free email address from webmail provid- ers such as Hotmail (www.hotmail.com). Your Internet service provider usually provides one or more email addresses with your Internet connection too.

291

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29119_711965-bapp02.indd 291 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

encryption A way to protect a ﬁ le so that it cannot be read unless you enter a password.

Enter key Sometimes called the Return key, this is used to start a new paragraph in Word, to tell the computer you’ve ﬁ nished entering information, or to conﬁ rm an action.

Excel An application in the Microsoft Ofﬁ ce suite that is used for creating spreadsheets.

fi eld In a mail merge, a fi eld is equivalent to a column on a spreadsheet. Fields describe the different pieces of information available about each person or thing (or record). A fi eld might be ‘name’.

fi le A document on your computer. Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and OneNote all create fi les that store your information. A fi le can usually only be opened by the program that created it. There are exceptions, but you can’t open a Pow- erPoint fi le in Word, for example.

ﬁ le name The name used to identify a ﬁ le on your computer.

fi le type Different programs create fi les of different types. If you want to move a fi le from one program to another, you might need to create a new version of your fi le that is compatible with the program you want to open it in. For example, if you want to open a Word 2010 document using Word 2000, you’ll need to save it in the old fi le type that Word 2000 used. If you want to share a fi le with someone, you need to make sure it uses a fi le type their software can open.

fi lter A fi lter is used to hide information you don’t want to see in a spreadsheet or mail merge, so that you only see information you want. You could fi lter your address book to show only people who live in Birmingham, for example.

folder In Windows, a folder is used to group together a collection of ﬁ les. It is represented by an icon of a stationery folder, which is usually yellow. You can put both ﬁ les and folders inside folders.

292

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29219_711965-bapp02.indd 292 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Glossary

font A font is a design for letters, numbers and other symbols in a similar style. When you change the font used on a piece of text, you change the shape of all the letters in it. You might have an ornate font that makes your text look like handwriting, or a font that makes your text look like a newspaper headline, for instance. Examples of fonts are Times New Roman and Arial. The Fonts group on the Home ribbon also includes formatting controls, such as bold, underline and italics.

format painter A tool that enables you to copy the formatting from one part of the document and apply it to another.

formatting Changing the appearance of text, spreadsheet cells or other content.

formula A formula is used when you want Excel to calculate the value that should be in a cell. For example, you might use a formula that calculates the sterling value (from the euro value in one cell and the exchange rate in another). You enter the formula into the cell where you would like its result to appear.

formula bar In Excel, this enables you to edit the contents of any cell easily, whether or not it contains a formula. The formula bar is between the ribbon and the spreadsheet.

gridlines A grid that is used to help with layout; it does not usually appear on the printed document, but you can print gridlines in Excel to make it easier to read your spreadsheets on the printed page.

header In Excel, a header is a title for a column that describes what is in it. You type the headers into the spreadsheet.

heading In Excel, a heading is the label for a row or column that Excel puts outside your spreadsheet. The heading for the ﬁ rst column says ‘A’ and the heading for the second row says ‘2’. In Word, heading styles are used to structure a document by indicating the relative importance of the different headlines.

Home ribbon The Home ribbon contains the basic controls in a Microsoft Ofﬁ ce application. It includes basic formatting controls, and cut and paste. You ﬁ nd it by clicking the Home tab above the ribbon. 293

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29319_711965-bapp02.indd 293 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

icon A small picture that is used to identify an action, ﬁ le or program. The Cut icon is a picture of a pair of scissors, for example.

interface All the controls for a program make up its interface.

Internet A network that connects computers so that they can exchange information, including emails and webpages.

justiﬁ ed text Text that has straight edges at both the right and left margins, with the words spaced evenly between them. Most of the text in this book is justiﬁ ed.

landscape A landscape paper orientation uses the paper so it is wider than it is tall, like a landscape painting.

mail merge A feature in Word that enables you to create a batch of Word documents, with each one automatically customised using information from a spreadsheet.

margin Blank space at the edge of a document where nothing will be printed.

menu A set of options you can choose from in a program.

memory See save.

mouse pointer This pointer is moved by using the mouse. It is usually a diago- nal arrow (pointing from bottom right to top left). It is used to point at things you want to use (such as buttons) or select (such as words). To use a button you are pointing at, you click it. The shape of the pointer may vary depending on what is underneath it on the screen.

navigation pane On the left of the screen in Word and PowerPoint, this helps you to quickly move around your document.

notebook In OneNote, a notebook collects together all related information in one place.

Offi ce button In Microsoft Offi ce 2007, the Offi ce button is the round button in the top left corner. It provides access to the functions used for saving, opening, closing, printing and sharing documents. 294

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29419_711965-bapp02.indd 294 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Glossary

Ofﬁ ce 2010 and Ofﬁ ce 2007 A suite of applications that includes Word, Excel, PowerPoint and OneNote in the Home and Student edition. The version number 2010 or 2007 refers to the year of release.

OneNote An application in the Microsoft Ofﬁ ce suite used for organising information.

open Before you can read, edit or print a ﬁ le, you must open it. That puts it into the computer’s memory so that the application (such as Word) can use it.

Outlook An email program only available in the more expensive versions of the Microsoft Ofﬁ ce suite.

page In OneNote, a page is a single entry in a notebook. Despite its name, it can span many printed pages. In Word, a page is the same size as a sheet of paper.

password In the same way as a key protects a building, a password protects your information and stops others from gaining access without your permission. Since only you should know your password, providing it proves that you are who you claim to be and are authorised to access the information requested. Your passwords should be hard for others to guess and easy for you to remember.

paste Adds content from the clipboard into the document. Accessed using the clipboard icon on the Home ribbon or CTRL+V. The content remains on the clipboard too, so you can paste it into multiple different places.

PC Short for personal computer.

point The size of your text is measured in points. For example, normal text is usually about 12 point (12 pt).

portrait A portrait paper orientation uses the paper so it is taller than it is wide, like a portrait photograph or a typical letter.

PowerPoint An application in the Microsoft Ofﬁ ce suite used for creating and displaying slide shows.

presentation In PowerPoint, a sequence of slides. 295

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29519_711965-bapp02.indd 295 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

print area In Excel, this deﬁ nes which cells you would like to print.

printer A device for printing information from your computer onto paper.

program See application.

pulldown menu A menu that unrolls and presents its options to you when you click on its title or icon. Pulldown menus keep the screen tidy by hiding options until you need them.

radio button Round buttons that are used to select one of a number of options. If you click one radio button in a group, it will deselect the previous radio button you selected (if any). You might have radio buttons to select a yes/no answer, for example. If you click the Yes radio button, the No radio button will be deselected automatically, and vice versa.

recipients In a mail merge, ‘recipients’ means the spreadsheet information you will use to customise your Word documents. It doesn’t necessarily relate to people. In email, recipients are the people who receive a particular email.

record In a mail merge, a record refers to a set of data about the same person or thing. It’s equivalent to a row on a spreadsheet. A record might belong to ‘Fred Jones’.

reference In Excel, a cell reference is its location on the spreadsheet. It’s like a grid reference. The top left cell is A1.

ribbon The tabbed control panel across the top of the screen in Microsoft Ofﬁ ce 2010 and 2007. For example, you click the Insert tab to bring the Insert ribbon to the front, which shows all the controls for inserting things. (There is no ribbon in OneNote 2007.)

right-click To ‘right-click something’, you place your mouse pointer over it on the screen and then press the right button on your mouse. This action usually opens an alternative menu.

row In a spreadsheet or table, the rows of cells go across the screen horizontally.

296

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29619_711965-bapp02.indd 296 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Glossary

save To preserve information permanently. The memory your computer uses when you’re working on ﬁ les is only short-term memory, so when you switch off your computer, everything that is in the memory is lost. If you want to keep information, you need to save it to the disk so that it is still there next time you want it. You should save all your work when using Microsoft Ofﬁ ce.

scroll When a document is too big to ﬁ t on screen, you have to scroll around it to see different parts of it. This usually means scrolling up and down through a long document. Contents can be scrolled using the scrollwheel between the buttons on the mouse, or by clicking and dragging the scrollbars down the right and/or along the bottom of a window.

select To identify a particular piece of text, picture or ﬁ le, so the computer knows what you would like to do something to. For example, you would select a paragraph of text before deleting it.

slide In PowerPoint, a screenful of text is called a slide.

slide show In PowerPoint, a sequence of slides.

soft return A way of starting a new line without ending a paragraph. Use Shift+Enter in Word.

software Software is a collective term for the applications and programs on the computer. These applications and programs are what give the computer the instructions it needs to work. Microsoft Windows is an example of a piece of software, and so is Microsoft Ofﬁ ce. Without any software, a computer is useless.

sort Change the order of items in a list or a spreadsheet so that they are arranged in alphabetical or numerical order.

spreadsheet A way of organising information using a grid, with the ability to perform calculations between the numbers in different boxes (or ‘cells’). Spreadsheets are created using Excel.

Start button In Windows, the Start button is at the bottom left corner of the screen. It is used to ﬁ nd and run programs, among other things.

297

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29719_711965-bapp02.indd 297 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Ofﬁ ce 2010 for the Older and Wiser

style In Word, styles are used to describe the logical structure of a document (for example, main heading, then second level of heading, then text). Styles enable you to enforce consistent design throughout a document and to navigate the document more easily.

tab In all Microsoft Ofﬁ ce programs, the tabs on ribbons are used to bring a particular ribbon (such as the Insert ribbon) to the front. In OneNote, tabs are also used to identify the sections of notebooks.

table A way to lay out information in a grid. You can insert tables in Word, Pow- erPoint and OneNote.

template A document layout that has been designed for you. It often includes dummy text and photos, and you just need to customise it with your own content.

text box A box that is used to contain text for layout purposes. Text boxes can be resized and moved around the document.

theme A design that you can apply to your document, including text styles and colours. Does not include any dummy content.

tickbox A box you tick to indicate you want to select a particular option. Some- times called a checkbox, the square tickboxes are not to be confused with the round radio buttons, which only enable one option to be chosen. You can select many tickboxes in a group at the same time.

transition In PowerPoint, transitions are special effects that are used between slides in a slide show, such as fading in and out.

undo To reverse an action. You can click the Undo button in the top left of all Microsoft Ofﬁ ce applications except OneNote 2007, or you can use CTRL+Z.

upload To copy information from your computer to the Internet, such as when you email photos.

value The number or text shown in a cell, even if it was calculated using a formula.

298

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29819_711965-bapp02.indd 298 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Glossary

web browser A program that enables you to view and navigate between websites on the Internet. A common web browser is Internet Explorer.

webpage A page downloaded from the Internet, which can include text, pictures, videos, music, forms, animations and interactive features (such as games). The whole of a webpage might not ﬁ t on screen at once, so you might need to scroll through it to see all of it.

website A group of linked webpages that are operated by the same person or organisation, and are about the same thing. Most organisations have a single website that hosts all their public-facing activities on the Internet. Anybody is allowed to create a website.

window A box on the screen that contains a program or just part of a program (such as printer options). You can usually close a window by clicking the X in the top-right corner.

Windows Microsoft Windows (aka Windows) is what you see when you switch on most PCs: it provides the controls you need to manage your ﬁ les and programs.

Word An application in the Microsoft Ofﬁ ce suite used to write and lay out documents, including letters, newsletters and posters.

word processing The way written documents are created using a computer, including the ability to make changes to the text content and presentation.

worksheet Another word for a spreadsheet.

299

19_711965-bapp02.indd 29919_711965-bapp02.indd 299 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM 19_711965-bapp02.indd 30019_711965-bapp02.indd 300 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Index

A Bing search engine, 259 bold, apply to text, 35 accessibility options, 9 borders, 96–98, 221, 289 address book brain training email, 268–269 email, 279 in Excel, 109–142 in Excel, 142, 172, 198–199 invitations, 178, 180–182 in OneNote, 252 addresses, 40–41, 257, 291 in PowerPoint, 224 anchoring text boxes, 100 in Word, 52, 68, 106, 198–199 animations, 214–217, 289 Bricklin, Dan (developer), 111 applications, 2–4, 11–12, 289 broadband, 205, 289 arthritic hands, 6 budgeting, in Excel, 143–172 artistic effects, 93 bulleted lists, 41 attachments, email, 270–276, 289 buttons, 4, 289. See also specific buttons averaging numbers, 162–163 Avery labels, 192 C B calculations, 148–163 calculators, 240 Backspace key, 28 calendars, 56 backstage area captions, 212, 219 defined, 289 Cc (carbon copy), 269–270 in Excel, 113 cells in OneNote, 231–234 counting, 162–163, 180 in PowerPoint, 205–506 defined, 290 in Word, 19–20, 23–24 in Excel, 115–120, 124–128, 145– backups, 10, 19, 289 146, 157–158, 167–170 Bcc (blind carbon copy), 269–270 in OneNote, 239

20_711965-bindex.indd 30120_711965-bindex.indd 301 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Index

centring, 42, 63 in OneNote, 235 chatting, 259 in PowerPoint, 210, 213, 216–217 clicking, 9, 290 in Word, 28, 100 clip art, 63–65, 290 desktop, 226, 258, 291 clipboard, 33–34, 126, 290 desktop computers, 5–6 closing files, 49–50, 234, 290 dial-up connections, 263, 291 colour, 66, 74, 84–86, 97, 119 display names, 262 column divider, 290 distribution, newsletter, 71 columns documents, 3, 58, 83–84. See also defined, 290 specific types of documents in Excel, 114–115, 122–124, 128, Documents folder, 21 133, 149, 179 double-clicking, 9, 291 in Word, 88–89, 98, 128–129 downloading commands, 4 defined, 291 compressing files, 276 from Internet, 6 conditional content, 178, 183–184, into Word, 54, 56–58, 102–103 187–189, 290 Draft view, 58 consistency, visual, 64, 84, 96 Drafts folder, 264 Contacts folder, 268–269 dragging, 90, 221, 291 copying. See also pasting dummy content, 210, 212, 291 defined, 290 in Excel, 126–128, 157, 168–170 in Word, 32–35, 38, 188 E cost calculations, 155–158 counting cells, 162–163, 180 editing CTRL (control key), 290 email, 269 currencies, 146, 148, 158–159, in Excel, 124–126, 183 161–162 in OneNote, 243 cursor, 20, 24, 26, 290 in PowerPoint, 209, 213 cursor keys, 26, 112, 125, 291 in Word, 25–35, 58–61, 190 cutting, 32–35, 291. See also pasting email attachments, 270–276, 289 defined, 291 D programs for, 3, 254 reading, 263–267 data, 132, 174–175, 187, 291 sending, 267–270 dates, counting down from, 165–166 setup, 255 Delete key, 28 using, 253–279 Deleted items folder, 265 email address, 291 deleting encryption, 166–167, 292 in Excel, 129 Enter key, 22, 24, 292 junk email, 266 envelopes, 191

302

20_711965-bindex.indd 30220_711965-bindex.indd 302 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Index

equal column width, 89 switching between, 76 equipment and skills types, 270–273, 292 for email, 253 filtering for Excel, 109, 143, 173 defined, 292 for Office, 5–7 in Excel, 133–135, 145 for OneNote, 225 invitation lists, 178, 183–184, for PowerPoint, 203 187–189 for Word, 17, 53, 69, 173 fitting on the page, 94, 100 Eraser icon, 40 flash drives, 10 errors, correcting flipping graphics, 94 in Excel, 152, 159–161, 163–164 floating pictures, 90 in PowerPoint, 213 flows, text, 94, 100 in Word, 24, 42–46 folders, 263–267, 292 euros, 148, 158–159 fonts, 35–40, 75, 97, 293 Excel format painter, 38, 293 address books, 109–142 formatting defined, 292 defined, 293 file types, 271–272 in Excel, 115–116, 118–119, 145– spreadsheets, 110–113 146, 158 uses, appropriate, 2, 11–12 for meaning, 145–148 uses, miscellaneous, 139, 170, in OneNote, 240, 249 194–195, 221–222 in Word, 35–38, 40, 59, 77, 188 using, for budgeting, 143–172 formula using, for invitations, 12, 116, 173– defined, 293 190, 196 Excel, 125–126, 149–153, 156–157, exchange rates, 158–159 159–161, 163–164 external hard drives, 10 formula bar, 123, 125–126, 151, 293 eyesight problems, 25, 39 forwarding email, 267 frames in photo albums, 218 Frankston, Bob (developer), 111 F freezing columns/headers, 130, 179 Full Screen Reading, 58 fading in/out, 214 function keys, 27 fields, 186–187, 189, 292 files backing up, 10 G closing, 49–50, 234, 290 compressing, 276 gaps, filling, 98–100 defined, 292 ghost of control panel, 38 naming, 23–24, 292 gift certificates, 56 sample, 5 Googlemail, 263 saving, 19–24 grammar error checks, 42, 45–46 sizing, 275 303

20_711965-bindex.indd 30320_711965-bindex.indd 303 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Index

graphics. See also pictures and PowerPoint, 205–206 email, 259, 267 publishing, 259 in OneNote, 241 invitations, with Excel and Word, 12, pictures, 61–65, 90, 94, 241 116, 173–199 in PowerPoint, 213, 217 italic, apply to text, 35 watermarks, 74 in Word, 61–65, 74, 89–94, 259 green squiggly lines, 42, 46 J gridlines, 91, 136, 293 junk email, 265–267 justified text, 41–42, 89, 294 H

hard drives, 10, 19 K header, Excel, 117–118, 130, 136, 293 heading, Excel, 117–118, 123–124, 293 keyboard, 7–8 headlines, in Word, 70–71, 78–81, keyboard shortcuts 86–87, 94–96 in Excel, 112, 124, 126–127, 287 help function, 25 in Office, 41, 59–60, 284–286 hiding columns/rows in address book, 137 in OneNote, 240 hiding recipients, in email, 269–270 in PowerPoint, 287 highlighting, 24, 187 in Word, 23, 27, 38–40, 81, 286–287 holiday budgeting, in Excel, 143–172 Home ribbon, 43, 76, 118, 293 Home version of Office, 3, 6, 10–11 L horizontal lines, 98 Hotmail accounts, 255–258 Labels button, 191 hovering, 37, 78 landscape orientation, 73, 136, 176, 294 language translation, 46–47 laptop computers, 5–6 I left alignment, 42, 63 letters, in Word, 17–52 icons, 294 line breaks/spacing, 24, 42, 96 images. See graphics; photos lines between columns, 89 Inbox, 264 lists for invitations, 178–180 indenting, 42, 96 information entry, 3, 111–112, 145–148 in-line graphics, 90, 100 M installation of Office, 6–7 Internet. See also email magnifying screens, 122 content from, 6, 243–247 mail merge, 174–175, 294 defined, 294 mailing labels, 191–194

304

20_711965-bindex.indd 30420_711965-bindex.indd 304 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Index

margins, 42, 96, 176, 294 about, 1–10 math operators, symbols, 152 applications, 11–12 menus, 4, 294 attachments, 270–276 merging data, 174–175, 187 Office 2007 and 2010, 295 Messenger, 259 Outlook, 3, 253, 295 Microsoft Office. See Office Publisher, 3 mouse versions of, 3, 6, 10–11 shortcuts, 30–31 Office button, 21, 294 using, 4–6, 9–10 Office.com (Website), 54, 64 mouse pointer, 9, 294 OneNote moving defined, 295 content, 241–242 file types, 271 pages, 246–247 uses, appropriate, 2–3, 11–12 photos, 219 using, for recipe book, 225–252 rows, 127 opening slides, 213, 220 defined, 295 text, 28–29, 32, 82–83 in Excel, 110, 144 text boxes, 100 in OneNote, 234 in PowerPoint, 205–207 template, 54–58 N in Word, 18–19, 54–58 orientation of paper, 73–74, 136 names, 180–182, 185–186, 292 Outbox, 265 naming files, 23–24, 292 Outlook, 3, 253, 295 navigation pane, 81–84, 207, 209–210, overwriting text, 212 294 own-brand labels, 192 newsletters, in Word, 69–106 notebooks, in OneNote, 226, 230–233, 247, 294 P notes area, PowerPoint, 210 Num Lock key, 27 pages, in OneNote, 226, 236, 246–248, numbered lists, 42 295 numbers, 153–155, 162–163 paper, 6, 54, 66, 73–74, 136, 191 numeric keypad, 27 paragraphs, 24, 95–96 party invitations, with Excel and Word, 12, 116, 173–199 O passwords, 167, 257, 262, 295 pasting Office defined, 295 See also Excel in Excel, 126–128 See also OneNote in OneNote, 230 See also PowerPoint in Word, 12, 32–35, 79 See also Word 305

20_711965-bindex.indd 30520_711965-bindex.indd 305 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Index

PCs (personal computers), 5–6, 19, 295 Q PDFs, 270, 272 phone numbers, 61, 120–121 quantities, calculations, 148–155 photo albums, 217–220 Quick Styles, 78–81, 94, 217 photo slide show, in PowerPoint, 203–224 photocopying quality, 54, 92 R photos, 61–63, 219, 259 pictures, 61–65, 90, 94, 241. See also radio button, 232, 259, 296 graphics and photos readability, 74, 88, 92, 97 playback, automatic, 220–221 recipe book, in OneNote, 225–252 point sizes, 39, 295 recipients, 269–270, 296 portrait orientation, 73, 295 record, mail merge, 186–187, 296 positioning of graphics, 91–92 red squiggly lines, 42, 46 posters, in Word, 53–68 Redo function, 40 power outages, 19, 23 references, Excel, 101, 136, 149–150, PowerPoint 153, 296 defined, 295 reflowing, 94, 100 file types, 271–272 replacing graphics, 213 saving in, 275 Reply all button, 267 tables, 240 Return key, 22, 24 uses, appropriate, 2, 11–12 reveal coding, 60 using, for photo slide show, 203–224 right alignment, 41, 63 presentation, PowerPoint, 203–224, 295 right-clicking, 9, 21, 296 previewing rotating graphics, 94 email, 267 rounding numbers, 154–155 in Excel, 137 rows in OneNote, 248 defined, 296 in PowerPoint, 207–209, 215–218 in Excel, 114–115, 122, 149, 183–185 themes, 84, 218 in OneNote, 239 in Word, 56, 58, 84, 97, 186–187 in Word, 129 print area, 296 Print Layout view, 58 printers, 6–7, 48, 192, 274, 296 S printing in Excel, 135–139 sample files, 5 in OneNote, 247–249 Save As, 24, 29, 273–275 in PowerPoint, 210 saving in Word, 47–49, 66, 190–194 defined, 297 Publisher, 3 in Excel, 113 pulldown menus, 216, 296

306

20_711965-bindex.indd 30620_711965-bindex.indd 306 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Index

Office files, 270, 275 soft return, 41, 59–60, 124, 297 in OneNote, 233–234 software, 2–4, 297 in PowerPoint, 205 sorting, 120, 131–133, 297 templates, 59 spacing, line, 42 in Word, 19–24 spam, 265–267 scaling, 136 special characters, 160–161 scrapbook software. See OneNote special effects, 94, 214, 216 screen, OneNote, 226–230 spelling check, 42–45 screen captures, 244 spreadsheets, 112–113, 164–165, 181, scrolling, 20, 27, 266, 297 297. See also Excel search and replace text, 84 squiggly lines, 42, 46 search engines, 259–260 Start button, 8, 18, 297 security questions, 257 Starter Edition, 3 select, defined, 297 starting. See opening Select All stories, 70–71, 94–96, 100 Excel, 119 strikethrough format, 36 Word, 39 Student version of Office, 3, 6, 10–11 Sent items folder, 264 styles sentences in text boxes, 99 defined, 298 series fill, 157 in Excel, 118, 158 shading, 96–98 in OneNote, 229–230 shortcuts in PowerPoint, 214, 217, 221 keyboard. See keyboard in Word, 35–37, 39, 59, 77–78, mouse, 30–31 86–87 show symbols button, 60 subject line, 269 single-page printing, 137–139 subpages, 226 sizing summing, 161–163, 240 attachments, 275 switching between files, 76 cells, 115, 239 symbols, 146, 148, 152 columns and rows, 122–124 content, 242 fonts, 39 T graphics, 75, 90, 241 pages, 248 table of contents, 101–102 photos, 62 tables, 237–240, 298 text, 25, 39 tabs, 226, 235, 298 text boxes, 63 templates windows, 21 defined, 298 skills, See equipment and skills in OneNote, 233 slide show, in PowerPoint, 203–224, 297 in PowerPoint, 205–207, 211–212 slides, 210–214, 217, 220, 297 in Word, 54–58, 175, 192 smiley faces, 75

307

20_711965-bindex.indd 30720_711965-bindex.indd 307 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM Index

text V colour, 97 dummy, 72–73, 212 values, 120–121, 298 editing, 25–35, 59 VisiCalc, 111 enlarging, 25, 39 vision problems, 25, 39 flows, 94, 100 Vista, 6, 9, 18 graphics with superimposed text, 92–93 justification, 41–42, 89, 294 in letters, 17–52 W moving, 28–29, 32, 82–83 in newsletters, 69–106 watermarks, 74 on posters, 59–61 web browsers, 22, 205, 243, 299 in recipe book, 225–252 webpages, 243, 255, 299 searching, 83–84 websites, 299 spacing around, 95–96 windows, 21, 76, 299 watermarks, 74 Windows, 18, 76, 180, 190, 299 wrapping, 90, 124 Windows 7, 6, 9, 18 text boxes Windows Live Mail, 253, 258–263 defined, 298 Word in PowerPoint, 212, 217, 219 copying from Excel, 168–170 in Word, 63, 98–100 defined, 299 themes, 84–86, 218–219, 298 file types, 271–272 thesaurus, 46 tables, 240 3D effects, 75, 221 uses, appropriate, 2, 11–12 thumbnails, 83, 209–210, 212–213 uses, miscellaneous, 50, 66–67, tick boxes, 221, 298 103–104, 194–195 timestamping, 236 using, for invitations, 12, 173–199 tinting merge fields, 187 using, for letters, 17–52 title boxes, 237 using, for newsletters, 69–106 titles, OneNote, 236–237 using, for posters, 53–68 trackballs, 6 word processing, 299. See also Word transitions, 214–217, 298 WordArt, 75 translation, language, 46–47

U Y Yahoo mail, 263 underline, apply to text, 36 Undoing, 40, 127, 298 updating, 86–87, 101, 145 Z uploading, 50, 298 USB key, 10 zeros, retaining leading, 121 308

20_711965-bindex.indd 30820_711965-bindex.indd 308 9/13/10 2:57 PM9/13/10 2:57 PM